FCC ID: EHA802UIAG 802UIAG

 

6820 Compliance Insert For Users in the United States and Canada Caution: This marking indicates that the user should read all included documentation before use. Attention: Ce marquage indique que lusager doit, avant lutilisation, lire toute la documentation incluse. Users of this product are cautioned to use accessories and peripherals approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation. The use of accessories other than those recommended, or changes to this product that are not approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation, may void the compliance of this product and may result in the loss of the users authority to operate the equipment. Utilisateurs de ce produit sont aviss dutiliser des accessoires et des priphriques approuvs par Intermec Technologies Corporation. Lutilisation daccessoires autres que ceux recommands ou des changements ce produit qui ne sont pas approuvs par Intermec Technologies Corporation peuvent annuler la conformit de ce produit et mettre fin au droit qua lusager dutiliser l'quipement. FCC Digital Emissions Compliance This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the radio or television receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the radio or television receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for help. Canadian Digital Apparatus Compliance These Class B digital products meet all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Conformit aux normes canadiennes sur les appareils numriques Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. Battery Information Increase the separation between the computer equipment and receiver. Caution: The battery pack used in this device may ignite, create a chemical burn hazard, explode, or release toxic materials if mistreated. Do not incinerate, disassemble, or heat above 100C (212F). Do not short circuit; may cause burns. Keep away from children. Attention: Le bloc-piles utilis dans cet appareil peut prendre feu, constituer un risque de brlure chimique, exploser ou dgager des substances toxiques sil est manipul de faon inapproprie. Ne pas jeter au feu, dmonter ou chauffer plus de 100 C (212 F). Ne pas court-circuiter; cela pourrait causer des brlures. Garder hors de la porte des enfants. Battery Recycling Information This product contains or uses a lead acid battery. When the battery reaches the end of its useful life, the spent battery should be disposed of by a qualified recycler or hazardous materials handler. Do not mix this battery with the solid waste stream. Contact your Intermec Technologies Service Center for recycling or disposal information. Ce produit contient ou utilise une pile au plomb. Lorsque la batterie atteint la fin de sa dure de vie utile, la batterie uses doivent tre mises aux rebuts par un agent de recyclage ou un manipulateur de matriaux dangereux agr. Il ne faut pas mlanger la batterie aux autres dchets solides. Pour plus dinformations sur le recyclage ou la mise aux rebuts, contacter votre centre de services Intermec Technologies. Pb Pb Note: In the U.S.A., the EPA does not consider spent lead-acid batteries as hazardous waste. Power Supply Connections Caution: Use Intermec Model AE2 or AE27 for the power supply. No user-serviceable parts. Connexions du bloc dalimentation Attention: Employez le model dIntermec AE2 ou AE27 pour lalimentation dnergie. Il ne contient aucune pice parable par lutilisateur. Maximum Permissive Exposure (MPE) Radio Wave or Radio Frequency Maximum Permissive Exposure (MPE) for Model 6820 with Intermec mobile computers. When installing and using the Intermec 6820, a 20 cm (8 in) passing distance must be maintained from the body or head of the user or nearby persons and the device. This product meets FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with the Intermec accessories supplied or designated for this product. Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines. For Users Outside of the United States or Canada Caution: This marking indicates that the user should read all included documentation before use. The users of this product are cautioned to use accessories and peripherals approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation. The use of accessories other than those recommended, or changes to this product that are not approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation, may void the compliance of this product and may result in the loss of the users authority to operate the equipment. Battery Information Caution: The battery pack used in this device may ignite, create a chemical burn hazard, explode, or release toxic materials if mistreated. Do not incinerate, disassemble, or heat above 100C (212F). Do not short circuit; may cause burns. Keep away from children. Battery Recycling Information This product contains or uses a lead acid battery. When the battery reaches the end of its useful life, the spent battery should be disposed of by a qualified recycler or hazardous materials handler. Do not mix this battery with the solid waste stream. Contact your Intermec Technologies Service Center for recycling or disposal information. Pb Pb Power Supply Connections Caution: Use Intermec Model AE2 or AE27 for the power supply. No user-serviceable parts.

Intermec Technologies Corporation Intermec Technologies Corporation 100 C (212 F) Intermec Pb Pb Intermec AE2 AE27 Fr Benutzer auerhalb von Kanada oder den Vereinigten Staaten Vorsicht: Diese Kennzeichnung weist darauf hin, dass der Benutzer vor dem Gebrauch alle mitgelieferten Unterlagen lesen soll. Die Benutzer dieses Produkts werden darauf hingewiesen, nur Zubehrteile und Peripheriegerte zu verwenden, die von Intermec Technologies Corporation genehmigt sind. Falls nicht empfohlene Zubehrteile verwendet oder an diesem Produkt nderungen vorgenommen werden, die nicht von Intermec Technologies Corporation genehmigt sind, kann dadurch die behrdliche Konformitt des Produkts verletzt werden und der Benutzer die Berechtigung zur Verwendung des Gerts verlieren. Akku-Informationen Vorsicht: Der in diesem Gert verwendete Akkusatz kann sich bei Missbrauch entznden, chemische Vertzungen verursachen, expoldieren oder toxische Substanzen freisetzen. Nicht verbrennen, zerlegen oder ber 100 C (212 F) erwrmen. Keinen Kurzschluss verursachen; Verbrennungsgefahr. Von Kindern fern halten. Informationen zum Recycling von Batterien Dieses Produkt enthlt oder verwendet einen Bleisureakku. Wenn die Batterie ausgedient hat, sollte sie durch einen qualifizierten Recycler oder durch den Sondermll entsorgt werden. Werfen Sie die Batterie nicht in den Abfall. Setzen Sie sich mit Ihrem Intermec Technologies Service-Zentrum in Verbindung, um weitere Informationen zum Recycling oder Entsorgen zu erhalten. Pb Pb Stromanschlsse Vorsicht: Als Netzteil Intermec Modell AE2 oder AE27 verwenden. Enthlt keine Teile, die vom Benutzer gewartet werden knnen.

: . Intermec Technologies Corporation . Intermec Technologies Corporation ,

. 100C (212 F) . . . ,

. . Intermec . Pb Pb

: Intermec AE2 AE27 . . Para usurios fora do Canad ou dos Estados Unidos Cuidado: Esta identificao indica que o usurio deve ler toda a documentao fornecida antes do uso. Se advierte a los usuarios de este producto que usen accesorios y perifricos aprobados por Intermec Technologies Corporation. El uso de accesorios aparte de los recomendados, o los cambios a este producto que no estn aprobados por Intermec Technologies Corporation, pueden anular el cumplimiento de este producto y ocasionar la prdida de la autorizacin del usuario para operar el equipo. Informaes sobre a bateria Cuidado: A bateria utilizada neste dispositivo pode pegar fogo, criar risco de queimadura qumica, explodir ou exalar materiais txicos se abusada. No incinerar, desmontar nem aquecer a bateria a mais de 100C (212F). No provocar curto-circuito, pois pode causar queimaduras. Manter afastada de crianas. Infomaes de Reciclagem de Bateria Este produto contm ou usa bateria chumbo-cido. Quando a bateria chega ao fim da sua vida til, deve ser descartada por um profissional de reciclagem qualificado ou por um especialista no manuseio de materiais perigosos. No misture a bateria com fluxo de lixo slido. Entre em contato com seu Centro de Servios de Tecnologia Intermec para informaes de reciclagem ou descarte. Pb Pb Conexes da fonte de alimentao Ciudado: Usar fontes de alimentao Intermec Modelo AE2 ou AE27. No h nenhuma pea que possa ser substituda ou consertada pelo usurio.

, , Intermec Technologies Corporation. , ,

, Intermec Technologies Corporation,

. , , 100C (212 F). .

. - Intermec Technologies. Pb Pb

: Intermec AE2 AE27. ,

, . Para usuarios fuera de Canada o de los Estados Unidos Precaucin: Esta marca indica que el usuario debe leer toda la documentacin incluida antes del uso. Os usurios deste produto devem usar acessrios e perifricos aprovados pela Intermec Technologies Corporation. Usar acessrios no recomendados, ou fazer alteraes neste produto no aprovadas pela Intermec Technologies Corporation, poder anular a conformidade deste produto e resultar na perda da permisso do usurio de utilizar o equipamento. Informacin de la batera Precaucin: La batera que se usa en este dispositivo puede encenderse, crear un peligro de quemadura qumica, explotar o expedir materiales txicos si se trata indebidamente. No la incinere, desarme ni caliente sobre 100C (212F). No haga cortocircuitos porque pueden causar quemaduras. Mantngala alejada de los nios. Informacin acerca del reciclaje de la batera Este producto contiene o usa una batera de cido de plomo. Cuando la batera llega al final de su vida til, debe ser desechada por personal especializado en reciclaje de materiales o manejo de materiales peligrosos. No mezcle la batera con otros residuos slidos. Pnganse en contacto con su Centro de servicio de Intermec Technologies para obtener informacin sobre reciclaje o desecho de materiales. Pb Pb Conexiones de la fuente de alimentacin Precaucin: Para la fuente de alimentacin use el Modelo AE2 o AE27 de Intermec. No hay piezas a las cuales pueda dar servicio el usuario. Worldwide Headquarters Worldwide Headquarters 6001 36th Avenue West 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, Washington 98203 Everett, Washington 98203 U.S.A. U.S.A. tel 425.348.2600 tel 425.348.2600 fax 425.355.9551 fax 425.355.9551 www.intermec.com www.intermec.com 2008 Intermec Technologies 2006 Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. Corporation. All rights reserved. 6820 Compliance Insert

*933-059-004*

P/N 933-059-004

 

 

Part No. 074821-001 Important BTS080 Information!

Contents For Users in the United States and Canada....................................................................... 2 For Users Outside of the United States and Canada............................................................. 3 Pour les utilisateurs en dehors du Canada et des Etat-unis.................................................... 5 Fr Benutzer auerhalb von Kanada und den Vereinigten Staaten................................................ 6 Per gli utenti al di fuori del Canada o degli Stati Uniti ......................................................... 6 Para Usuarios Fuera de Canada o de los Estados Unidos ...................................................... 7 Para Usurios Fora do Canad ou dos Estados Unidos ......................................................... 8 For Users in the United States and Canada Place this supplement in your manual. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that can cause undesired operation. Federal Communications Commission Compliance FCC Digital Emissions Compliance This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the radio or television receiving antenna. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the radio or television Increase the separation between the computer equipment and receiver. receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for help. Operation Warning To comply with the FCCs RF exposure requirements and minimize health hazards:

The user shall not touch the antenna of this device when the device is in use. Caution Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Intermec could void the users authority to operate this equipment. Industry Canada Compliance This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. This device requires a radio license unless it is used totally inside a building. (The user must obtain this license.) Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. Cet appareil exige une license radio moins dtre entirement install dans un btiment. (Lutilisateur doit obtenir cette license.) 2 For Users Outside of the United States and Canada The Intermec product you purchased transmits and receives data using a 2.4 GHz Spread Spectrum system. Programming and configuration information for the transceivers is also provided in the host device documentation. Please check the Intermec Web site for additional documentation at www.intermec.com. Hereby, Intermec Technologies Corporation declares that this Model BTS080 is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC). This product has been assessed to the following standards:

ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.4.1 (2003-04) ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.2.1 (2002-08) EN 60950:1992 (incl. Amdt. 1-4, 11) The original Declaration of Conformity is available on the Intermec Technologies Corporation Web site at www.intermec.com. This product transmits electromagnetic waves at 2.4 GHz frequency range. It has been tested and found compliant with CENELEC EN50360 and EN50361, 1999/519/EC, ACA Radiocommunications Standard 2003, U.S. (OET Guide 65), and Canadian (RSS 102) RF exposure regulations. The transmitter modules output power is 11.9 mW. The products using this module are intended for business and industrial environments. They should not be used in residential environments and by children. 0981 This product is marked with this logo and uses radio frequency bands that are not harmonized throughout the European Community. The following table indicates the areas of intended use of the equipment and any known restrictions. 3 Country of Intended Use Yes Austria Belgium Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Ireland Italy Latvia Lithuania Luxembourg Malta The Netherlands Poland Portugal Slovakia Slovenia Spain Sweden United Kingdom Other non-EU:

Iceland Liechtenstein Norway Switzerland X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X License No Required Restrictions Details X Indoor use only Additional EMI/RFI Compliance This device meets the Class B limit requirements of CISPR 22. 4 Pour les utilisateurs en dehors du Canada et des Etat-unis Le produit Intermec que vous avez achet peut transmettre et recevoir des donnes laide dun systme dtalement du spectre de 2,4 GHz. Les informations de programmation et de configuration pour les metteurs-rcepteurs sont galement fournies dans la documentation de lappareil hte. Pour obtenir toute documentation supplmentaire, veuillez consulter le site Web dIntermec, ladresse www.intermec.com. Par la prsente, Intermec Technologies Corporation dclare que ce modle BTS080 est conforme aux exigences de base et autres exigences pertinentes de la Directive R&TTE (1999/5/EC). Ce produit a t valu par rapport aux normes suivantes :

ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.4.1 (2003-04) ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.2.1 (2002-08) EN 60950:1992 (comprenant lamendement 1-4, 11) La Dclaration de conformit originale est disponible sur le site Web dIntermec Technologies Corporation, ladresse www.intermec.com. Ce produit met des ondes lectromagntiques une plage de frquences de 2,4 GHz. Il a t valu et reconnu conforme aux rglements concernant lexposition la radiofrquence de CENELEC EN50360 et EN50361, de 1999/519/EC, de ACA Radiocommunications Standard 2003, des tats-Unis (OET Guide 65), et du Canada (RSS 102). La puissance de sortie du module metteur-rcepteur est de 11.9 mW. Les produits utilisant ce module sont destins des environnements commerciaux et industriels. Ils ne doivent pas tre utiliss dans des environnements rsidentiels et par des enfants. 0981 Ce produit est marqu de ce logo et il utilise des bandes de frquence radio qui ne sont pas harmonises sur le territoire de la Communaut europenne. Le tableau suivant rpertorie les zones dutilisation prvues pour lquipement et les restrictions connues. Pays dutilisation prvu Oui Licence requise Non Restrictions Dtails France X X Pour l'usage d'intrieur seulement. Conformit additionelle la norme EMI/RFI Cet appareil respecte les limites imposes pour la Classe B par le CISPR 22. 5 Fr Benutzer auerhalb von Kanada und den Vereinigten Staaten Das Intermec-Produkt, das Sie gekauft haben sendet und empfngt Daten mit Hilfe eines 2,4-GHz-

Spreizspektrumsystems. In der Dokumentation des Hostgertes finden Sie auerdem Informationen zum Programmieren und Konfiguriern der Sende-Empfangs-Gerte. Weitere Hinweise erhalten Sie auf der Intermec-Website unter www.intermec.com. Hiermit erklrt Intermec Technologies Corporation, dass das Modell BTS080 mit den wesentlichen Anforderungen und anderen sachdienlichen Vorschriften der R&TTE-Richtlinie (1999/5/EC) bereinstimmt. Dieses Produkt wurde gem der folgenden Normen bewertet:

ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.4.1 (2003-04) ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.2.1 (2002-08) EN 60950:1992 (einschl. Amdt. 1-4, 11) Die Originalkonformittserklrung steht auf der Website der Intermec Technologies Corporation unter www.intermec.com zur Verfgung. Dieses Produkt bermittelt elektromagnetische Wellen in einem Frequenzbereich von 2,4 GHz. Es wurde getestet und in bereinstimmung mit CENELEC EN50360 und EN50361, 1999/519/EC, ACA Radiocommunications Standard 2003, U.S. (OET Anleitung 65), und kanadischen (RSS 102) RF-

Bestrahlungsvorschriften befunden. Die Ausgangsleistung des Sende-Empfangs-Moduls betrgt 11.9 mW. Die Produkte, die dieses Modul verwenden, sind fr geschftliche und industrielle Umgebungen gedacht. Sie sollten nicht in Wohngegenden und in der Nhe von Kindern verwendet werden. 0981 Das Produkt ist mit diesem Markenzeichen versehen und verwendet Radiofrequenzbreiten, die in der Europischen Gemeinschaft nicht berall aufeinander abgestimmt sind. Zustzliche Elektromagnetische Strung-bereinstimmung Dieses Gert entspricht den Grenzbestimmungen der Klasse B von CISPR 22. Per gli utenti al di fuori del Canada o degli Stati Uniti Il prodotto Intermec che avete acquistato trasmette e riceve i dati tramite un sistema a 2,4 GHz che utilizza la tecnologia DSSS (spettro esteso). La documentazione del dispositivo host fornisce inoltre le informazioni sulla programmazione e la configurazione dei transceiver. Per altre informazioni, consultate il sito Web Intermec allindirizzo www.intermec.com. Con la presente Intermec Technologies Corporation dichiara che questo Modello BTS080 conforme ai requisiti essenziali e alle altre clausole importanti della direttiva R&TTE (1999/5/EC). Questo prodotto stato valutato in base ai seguenti standard:

ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.4.1 (2003-04) ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.2.1 (2002-08) EN 60950:1992 (incluso Amdt. 1-4, 11) 6 La dichiarazione di conformit originale disponibile presso il sito Web di Intermec Technologies Corporation a www.intermec.com. Questo prodotto trasmette onde elettromagnetiche con una frequenza intorno ai 2,4 GHz. Dai collaudi ai quali stato sottoposto risultato conforme alle norme CENELEC EN50360 e EN50361, 1999/519/EC, ACA Radiocommunications Standard 2003, statunitensi (OET Guide 65), e a quelle canadesi (RSS 102) relative allesposizione alle radiofrequenze. La potenza di uscita del modulo trasmittente di 11.9 mW. I prodotti che utilizzano questo modulo sono destinati ad ambienti industriali e commerciali e non debbono essere utilizzati in ambienti residenziali e dai bambini. 0981 Questo prodotto reca questo marchio ed utilizza bande di radiofrequnza che non sono armonizzate nellambito della Comunit Europea. Ulteriore conformit con EMI/RFI Questo dispositivo conforme ai limiti stabiliti in CISPR 22 per la Classe B. Para Usuarios Fuera de Canada o de los Estados Unidos Este producto de Intermec transmite y recibe datos por medio de un sistema de espectro ensanchado de 2,4 GHz. Para obtener informacin sobre la configuracin y programacin del transceptor, consulte la documentacin provista con el dispositivo host. Para obtener documentacin adicional, visite el sitio web de Intermec: www.intermec.com. Por la presente, Intermec Technologies Corporation declara que el Modelo BTS080 cumple con los requisitos esenciales de acuerdo con la directiva (1999/5/EC) de R&TTE. Este producto ha sido evaluado de acuerdo con los siguientes estndares o normas:

ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.4.1 (2003-04) ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.2.1 (2002-08) EN 60950:1992 (incl. Enmienda 1-4, 11) La Declaracin de Conformidad original est disponible en el sitio web de Intermec Technologies Corporation: www.intermec.com. Este producto transmite ondas electromagnticas de radio en la gama de frecuencias de 2,4 GHz. Ha sido probado y se ha determinado que cumple con las reglamentaciones del CENELEC EN50360 y EN50361, del 1999/519/EC, del ACA Radiocommunications Standard 2003, de los EE.UU. (OET Guide 65), y del Canad (RSS 102), referentes a la exposicin de RF. La potencia de salida del mdulo transmisor es de 11.9 mW. Los productos que usan este mdulo estn destinados para uso en ambientes comerciales e industriales. No deben ser usados en ambientes residenciales o en la proximidad de nios. 0981 Este producto est marcado con este logotipo y usa bandas de frecuencia de radio que no han sido armonizadas a lo largo de la Unin Europea. Conformidad adicional con EMI/RFI Este dispositivo cumple con los lmites requeridos para la Clase B de CISPR 22. 7 Para Usurios Fora do Canad ou dos Estados Unidos O produto Intermec que voc comprou transmite e recebe dados usando um sistema Espectro de Difuso de 2,4 GHz. As informaes sobre programao e configurao dos transceptores tambm so fornecidas na documentao do dispositivo hospedeiro. Consulte tambm o site da Intermec na web, no endereo www.intermec.com, para documentao complementar. Por este documento, a Intermec Technologies Corporation declara que o Modelo BTS080 atende aos requisitos essenciais e outras condies relevantes da Diretiva R&TTE (1999/5/EC). Esse produto foi avaliado em relao aos seguintes padres:

ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.4.1 (2003-04) ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.2.1 (2002-08) EN 60950:1992 (includa Amdt. 1-4, 11) A Declarao de Conformidade original est disponvel no site da web da Intermec Technologies Corporation no endereo www.intermec.com. Este produto transmite ondas eletromagnticas na faixa de freqncia de 2,4 GHz. Ele foi testado e aprovado quanto sua conformidade com os regulamentos de exposio RF do CENELEC EN50360 e EN50361, do 1999/519/EC, do ACA Radiocommunications Standard 2003, dos EUA (OET Guide 65), e do Canad (RSS 102). A potncia de sada do mdulo transmissor de 11.9 mW. Os produtos que usam este mdulo so destinados aos ambientes comerciais e industriais. Eles no devem ser utilizados em ambientes residenciais e por crianas. 0981 Este produto identificado por esta logomarca e utiliza bandas de freqncia de rdio que no esto harmonizadas na Comunidade Europia. Conformidades EMI/RFI Adicionais Este produto atende aos requisitos de limite Classe B do CISPR22. 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, WA 98203 U.S.A. www.intermec.com 2004 Intermec Technologies Corp. All Rights Reserved Important BTS080 Information!

*074821-001*

P/N 074821-001

 

 

Instructions IP4 Portable RFID Reader Contents Introducing the IP4 Portable RFID Reader . 3 What You Get . 3 Using the IP4 . 3 Charging and Installing the Battery . 3 Attaching Your IP4 to a 700 Color. 5

(Optional) Configuring Your IP4 as a Keyboard Wedge . 6 Reading an RFID Tag . 8 Understanding the IP4 LEDs . 9 Specifications . 10 ii IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions IP4 Portable RFID Reader Introducing the IP4 Portable RFID Reader The IP4 Portable RFID Reader is an accessory handle for the 700 Series Color mobile computers. Together, the IP4 and 700 Color provide a high-performance mobile RFID solution that allows you to bring the read/write device to the tagged product rather than moving tagged products past a fixed reader. What You Get Battery (Model AB12) Product documentation Using the IP4 To use the IP4, you need to perform these steps:

1 Charge and install the battery. 2 Attach your IP4 to a 700 Color. 3 (Optional) Configure your IP4 as a keyboard wedge. 4 Read an RFID tag. These instructions describe each step. Charging and Installing the Battery To charge the IP4 battery, you need the Dual Pack Battery Charger (Model AC12). To charge the IP4 battery Insert the battery into a slot on the AC12 battery charger. A fully discharged battery charges in less than 4 hours. IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions 3 To install the battery 1 Insert the battery tab on the top of the battery into the IP4. Battery tab 2 Firmly press the bottom of the battery onto the IP4 until the battery snaps into place. To remove the battery Push the battery release latch on the bottom of the IP4. Battery release latch 4 IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions Attaching Your IP4 to a 700 Color Your IP4 uses Infrared Data Association (IrDA) to communicate with the 700 Color. The lightpipe in the IP4 helps communicate the IrDA signal between the 700 Color and your IP4. Lightpipe Note: Do not remove the lightpipe from the IP4. To attach your IP4 to a 700 Color 1 Slide the 700 Color into the IP4 until it clicks into place. IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions 5 2 Secure the retaining screws, making sure that they are inserted straight into the 700 Color. To remove your IP4 from a 700 Color 1 Remove the two retaining screws. 2 Hold the 700 Color at the display. 3 While lifting the 700 Color up (away from the IP4), pull the 700 Color forward and out of the IP4.

(Optional) Configuring Your IP4 as a Keyboard Wedge You can configure your IP4 as a keyboard wedge to allow the 700 Color to receive data from your IP4 as it would from a keyboard. To use your IP4 as a keyboard wedge, the 700 Color and your IP4 must meet these requirements:

The 700 Color must have at least 64MB of flash ROM. The fifth character in the configuration number (CN) found on the back of the 700 Color must not be a 4 or 5. For example:

751B6xxxx meets this requirement. 760A4xxxx does not meet this requirement. 6 IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions The 700 Color must be running one of these operating systems (OS):

4.95.1 or later Prem (Premium) 4.96.4 or later GSM Phone If the fourth character in the configuration number (CN) of your IP4 is an A:

The 700 Color must be running IVA 4.03.35.1043 or later. Your IP4 must be running firmware version 5.19 or later. If the fourth character in the configuration number (CN) of your IP4 is an B:

The 700 Color must be running IVA 4.03.35.1050 or later. Your IP4 must be running firmware version 7.16 or later. Note: Use Intermec Settings to find the OS and IVA versions of the 700 Color. For help, see the users manual for the 700 Color. To configure your IP4 as a keyboard wedge 1 Fully charge your IP4 battery and attach your IP4 to a 700 Color. 2 On the 700 Color, start Intermec Settings. 3 Select RFID > Reader 1, and select Enable Reader. 4 Under Reader 1, select Reader Module > Tag Type, and select the type of RFID tag you are using. 5 From the main Intermec Settings menu, select Device Settings > Keypad > Scan Button Remapping > Handle Trigger, and select RFID. 6 Save your settings. IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions 7 To test the keyboard wedge 1 Start Microsoft Pocket Word. 2 Read an RFID tag. For help, see the next section. The RFID tag information appears in Pocket Word. Reading an RFID Tag You can scan at least six RFID tags per second with the IP4. Note: Continuously reading tags with the IP4 may cause the IP4 to overheat. If the IP4 temperature rises above the maximum operating temperature, the IP4 will stop reading tags. If this occurs, let the IP4 cool down until its temperature is within the operating temperature range. RF Exposure regulations limit exposure to radio frequency (RF) radiation. To comply with these regulations, operators of this device must maintain a distance of at least 20 cm (8 in) from the cover on the antenna assembly. (The cover on the antenna is the dome-shaped surface.) While the device is on, the operators body and parts of the body such as eyes, hands, or head, must be 20 cm (8 in) or farther from the cover of the antenna assembly. Avertissement: Les rglementations sur les expositions RF limitent l'exposition aux rayonnements RF. Pour se conformer ces rglementations, les oprateurs de ce dispositif doivent maintenir une distance minimale de 20 cm du couvercle de l'antenne. (Le couvercle de l'antenne est la surface bombe.) Lorsque l'appareil est sous tension, le corps et les parties du corps

(yeux, mains, tte) de l'oprateur doivent tre au moins 20 cm du couvercle de l'antenne. To read an RFID tag 1 Position the front of the IP4 within 91 cm (3 ft) of an RFID tag. 2 Pull the trigger. 8 IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions Understanding the IP4 LEDs Your IP4 uses LEDs to indicate the status of certain operations. LEDs IP4 LEDs: The IP4 LEDs are located on the back of the IP4. IP4 LED Descriptions Icon LED Description Power (PWR) This LED is green when +5 power is on and the IP4 is ready to read tags. This LED is green when data Host Communications

(HOST COMM) communication with the host is active. RF Power On (RF ON) This LED is green when RF power is Tag Communications

(TAG COMM) Battery

(BATT) on. This LED turns green after the IP4 successfully reads an RFID tag. This LED indicates the status of the battery:

Red: The battery is low (less than 20% capacity). Green: The battery is fully charged

(more than 80% capacity). Orange: The battery is charged

(from 20% to 80% capacity). IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions 9 Specifications This section contains specifications for the IP4. Environmental Specifications Specification Value Operating temperature 0C to 50C (32F to 122F) Storage temperature Relative humidity

-30C to 70C (-22F to 158F) 5 to 95% non-condensing 869 MHz Frequency Specification Value Source type Frequency band EIRP/ERP Output power 1 W maximum Modulation Data Rate Single Channel 869.525 MHz 0.5 watt ERP Minimum = 26.0 dBm Typical = 26.5 dBm Maximum = 27.0 dBm 80%

N/A 915 MHz Frequency Specification Value Source type Frequency band EIRP/ERP Output power 1 W maximum Modulation Data Rate Frequency hopper 902-928 MHz 1 watt EIRP Minimum = 28.5 dBm Typical = 29.5 dBm Maximum = 30.0 dBm 90%

38 to 44 Kbps 10 IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions Performance Specification Value RFID tag identification rate At least six tags per second with one to ten tags in the RF field, located at half the maximum reading distances from the IP4 front panel. RFID tag read distance 91 cm (3 ft) RFID tag data exchange rates Read a tag containing 8 bytes of data within 50 ms. Perform a verified write to tag at an average rate of 75 ms per byte per tag. Firmware Architecture Specification Description Firmware Communicates in Basic Reader Interface

(BRI) mode. Protocol/Compatibility ANSI NCITS 256.2000 for API, part 2, part 3-1 Reader Configuration Access Summary Control Mechanism Responsible Party Factory or Intermec Field Technician Remote or on-site field technician Customer System Administrator Hardware key or configuration tag Intermec-only password Configuration file Function Change Country Code Download updated firmware Setup, system configuration not secured at higher level, such as change battery or wake up default IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions 11 Patent Information Product is covered by one or more of the following patents:

5,673,037; 5,729,697; 5,777,561; 5,828,318; 5,850,187;

5,912,632; 5,942,987; 5,995,019; 6,032,127; 6,121,878;

6,172,596; 6,286,762; 6,288,629; 6,422,476; 6,429,775;

6,525,648; 6,529,880; 6,608,551; 6,639,509; 6,812,841;

6,812,852; 6,919,793. Patent Application 2002-0046173. There may be other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Worldwide Headquarters 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, Washington 98203 U.S.A. tel 425.348.2600 fax 425.355.9551 www.intermec.com 2007 Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions

*943-002-004*

P/N 943-002-004

 

 

6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Configuration of the Bluetooth radio and software is accomplished using the Bluetooth Configuration Commands listed in this appendix. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 133 Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Using Configuration Commands an h suffix are in hexadecimal a 0x prefix are in hexadecimal a b suffix are in binary All printable characters can be entered directly via the keyboard. Any non-printable characters are entered in binary data format. Numbers are in decimal format except numbers with:

Binary data format is any non seven-bit ASCII data to transmit to the module is encoded in the Internet percent notation. Any hex byte to transmit is preceded by the % sign and encoded in hex ASCII. To send the value 0xF5, the %F5 bytes are transmitted. The %character is always transmitted as %25. Thus, a Bluetooth address could transmit as %00%E0%03%45%F4%6D. Generic format:

<command character><command type><command payload><CR>

<command character> is one character from the set: [A-Z]

<command type> is one character for the set: [0-9]

<command payload> is variable in length.

<CR> is the command terminator. The <command payload> is formed from printable ASCII characters from the code range 0x20 to 0x7E. Codes outside of this range are escaped using the percent (%) character followed by two hexadecimal digits. The percent character is always represented by the three characters %25. The command terminator is character code 0x13 (carriage return), or character code 0x10 (line feed), or character codes 0x13, 0x10 (carriage return, line feed). An example command to set the friendly name to Lens 100% serial module:

F0Lens 100%25 serial module<CR>

Character codes outside of the range of 0x20 to 0x7E are ignored. When using percent (%) to form hexadecimal character codes there must be exactly two hex digits using characters: [0-9, A-F, a-f]. Characters outside of this range cause the command to fail. 134 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Commands that fail return the four character sequence NAK<CR>

Commands that are accepted return the four character sequence ACK<CR>

Commands that return payload data use the format:

<command character><command type><command payload><CR>

<command character> is one character from the set: [a-z]

<command type> is one character for the set: [0-9]

<command payload> is variable in length.

<CR> is the command terminator. The command character is the lower case version of the local host command. Operating Modes The module interface has two modes:

Bluetooth Link Active State In this case the Serial Interface looks like a raw serial port (TxD, RxD, CTS, etc. and GND). There is no intelligence in the Bluetooth module from the serial interface perspective. This mode does not support the command and control modes described below. Bluetooth Link Inactive State This mode exists when a Bluetooth link does not exist. In this case, the serial interface looks like a serial port that supports a number of command and control modes. On reset, the unit comes up in Bluetooth Link Inactive state. After the first Bluetooth connection, the unit goes into Bluetooth Link Active state. It stays in this state until the link is lost because the Master shuts it down or there is an out-of-range condition, it then returns to the Bluetooth Link Inactive state. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 135 Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Command and Control Modes Query Mode Commands Example Commands Command

?<CR>

?F0<CR>

?L<CR>

?C0<CR>

?C1<CR>

?D0<CR>

?D1<CR>

?S1<CR>

?S2<CR>

?S4<CR>

?T0<CR>

?B0<CR>

Command

?<CR>

?F0<CR>

?L<CR>

?C0<CR>

?C1<CR>

?D0<CR>

?D1<CR>

?S1<CR>

?S2<CR>

?S4<CR>

?T0<CR>

?B0<CR>

Function Read ACK Read Friendly Name Read Security Mode Read Connectable Mode Read Page Scan Timing Read Discoverable Mode Read Inquiry Scan Timing Read Class of Device Read Service Name Read PIN Code Read Shutdown Timeout in minutes Read Bluetooth Addresses of all the paired devices Reply ACK<CR>

f0MyFriendlyName<CR>

10<CR> Turn off Encryption, Authentication, and Exclusion 11<CR> Authentication 12<CR> Encryption and Authentication 13<CR> Encryption, Authentication, and Exclusive c0ON<CR>

c11024,512<CR>

d0ON<CR>

d11024,512<CR>

s1001F00<CR>

s2MyServiceName<CR>

s4MyPinCode<CR>

t0Shutdown Timer = 5 minutes<CR>

b0No Devices PairedCR>

136 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Note: These commands are only available over the serial link, not over the air and are not available when the device is in the Bluetooth Link Active State. Set Local Bluetooth Device Name Command Definition Default Example F0<Device Friendly Name><CR>

Device Name String up to 254 bytes long 6822-DDEEFF where DDEEFF is from the

(AABBCCDDEEFF) Bluetooth device address F01Lens 100%25 serial module<CR>

This sets the name to Lens 100% serial module. Set Class of Device/Service Field Command Description Example S1< Class of Device/Service field >

The Class of Device/Service (CoD) field is a 24-bit field defined in the Bluetooth Assigned Numbers document. This field is sent in a HEX ASCII format, most significant byte first. S1001F00<CR> is a common Class of Device value for a basic serial device. Set Service Name Command Description Definition Default Example S2<Service Name>

Sets the service friendly name to send to the remote Bluetooth device in response to a service discovery request. The length of the service name is limited to 32 bytes. Profile Name text name entered into the SDP record for the serial port profile Wireless Printer S3Acme Printer<CR>

Connectable On/Off Command Description C0 <ON|OFF><CR>

Sets the device into connectable mode 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 137 Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Example C0OFF<CR> Become non-connectable C0ON<CR> Become connectable Specify Page Scan Timing Command Description Default Example C1<Page_Scan_Interval>,<Page_Scan_Window><

CR>

Sets the Page Scan timing parameters 4096,18 C11024,512<CR>

Note: To enable scanning, the values for Interval and Window must be in the range of 18 to 4096. The Window value must be less than the Interval value. Both values must be zero to disable scanning. Note: Modifying Page Scan Timing can improve connection times, but may adversely affect battery performance. Enable Discoverable Command Description Example D0 <ON|OFF><CR>

Sets the device into discoverable mode D0OFF<CR> Become non-discoverable D0ON<CR> Become discoverable Specify Inquiry Scan Timing Command Description Default Example D1<Inquiry_Scan_Interval>,<

Inquiry_Scan_Window><CR>

Sets the Inquiry Scan timing parameters 4096,18 D11024,512<CR>

138 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Set Encryption/Authentication: PIN CODE Command Description Default Example S4<PIN code>

PIN Code Pin code can be NULL and as long as 16 characters S4%00 NULL PIN code S4MyPinCode <CR>

Manage Security Modes This command controls the security access mode and device pairing. The modes available are:

L0 Disable encryption, authentication and exclusion L1 Enable authentication L2 Enable encryption and authentication L3 Enable encryption, authentication and exclusive Mode L0 allows any remote device to connect. Mode L1 require the remote device to be authenticated by a PIN request. The PIN code for the module is set to a userspecified value with the S4 command. Currently the default PIN is the NULL string. Mode L2 adds encryption to the Bluetooth link. Mode L3 adds exclusive connection to one specific Bluetooth device. In this mode only connection requests from the initial device are allowed. Connections from other devices are rejected even if they supply the correct PIN code. Device pairing and bonding are associated with this command and works as follows:

After an L command is executed the current device pairing and bonding is deleted. The next device to connect becomes paired and bonded to the module. In Modes L1 and L2, other devices are allowed to connect but only the first device to connect is paired and bonded. Other devices are always required to supply a PIN code to complete the connection. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 139 Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications In Mode L3, only one device is allowed to connect. This device is paired and bonded and needs to supply the PIN code only on the initial connection. Note: Some of the Bluetooth user interfaces cannot supply a NULL string as a PIN code. Use the S4 command to specify a PIN code that is not NULL. Read Module Version Command Description V0<CR>

Displays the firmware build version currently running V0<CR>

Returns: v1yyyymmddHHMM<CR>

Note: This command responds with the requested data, only not the ACK<CR>. Example Read Local Device Address Command Description Returns V1<CR>

Displays the local device address v1%xx%xx%xx%xx%xx%xx<CR>

Note: This command responds with the requested data, only not the ACK<CR>. Example:

Sent: V1<CR>

Received: v1%00%2C%C6%03%45%39 140 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Set Shutdown Timing Command Description Range Default Example T0<Time in Minutes><CR>

Time Integer value 0 implies never expire the timer 0-270 minutes 120 T0120<CR> This sets the shutdown timer to 120 minutes. Clear Link Key Table Command Description Default Example B0<CLR><CR>

Clear Pair or Bonding command cleans up all of the link key and Bluetooth address combination PSKEYs. None B0CLR<CR> This clears all saved link keys. Understanding Adapter States or Modes The Bluetooth adapter connects to an internal serial port of the 6822, providing serial print data over a transparent Bluetooth link, running a Serial Port Profile (SPP). Printing is primarily accomplished over a Bluetooth link using the SPP protocol with a 700 Series or CK60 Mobile Computer. If the relevant printer configuration allows it, a 700 Series or CK60 in a terminal holder charges normally. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 141 Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications The Bluetooth adapter allows for four states or modes to be available. Each state is dependent upon either the pin states on the terminal holder connector or the programming connector on the adapter described later. Bluetooth Adapter States or Modes State State/mode 1 2 Bluetooth Printing Passthrough printing HHC_A/B pin 0 0 HHC_DTR pin 0 1 3 4 Bluetooth Reconfiguration Bluetooth programming cabled 1 X 0 X Comments Bluetooth printing/Bluetooth self-test Printing from 700 Series or CK60s allowed to pass through the Bluetooth adapter transparently. Reconfiguring Bluetooth module via 700 Series or CK60s. Programming Bluetooth module via programming cable State 1 - In addition to allowing normal Bluetooth printing, this state also allows for a 700 Series or CK60 in the terminal holder to perform a Bluetooth self-test. State 2 is a Transparent Pass Through mode available for all 700 Series and CK60s. During this mode, the Bluetooth module is shut down and does not communicate. State 3 (Bluetooth reconfiguring using a 700 Color (730, 740, 741, 750, 751, 760, 761) or CK60). This state is unavailable when a 700 Monochrome (705, 710, 720) is used, since the A/B pin is unavailable. State 4 allows for programming the Bluetooth module via its SPI pins. This state is also used for manufacturing tests. To be in this state, the 700 Series or CK60 must not have an open terminal holder COM port and the specially designed programming adapter must be engaged. The interfaces on the Bluetooth adapter that allow for the different modes are detailed below:

142 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications 700 Series or CK60 to 6822 Pass Through Note: Pass through printing requires shutting down the Bluetooth portion of the adapter. To reenable Bluetooth functionality after you finish pass through printing, press a button on the control panel to wake the printer. When DTR on the 700 Series or CK60 is set, the adapter board automatically opens a path between the 700 Series of CK60 and the 6822 Transition/DC Board and powers down the Bluetooth module. Testing the DSR pin to reflect DTR allows the mobile computer to differentiate between a Bluetooth-equipped terminal holder and a non-Bluetooth equipped terminal holder. 700 Series, CK60, or CN3 to Bluetooth Module Communication Interface The Bluetooth adapter allows a 700 Series, CK60, or CN3 to communicate directly with the Bluetooth module under two circumstances. When the configuration settings of the Bluetooth module are to print. When the Bluetooth module requires reconfiguration. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 143 Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Power Management Flow Diagram Bluetooth Power Management Flow Diagram 144 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Radio Power On/Off Mechanism Note: The shutdown timer configuration is addressed in Appendix A Bluetooth Configuration Commands. As stated earlier, the Bluetooth adapter, including the Bluetooth radio shuts down after a configurable time (default is two hours of idle time). To wake the Bluetooth adapter, the 6822 is powered on by any button push on the printer control panel. There are two ways to shutdown the Bluetooth module power:

A 700 Series, CK60, or CN3 initiates a pass through mode, or The Bluetooth module sends a shutdown signal after a configurable amount of time. Default is two hours of idle time. Note: The adapter complies with Bluetooth 1.1 specification, including bonding for authentication and enabling encryption. Persistent Storage These settings do not reset after a coldboot is performed on the printer:

Bluetooth Bonding Enable/Disable Bluetooth Encryption Enable/Disable Bluetooth Passkey Bluetooth Bonding List (Link Keys) Bluetooth Device Name Bluetooth Class of Device Discoverable setting Connectable setting Radio Shutdown Timer Timeout (default two hours of idle time) System Behavior/Software Considerations Discoverability The default mode is Discoverable. When configured to be discoverable, the adapter is discoverable at all times, except when:

an active Bluetooth connection exists 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 145 Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications you have just completed a pass-through printing print job the shutdown time has elapsed (default shutdown time is two hours). Connectability The default mode is connectable. When configured to be connectable, the printer is connectable at all times, except when:

an active Bluetooth connection exists you have just completed a pass-through printing print job the shutdown time has elapsed (default is two hours). Link Loss The 6822 Bluetooth adapter is able to recover from broken Bluetooth connections, including out-of-range, interference, power failure, or other conditions resulting in a broken connection. It returns to its previous Discoverable/Connectable state after a lost connection. Master/Slave Printer participates in a Bluetooth connection as the slave device. The Class of Device is 0x040680 which translates to a Service Class of Rendering, a Major Device Class of Imaging, and a Minor Device Class of Printer. The 6822 Bluetooth includes an SDP record that allows the printer to report an SPP instance with a service name of Wireless Printer. The default Bluetooth device name is 6822-DDEEFF, where DDEEFF matches the respective portion of the Bluetooth device address (AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF). If the printer the adapter is connecting to is known, the service name is changed to 6822-SN, where SN is replaced with the serial number of the 6822. The 6822 Bluetooth adapter can save 16 link keys across cold boots. Link keys are saved in a circular list. The 17th link key replaces the first, the 18th replaces the 2nd, and so on. Remote Configuration You can query the following items:

Discoverable State [Get/Set]

Connectable State [Get/Set]

146 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Bondable State [Get/Set] (Authentication) Encryption State [Get/Set]

Device Name [Get/Set]

Device Address[Get]

Class of Device[Get/Set]

Service Name [Get/Set]

Bluetooth Profile [Get]

Bluetooth Passkey [Set] (Get the fact that it is set) Radio Shutdown Timeout Bluetooth Performance Range Operating range is expected to range from a minimum separation of 10 cm to over 10 m with a 700 Color or CK60. Link Loss can occur when going in or out of range while communicating with other Bluetooth devices. Diagnostics Capabilities The Bluetooth radio settings are available to a user. The 6822 Bluetooth adapter sends a printout of Bluetooth information to the printer upon receiving a message from a 700 Series or CK60 in a terminal holder. An example self-test is shown below:

6822 Bluetooth Adapter Firmware:Version YYYY MMDD HHMM Bluetooth Configuration:

Device Address:0002371A0FD3 Device Name:6822-9843252 Discoverable:Yes Connectable:Yes Authentication:No Encryption:No Passkey:Not Applicable (or Key present if Authentication is enabled) Stored Link Keys:2 of 16 Power Management:

Shut Off Timer:120 minutes 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 147 Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications The Passkey entry either states Not Applicable or Key Present depending on the Authentication state. Applications A 6822 Bluetooth Information application that prints the Bluetooth self-

test information on the 6822 can be installed on your 700 Series or CK60. To use the Bluetooth Information application 1 Insert the 700 Series or CK60 in the terminal holder on the 6822. 2 Tap the Start > Programs > the 6822 BT Information icon on your 700 Series or CK60 computer. 3 Press the Set Page button on the printer control panel to wake the printer. 4 From the 6822 Bluetooth Self-Test screen, tap the Trigger Self Test button to print the information. 148 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications System Qualification Operation Resilience Normal operation of the Bluetooth system is available in environments with radio backbones, including 802.11b, Spectrum 24, and OpenAir technologies. Environmental Specifications Temperature Operating Temperature -20 to 60C (-4 to 140F) Storage Temperature -30 to 70C (-22 to 158F). Temperature Test Results Test Operating Cold to Hot Transition Operating Hot to Cold Transition Humidity Operating Storage Range

-20C to 50C

(-4F to 122F) 50C to 20C

(122F to -4F) Comments External condensation allowed, internal prohibited Speed shall not degrade 5% to 95% RH non-condensing 90% 25 to 60C (48 to 140F) no condensation 90% 25 to 60C (48 to 140F) no condensation Altitude

-100 to 5000 meters Vibration Test Results Test Quasi-Random 3 axis Dynamic Induced Shock Operating Storage When packed Frequency Acceleration Comments 12 g RMS, for 4 hours 20 g on 3 axis 1 G 5 Hz to 80 Hz 3 G 5 Hz to 80 Hz 5 to 55 Hz 2 G 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 149 Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Vibration Test Results (continued) Test Sweep Duration Directions Comments 10 minutes (half cycle) 1 hour x, y, and z No external or internal damage should be found after the vibration test, and the unit should operate normally. Unpackaged Drop 2 feet to concrete Terminal Inspection Minimum of 30,000 insertions for the terminal holder. Safety/Regulatory/Agency Requirements The Bluetooth adaptor must meet the electrical safety requirements for Information Technology Equipment. The test configuration must include a portable computer connected to the 6822, continuously printing the letter H. At least 6dB of margin below the relevant limits must be demonstrated. Safety, Regulatory, Agency Requirements Option Product Safety Requirement UL Listed per UL 1950 / UL 60950 (printer and AC power supply) CSA C22.2, No. 950 TUV/GS License per EN 60950 (printer, AC power supply) CB Report for EN 60950 covering all country deviations (Printer, ac power supply) UL 2089 (for cigarette lighter-style adapters) SAE J1113 or ISO 7637 FCC Class B (US); Industry Canada ICES-003 Class B (Canada) CISPR 22 Class B, including telecom port conducted (Europe) AS/NZS 3548 (Australia/New Zealand); CNS 13438 (Taiwan) IEC 61000-4-2Electrostatic Discharge IEC 61000-4-3Radiated RF Field Vehicle Power Interfaces EMC Digital device radiated and conducted emissions EN 55024 Immunity

(Europe) 150 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Safety, Regulatory, Agency Requirements (continued) Option EMC (continued) Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Requirement IEC 61000-4-4Electrical Fast Transients IEC 61000-4-5Surge IEC 61000-4-6Conducted RF IEC 61000-4-8Magnetic Field IEC 61000-4-11Voltage Dips and Interrupts (AC printers only). IEC 61000-3-2 (per Amendment 14) Class A if under 70 Watts loaded to 90% of rated value, Class D if over 70 Watts loaded to 90% of rated value IEC 61000-3-3 Voltage Fluctuation and Flicker. Bluetooth Radio - Modular radio approval is required. BT SIG approval is not mandatory but BT SIG GAP and SPP conformance is a prerequisite. FCC Part 15.247 (US) RSS-210 (Canada - indoor operation, unlicensed. Outdoor operation IF restricted to 2.450-2.4835 GHz) RSS-139 (Canada - indoor/outdoor operation, licensed. 2.400-

2.4835GHz) RSS-102 (Canada) - RF Exposure/SAR. Keep antennas more than 8 inches from operator to avoid SAR testing EN 300 328-1 & -2; EN 300 489-1 & 17 (Europe). SCT (Mexico) IEC950 2nd Edition, 4th Amendment or IEC 60950 3rd Edition, resulting in a GS Mark and a CB Report addressing all country deviations S Mark for Argentina for any device connecting directly to the AC mains CCIB Approval for China for any device connecting directly to the AC mains Mexico NOM 19 as applicable AC power supply

(Europe) Radio Type Approval Additional Approvals 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 151 Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Default Configuration Default Configurations Setting Bluetooth Authentication Discoverable Connectable Class of Device Service Name Device Name Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits Parity Handshaking Radio Shutdown Timeout Default Off True True 0x040680 Wireless Printer 6822-DDEEFF 19,200 8 1 None Hardware 120 minutes 152 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual C Cross-Reference Tables A set of cross-reference tables are provided to assist you in locating control codes and escape sequences. The default settings are also included. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 153 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences The following table contains a complete alphabetized list of control codes, including single character control codes and escape sequences, as an aid to locating the control codes defined in Chapter 5 Control Code Definitionsor detailed definitions of these control codes, refer to the pages shown in the Page column of this table. Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index Description A Absolute Print Position, Set B Backspace Beeper Category General Printer Control General Printer Control General Printer Control Bottom-Up Printing, Select General Printer Control Byte:

Double Byte Character Sets Char. Sets, User Defined Multi-Byte Character Sets Char. Sets, User Defined Single Byte Character Sets Char. Sets, User Defined C Cancel Line Carriage Return Channel:

General Printer Control General Printer Control Page

<Hyper link10>

page 65

<Hyper link10>

page 62

<Hyper link10>

page 63

<Hyper link10>

page 66

<Hyper link10>

page 82

<Hyper link10>

page 82

<Hyper link10>

page 82

<Hyper link10>

page 63

<Hyper link10>

page 63 154 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Clear Vertical Tabs in Channel Category Tabs and Tab Setting Select Vertical Tab Channel Tabs and Tab Setting Set Vertical Tabs in Channel Tabs and Tab Setting Page

<Hyper link10>

page 81

<Hyper link10>

page 81

<Hyper link10>

page 81 Character:

Define Intercharacter Space Define User-Defined Characters Disable Printing of Character Graphics Double Byte Character Sets Enable Printing of Character Graphics Multi-Byte Character Sets Print Character Graphics Select Default Character Set Select National Character Set Select User-Defined Character Set Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 74

<Hyper link10>

page 86

<Hyper link10>

page 90

<Hyper link10>

page 82

<Hyper link10>

page 89

<Hyper link10>

page 82

<Hyper link10>

page 90

<Hyper link10>

page 87

<Hyper link10>

page 83

<Hyper link10>

page 87 Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 155 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Single Byte Character Sets Category Char. Sets, User Defined User Defined Characters Char. Sets, User Defined Code Code page Selection Char. Sets, User Defined Disable Printing of Codes 128-255 Char. Sets, User Defined Enable Printing of Codes 128-255 Char. Sets, User Defined Expand Printable Code Area Char. Sets, User Defined Page

<Hyper link10>

page 82

<Hyper link10>

page 86

<Hyper link10>

page 83

<Hyper link10>

page 88

<Hyper link10>

page 88

<Hyper link10>

page 88 156 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Description Condensed (compressed):

Cancel Condensed Mode Copy ROM to RAM Select Condensed Mode D Default Character Set, Select Define Intercharacter Space Define User-Defined Characters Delete Double:

Cancel Double Strike Mode Cancel Double Wide Mode Cancel Double Wide Mode (one line only) Double Byte Character Sets Select Double Strike Mode Category Page Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 71

<Hyper link10>

page 86 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 71

<Hyper link10>

page 87 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 74

<Hyper link10>

page 86

<Hyper link10>

page 63 Char. Sets, User Defined General Printer Control Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 72 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 73

<Hyper link10>

page 82 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 72 Char. Sets, User Defined 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 157 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Select Double Wide Mode Select Double Wide Mode (one line only) E Elite Pitch, Select Emphasized Mode, Cancel Emphasized Mode, Select Expand:

Cancel Double Wide (expanded) Mode Cancel Double Wide Mode (one line only) Expand Printable Code Area Select Double Wide (expanded) Mode Select Double Wide Mode (one line only) F Form Feed G General Printer Control Functions Graphics:

158 Page Category Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 72 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 74 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 74 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 74 Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 73

<Hyper link10>

page 88 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 72

<Hyper link10>

page 64

<Hyper link10>

page 62 General Printer Control General Printer Control 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Disable Printing of Character Graphics Category Char. Sets, User Defined Eight-Pin Graphics Modes Graphics Functions Reassign Graphics Mode Graphics Functions Select Graphics Mode Graphics Functions Select High-Speed Double Density Mode Graphics Functions Select Low-Speed Double Density Mode Graphics Functions Select Low-Speed Quadruple Density Mode Graphics Functions Select Single Density Graphics Mode Graphics Functions Enable Printing of Character Graphics Char. Sets, User Defined Nine-Pin Graphics Modes Graphics Functions Select 9-Pin Double Density Graphics Mode Graphics Functions Select 9-Pin Single Density Graphics Mode Graphics Functions Print Character Graphics Char. Sets, User Defined Page

<Hyper link10>

page 90

<Hyper link10>

page 91

<Hyper link10>

page 91

<Hyper link10>

page 91

<Hyper link10>

page 92

<Hyper link10>

page 92

<Hyper link10>

page 92

<Hyper link10>

page 92

<Hyper link10>

page 89

<Hyper link10>

page 93

<Hyper link10>

page 93

<Hyper link10>

page 93

<Hyper link10>

page 90 H Half Speed:

6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 159 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Cancel Half-Speed Printing Category General Printer Control Select Half-Speed Printing General Printer Control Page

<Hyper link10>

page 64

<Hyper link10>

page 64 Horizontal:

Clear Horizontal Tabs Perform Horizontal Tab Set Horizontal Tabs I Inactivity Time for Sleep Mode, Set Intercharacter Space, Define Italic:

Cancel Italic Mode Select Italic Mode L Left Margin, Set Length:

Tabs and Tab Setting Tabs and Tab Setting Tabs and Tab Setting

<Hyper link10>

page 79

<Hyper link10>

page 78

<Hyper link10>

page 79

<Hyper link10>

page 64 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 74 General Printer Control Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 75 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 75

<Hyper link10>

page 70 Page Formatting Set Page Length (inches) Page Formatting Set Page Length (lines) Page Formatting

<Hyper link10>

page 68

<Hyper link10>

page 68 160 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Description Line, Cancel Line Feed:

Perform Line Feed Category General Printer Control General Printer Control Perform n/216 inch Line Feed General Printer Control Perform n/216 inch Reverse Line Feed General Printer Control Line Spacing:

Select 1/6 inch Line Spacing Page Formatting Select 1/8 inch Line Spacing Page Formatting Select 7/72 inch Line Spacing Page Formatting Select n/72 inch Line Spacing Page Formatting Select n/216 inch Line Spacing Page Formatting Page

<Hyper link10>

page 63

<Hyper link10>

page 65

<Hyper link10>

page 65

<Hyper link10>

page 65

<Hyper link10>

page 69

<Hyper link10>

page 68

<Hyper link10>

page 69

<Hyper link10>

page 69

<Hyper link10>

page 69 M Margin:

Set Left Margin Set Right Margin Master Select Page Formatting Page Formatting

<Hyper link10>

page 70

<Hyper link10>

page 69 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 75 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 161 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Master Reset, Perform Mode:

Cancel Condensed Mode (compressed) Cancel Double Strike Mode Cancel Double Wide (expanded) Mode Cancel Double Wide Mode (one line only) Cancel Emphasized Mode Cancel Italic Mode Cancel Subscript/Superscript Mode Cancel Underline Mode Select Condensed Mode (compressed) Select Double Strike Mode Select Double Wide (expanded) Mode Select Double Wide Mode (one line only) Category General Printer Control Page

<Hyper link10>

page 65 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 71 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 72 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 74 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 75 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 78 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 78 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 71 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 72 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 72 162 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Description Select Emphasized Mode Select Elite Pitch Select Italic Mode Select Pica Pitch Select Subscript Mode Select Superscript Mode Select Underline Mode Set Inactivity Time for Sleep Mode Multi-Byte Character Sets N National Character Set, Select O One Line Only:

Cancel Double Wide Mode (one line only) Select Double Wide Mode (one line only) Select Unidirectional Printing (one line only) Page Category Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 74 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 74 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 75 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 77 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 77 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 77 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 78

<Hyper link10>

page 64

<Hyper link10>

page 82

<Hyper link10>

page 83 Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined General Printer Control Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 72

<Hyper link10>

page 67 General Printer Control 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 163 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description P Page:

Category Set Page Length (inches) Page Formatting Set Page Length (lines) Page Formatting Perforation:

Cancel Skip Over Perforation Page Formatting Set Skip Over Perforation Page Formatting Page

<Hyper link10>

page 68

<Hyper link10>

page 68

<Hyper link10>

page 71

<Hyper link10>

page 70 Pitch:

Select Elite Pitch Select Pica Pitch Position:

Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 74 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 77 Set Print Position (absolute) General Printer Control Set Print Position (relative) General Printer Control Print:

Cancel Half-Speed Printing General Printer Control Cancel Unidirectional Printing General Printer Control Disable Printing of Character Graphics Char. Sets, User Defined

<Hyper link10>

page 65

<Hyper link10>

page 66

<Hyper link10>

page 64

<Hyper link10>

page 67

<Hyper link10>

page 90 164 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Disable Printing of Codes 128-255 Category Char. Sets, User Defined Enable Printing of Character Graphics Char. Sets, User Defined Enable Printing of Codes 128-255 Char. Sets, User Defined Expand Printable Code Area Char. Sets, User Defined Print Character Graphics Char. Sets, User Defined Select Bottom-Up Printing General Printer Control Select Half-Speed Printing General Printer Control Select Top-Down Printing General Printer Control Select Unidirectional Printing General Printer Control Select Unidirectional Printing (one line only) General Printer Control Set Print Position (absolute) General Printer Control Set Print Position (relative) General Printer Control R Reset, Perform Master General Printer Control Page

<Hyper link10>

page 88

<Hyper link10>

page 89

<Hyper link10>

page 88

<Hyper link10>

page 88

<Hyper link10>

page 90

<Hyper link10>

page 66

<Hyper link10>

page 64

<Hyper link10>

page 66

<Hyper link10>

page 67

<Hyper link10>

page 67

<Hyper link10>

page 65

<Hyper link10>

page 66

<Hyper link10>

page 65 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 165 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Reverse n/216 inch Line Feed, Perform Category General Printer Control Right Margin, Set Page Formatting ROM to RAM, Copy Char. Sets, User Defined S Single Byte Character Sets Char. Sets, User Defined Skip:

Cancel Skip Over Perforation Page Formatting Set Skip Over Perforation Page Formatting Sleep Mode, Set Inactivity Time for General Printer Control Page

<Hyper link10>

page 65

<Hyper link10>

page 69

<Hyper link10>

page 86

<Hyper link10>

page 82

<Hyper link10>

page 71

<Hyper link10>

page 70

<Hyper link10>

page 64 Space:

Define Intercharacter Space Select 1/6 inch Line Spacing Select 1/8 inch Line Spacing Select 7/72 inch Line Spacing Select n/72 inch Line Spacing Page Formatting Page Formatting Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 74

<Hyper link10>

page 69

<Hyper link10>

page 68

<Hyper link10>

page 69

<Hyper link10>

page 69 Page Formatting Page Formatting 166 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Select n/216 inch Line Spacing Category Page Formatting Page

<Hyper link10>

page 69 Strike:

Cancel Double Strike Mode Select Double Strike Mode Subscript/Superscript:

Cancel Subscript/Superscript Mode Select Subscript Mode Select Superscript Mode Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 72 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 72 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 78 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 77 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 77 T Tab:

Clear Horizontal Tabs Tabs and Tab Setting Clear Vertical Tabs Tabs and Tab Setting Clear Vertical Tabs in Channel Tabs and Tab Setting Perform Horizontal Tab Tabs and Tab Setting Perform Vertical Tab Tabs and Tab Setting Select Vertical Tab Channel Tabs and Tab Setting

<Hyper link10>

page 79

<Hyper link10>

page 80

<Hyper link10>

page 81

<Hyper link10>

page 78

<Hyper link10>

page 80

<Hyper link10>

page 81 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 167 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Set Horizontal Tabs Category Tabs and Tab Setting Set Vertical Tabs Tabs and Tab Setting Set Vertical Tabs in Channel Tabs and Tab Setting Time for Sleep Mode, Set Inactivity General Printer Control Top-Down Printing, Select General Printer Control Page

<Hyper link10>

page 79

<Hyper link10>

page 80

<Hyper link10>

page 81

<Hyper link10>

page 64

<Hyper link10>

page 66 U Underline:

Cancel Underline Mode Select Underline Mode Unidirectional:

Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 78 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 78 Cancel Unidirectional Printing General Printer Control Select Unidirectional Printing General Printer Control Select Unidirectional Printing (one line only) General Printer Control User Defined Characters:

Copy ROM to RAM Char. Sets, User Defined Define User-Defined Characters Char. Sets, User Defined

<Hyper link10>

page 67

<Hyper link10>

page 67

<Hyper link10>

page 67

<Hyper link10>

page 86

<Hyper link10>

page 86 168 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Disable Printing of Character Graphics Category Char. Sets, User Defined Disable Printing of Codes 128-255 Char. Sets, User Defined Enable Printing of Character Graphics Char. Sets, User Defined Enable Printing of Codes 128-255 Char. Sets, User Defined Expand Printable Code Area Char. Sets, User Defined Print Character Graphics Char. Sets, User Defined Select Default Character Set Char. Sets, User Defined Select User-Defined Character Set Char. Sets, User Defined V Vertical:

Clear Vertical Tabs Tabs and Tab Setting Clear Vertical Tabs in Channel Tabs and Tab Setting Perform Vertical Tab Tabs and Tab Setting Select Vertical Tab Channel Tabs and Tab Setting Set Vertical Tabs Tabs and Tab Setting Page

<Hyper link10>

page 90

<Hyper link10>

page 88

<Hyper link10>

page 89

<Hyper link10>

page 88

<Hyper link10>

page 88

<Hyper link10>

page 90

<Hyper link10>

page 87

<Hyper link10>

page 87

<Hyper link10>

page 80

<Hyper link10>

page 81

<Hyper link10>

page 80

<Hyper link10>

page 81

<Hyper link10>

page 80 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 169 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Set Vertical Tabs in Channel Category Tabs and Tab Setting Page

<Hyper link10>

page 81 W Wide:

Cancel Double Wide (expanded) Mode Cancel Double Wide Mode (one line only) Select Double Wide (expanded) Mode Select Double Wide Mode (one line only) Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>

page 72 Single Character Control Code Definitions This table contains control codes between 00h and 7Fh, and provides definitions for the ASCII symbols as used in the table on the next page and in format definitions in Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions. Single Character Control Code Definitions Used as a terminator for several escape sequences. ASCII Description NUL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BEL Hex 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 Dec 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 170 Beeper: sounds buzzer for 1/10 of a second. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Page

<Hyper link10>

page 63 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Single Character Control Code Definitions (continued) Dec 8 Hex 08 ASCII Description BS Backspace: moves printhead one space to left. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 09 0A 0B HT Horizontal Tab: moves printhead to next tab stop. LF Line Feed: moves paper to next line. VT Vertical Tab: moves paper to next vertical tab stop 0C FF Form Feed: advances paper to top of next page. 0D CR Carriage Return: moves printhead to left margin. SO Shift Out: selects double-wide mode (one-line-only) SI Shift In: selects condensed (compressed) mode DLE DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 Device Control 1: sets printer online (not currently used) Device Control 2: cancels condensed mode (compressed) <Hyper link10>

page 71 Device Control 3: sets printer offline (not currently used) Device Control 4: cancels double-wide mode (one line only) NAK SYN ETB CAN Cancel Line: clears all characters out of print buffer. Page

<Hyper link10>

page 62

<Hyper link10>

page 78

<Hyper link10>

page 65

<Hyper link10>

page 79

<Hyper link10>

page 64

<Hyper link10>

page 63

<Hyper link10>

page 72

<Hyper link10>

page 71

<Hyper link10>

page 73

<Hyper link10>

page 63 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 171 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Single Character Control Code Definitions (continued) Dec 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 127 Hex 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 7F ASCII Description EM SUB ESC FS GS RS US SP DEL Escape: defines start of escape sequence. Space Character Delete: deletes last character in print buffer. Page

<Hyper link10>

page 63 172 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Escape Sequence Quick Reference The following table is a quick reference between the escape sequences listed in ascending order, according to numeric values. For detailed definitions, see Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions. Escape Sequence Quick Reference Decimal ESC SO ESC SI ESC US (0) ESC US (1) ESC SP n ESC ! n ESC $ n1 n2 ESC % (0) ESC % (1) ESC & NUL k1 k2 s1 d1...d11 ESC * m n1 n2 ESC + n d1...dn ESC - 0*

ESC - 1*

ESC / c ESC 0 ESC 1 ESC 2 ESC 3 n ESC 4 ESC 5 ESC 6 ESC 7 ESC <

ESC : NUL NUL NUL ESC ? s n Description Select Double-Wide (expanded) Mode (one line only) Select Condensed Mode (compressed) Select Top-Down Printing Select Bottom-Up Printing Define Inter-Character Space Master Select Set Print Position (absolute) Select Default Character Set Select User-Defined Character Set Define User-Defined Characters Select Graphics Mode Print Character Graphics Cancel Underline Mode Select Underline Mode Select Vertical Tab Channel Select 1/8 inch Line Spacing Select 7/72 inch Line Spacing Select 1/6 inch Line Spacing Select n/216 inch Line Spacing Select Italic Mode Cancel Italic Mode Enable Printing of Codes 128-255 Disable Printing of Codes 128-255 Select Unidirectional Printing (one line only) Copy ROM to RAM Reassign Graphics Mode 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 173 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Escape Sequence Quick Reference (continued) Decimal ESC @

ESC A n ESC B NUL ESC B n1 n2 ... nk NUL ESC C n ESC C NUL n ESC D NUL ESC D n1 n2 ... nk NUL ESC E ESC F ESC G ESC H ESC I n ESC J n ESC K n1 n2 ESC L n1 n2 ESC M ESC N n ESC O ESC P ESC Q n ESC R n0 n1 n2 ESC R n ESC S 0*

ESC S 1*

ESC T ESC U 0*

ESC U 1*

ESC W 0*

ESC W 1*

ESC Y n1 n2 ESC Z n1 n2 Description Perform Master Reset Select n/72 inch Line Spacing Clear Vertical Tabs Set Vertical Tabs Set Page Length (lines) Set Page Length (inches) Clear Horizontal Tabs Set Horizontal Tabs Select Emphasized Mode Cancel Emphasized Mode Select Double-Strike Mode Cancel Double-Strike Mode Expand Printable Code Area Perform n/216 inch Line Feed Select Single-Density Graphics Mode Select Low-Speed Double-Density Graphics Mode Select Elite Pitch Set Skip Over Perforation Cancel Skip Over Perforation Select Pica Pitch Set Right Margin Code page Selection Select National Character Set Select Superscript Mode Select Subscript Mode Cancel Superscript/Subscript Mode Cancel Unidirectional Printing Select Unidirectional Printing Cancel Double-Wide (expanded) Mode Select Double-Wide (expanded) Mode Select High-Speed Double-Density Graphics Mode Select Low-Speed Quadruple-Density Graphics Mode 174 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Escape Sequence Quick Reference (continued) Decimal ESC ^ (0) n1 n2 ESC ^ (1) n1 n2 ESC b c NUL ESC b c n1 n2 ... nk NUL ESC j n ESC l n ESC s 0*

ESC s 1*

ESC t (0) ESC t (1) ESC z n ESC \ n1 n2 Description Select 9-pin Single Density Graphics Mode Select 9-pin Double Density Graphics Mode Clear Vertical Tab Channel Set Vertical Tabs in Channel Perform n/216 inch Reverse Line Feed Set Left Margin Cancel Half-Speed Printing Select Half-Speed Printing Disable Printing of Character Graphics Enable Printing of Character Graphics Set Inactivity Time for Sleep Mode Set Print Position (relative) Factory-Installed Printer Defaults Factory-Installed Printer Defaults Function Carriage position Character set Code page Codes 128-255 Condensed (compressed) Double-Strike Double-Wide Emphasized Graphics mode Half-Speed printing Intercharacter space International character sets Italic Justification Default Value At left margin Normal (not user defined) 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Not selected Disabled Zero (0) Disabled Disabled Left justification 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 175 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Factory-Installed Printer Defaults (continued) Function Keyboard, printer Language Line Spacing Margin, left Margin, right MSB control NLQ Page length Default Value Enabled USA 1/6 inch 0 80 Disabled Disabled 11 inch (66 lines with Pica pitch) Enabled Pica (10 characters per inch) 10 seconds Top-down, bidirectional Paper end sensor Pitch Power off sleep timer Printer Code Area Expansion Disabled Printing direction Redefinition of graphic modes Disabled Skip over perforation Disabled Disabled Subscript/Superscript Tabs, horizontal Set to default tabs (every 8 column) 1 line feed each tab, channel = 0 Set to current line Disabled Disabled (bidirectional) Removed Tabs, vertical Top of form Underline Unidirectional printing User defined character set The settings in the previous table are installed in the printer at the factory. To restore the printer to these defaults, see Reset Button on page 4 for instructions. The default settings listed below can be restored to the printer, as described in Chapter 4 Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility. 176 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Printer Default Settings Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Function Zero print option Autofeed configuration Protocol Parity Bit Rate Default Value Zeros are printed with a slash CR (carriage return added at end of line without line feed) NPCP (NORAND Portable Communications Protocol) N/A (for NPCP) 19.2K 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 177 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables 178 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual D Printer Font Test Jobs This appendix contains a sample print job for each font available on your 6822 printer. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 179 Appendix D Printer Font Test Jobs About the Printer Font Jobs You can perform these tests yourselves. Load the font of choice from the Toolkit CD into flash memory. After downloading the desired font, use any of the sample print jobs to reveal the character locations within the printer memory. The sample test print jobs are formatted as a memory mapped and could be referenced to select a desired character. These test print jobs originated from running a C program by a person with specific knowledge of how to generate such a report (print job). The C program demonstrates how a programmer could access the printer font modules within flash memory to select desired character. You do not need more than one font module loaded. Any ONE of:

nft00932.mod, nft00936.mod, nft00949.mod, or even nft00950.mod Asian fonts can be used. These are distributed via the NPTK6822 toolkit

(including the source code). These print jobs are in this appendix:

BIG5.C which creates BIG5950.TXT CHINA.C which creates GB2312.TXT IBM437.C which creates IBM437.TXT JAPAN.C which creates JIS932.TXT KOREA.C which creates KOREA.TXT NATION.C which creates NATION.TXT Big 5 Traditional Chinese Character Set This program generates a text file, big5950.txt, to copy to a 6822. The text file illustrates the use of the BIG 5 traditional Chinese character set. Install the BIG 5 character font (nft00950.mod) using the Printer Configuration Utility. To have big5950.txt print correctly 1 Use the Microsoft C version 7.00 compiler. cl big5.c /link slibce graphics 2 Run big5.exe to create big5950.txt. 3 Copy this text file to the appropriate printer port. 180 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manuall Simplified Chinese Character Set Appendix D Printer Font Test Jobs This program generates a text file, gb2312.txt, that to copy to a 6822. The text file illustrates the use of the Simplified Chinese character set. Install the Simplified Chinese character font (nft00936.mod) using the Printer Configuration Utility. To have gb2312.txt print correctly 1 Use the Microsoft C version 7.00 compiler. cl china.c /link slibce graphics 2 Run china.exe to create gb2312.txt. 3 Copy this text file to the appropriate printer port. IBM 437 Code Page Character Set This program generates a text file, ibm437.txt, to copy to a 6822. The text file illustrates the use of the IBM 437 code page character set. Install the IBM 437 character font (nft00437.mod) using the Printer Configuration Utility. To have ibm437.txt print correctly 1 Use the Microsoft C version 7.00 compiler. cl ibm437.c /link slibce graphics 2 Run ibm437.exe to create ibm437.txt. 3 Copy this text file to the appropriate printer port. Japanese (Shift JIS) Character Set This program generates a text file, jis932.txt, to copy to a 6822. The text file illustrates the use of the JIS character set. Install the JIS character font (nft00932.mod) using the Printer Configuration Utility. To have jis932.txt print correctly 1 Use the Microsoft C version 7.00 compiler. cl japan.c /link slibce graphics 2 Run japan.exe to create jis932.txt. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 181 Appendix D Printer Font Test Jobs 3 Copy this text file to the appropriate printer port. Korean Character Set This program generates a text file, korea.txt, to copy to a 6822. The text file illustrates the use of the KSC5601 character set. Install the KSC5601 character font (nft00949.mod) using the Printer Configuration Utility. To have korea.txt print correctly 1 Use the Microsoft C version 7.00 compiler. cl korea.c /link slibce graphics 2 Run korea.exe to create korea.txt. 3 Copy this text file to the appropriate printer port. International Character Set This program generates a text file, nation.txt, to copy to a 6822. The text file illustrates the international character sets available for use in the default character set. Install the default character set font (nft00000.mod) using the Printer Configuration Utility. To have nation.txt print correctly 1 Use the Microsoft C version 7.00 compiler. cl nation.c /link slibce graphics 2 Run nation.exe to create nation.txt. 3 Copy this text file to the appropriate printer port. 182 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manuall I Index 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 183 Index Numerics 4000 Series Terminal Holder 2 61XX Terminal Holder 2 62XX Terminal Holder 2 700 series computer pinout configuration 122 inserting in terminal holder 17 A ActiveSync disabling 54 enabling 46 Alpha keyboard Windows 95/98 38 B Big 5 traditional Chinese character set 82 Bluetooth adapter applications 148 class of device 146 default device name 146 link keys 146 link loss 146, 147 master/slave 146 performance range 147 query items 146 SDP record 146 self-test 147 Bluetooth Configuration Commands connectable on/off 137 manage security modes 139 query mode commands 136 specify inquiry scan timing 138 specify page scan timing 138 BM0_1_DI7ZVP_ZBNA0B_7SKU RH_2 2 Buffers I/O buffer 58 print (image) buffer 58 C Cables 15pin to 25pin 25pin to 15pin 25pin to 25pin 120 9pin to 15pin 121 Change configuration parameters error messages 54 Windows 95/98 37 Chinese Character sets Big 5 traditional 82 GB 2312 82 Code page file Class of device Greek 85 Hebrew 83 international 83 Japanese, shift JIS 82 Korean, KSC5601 82 Bluetooth adapter 146 NFT00932.MOD, 932 file 82 NFT00936.MOD, 936 file 82 NFT00949.MOD, 949 file 82 NFT00950.MOD, 950 file 82 connectable on/off 137 manage security modes 139 query mode 136 specify inquiry scan timing 138 specify page scan timing 138 Communications connector pinouts Commands 123 Configuration ActiveSync installation setting 6820 printer configuration enabling 46, 54 Windows 95/98 28 overview of operation Windows 2000/XP 46 Windows 2000/XP 49 Windows 2000/XP 46 Windows 95/98 29 Connectable on/off 137 Control code/escape sequence table working memory 154 Control codes crossreference tables control codes & escape sequences index 154 Copy fonts 184 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Windows 95/98 35 Crossreference tables index 154 control codes & escape sequences configuration file, default.pcf D Default printer settings Windows 95/98 Windows 95/98 default.pcf default configuration Windows 95/98 Bluetooth adapter Device name E Error messages printer settings Windows 2000/XP Escape sequence/control code table Escape sequences crossreference (to definitions) F Factory defaults Windows 95/98 Fixed mount printer description Flash space available Windows 2000/XP Windows 95/98 Fonts copy Windows 95/98 Chinese character set G GB 2312 Greek character sets H Hebrew character sets Horizontal tabs Index perform perform horizontal tab I I/O buffer Image buffer Inactivity time set inactivity time for sleep mode Windows 95/98 Installation (configuration utility) International character set J Japanese character set (Shift JIS) K Korean character set (KSC5601) KSC5601 Korean character set L Line feed (LF) Line spacing perform line feed LINE FEED button setting paper for printing select 1/8inch line spacing Bluetooth adapter Bluetooth adapter Link keys Link loss

, M Manage security modes Master/slave Modes Bluetooth adapter inactivity time for sleep mode N nft00932.mod nft00936.mod code page 932 code page 936 code page 949 code page 950 nft00949.mod nft00950.mod 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 185 Index nptk6820.exe toolkit self-extracting Windows 95/98 O Operation pinfeed holders

, P Parameters Windows 95/98 Portable printer description Print (image) buffer Print head printer alignment set to third notch Windows 95/98 Printer descriptions fixed mount portable Print head gap Printer default settings Printer mechanism alignment Printer problems Printer, get from (load configuration) Printer, save configuration to Windows 95/98 Windows 95/98 Programs, selftest control program verification Windows 2000/XP Windows 95/98 Bluetooth adapter Q Query items Query mode commands R Range Bluetooth adapter Reset button portable Windows 95/98 install Ribbon cartridge Restore defaults to printer rpgpconf.exe configuration utility, application Windows 95/98 rpgpconf.ini installation file Windows 95/98 S Save (update working configuration) SDP record Save to printer Windows 95/98 Windows 95/98 Bluetooth adapter Bluetooth adapter setting paper for printing SET PAGE button Setting 6820 printer configuration Selftest Windows 95/98 Settings, default Shift JIS, Japanese character set Sleep mode set inactivity time for sleep mode Sleep mode, set activity time for Space remaining in flash Windows 2000/XP Windows 95/98 Spacing, line select 1/8inch line spacing Specify inquiry scan timing Specify page scan timing T Tabs and tab setting functions perform horizontal tab horizontal tabs Terminal holder Time inserting 700 series computer set inactivity time for sleep mode Tool kit self-extracting archive file Windows 95/98 186 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Traditional, Bit 5, Chinese character set Troubleshooting Bluetooth adapter diagnostics possible printer problems POST error codes selftest U Utility, configuration Windows 95/98 installation operation Index Windows 2000/XP Windows 95/98 V Verifications Visible moving parts in mechanism printer components W Wall mount printer Working configuration Windows 2000/XP Windows 95/98 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 187 Index 188 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Worldwide Headquarters 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, Washington 98203 U.S.A. tel 425.348.2600 fax 425.355.9551 www.intermec.com 2008 Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Guide

*935-013-001*

P/N 935-013-001

 

 

6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Intermec Technologies Corporation Worldwide Headquarters 6001 36th Ave.W. Everett, WA 98203 U.S.A. www.intermec.com The information contained herein is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers to operate and service Intermec-manufactured equipment and is not to be released, reproduced, or used for any other purpose without written permission of Intermec Technologies Corporation. Information and specifications contained in this document are subject to change without prior noticed and do not represent a commitment on the part of Intermec Technologies Corporation. 2008 by Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. The word Intermec, the Intermec logo, Norand, ArciTech, Beverage Routebook, CrossBar, dcBrowser, Duratherm, EasyADC, EasyCoder, EasySet, Fingerprint, i-gistics, INCA (under license), Intellitag, Intellitag Gen2, JANUS, LabelShop, MobileLAN, Picolink, Ready-to-Work, RoutePower, Sabre, ScanPlus, ShopScan, Smart Mobile Computing, SmartSystems, TE 2000, Trakker Antares, and Vista Powered are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Intermec Technologies Corporation. There are U.S. and foreign patents as well as U.S. and foreign patents pending. Wi-Fi is a registered certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. Microsoft, Windows, and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A. ii 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Contents Contents Before You Begin . xii Safety Information . xii Global Services and Support. xiii Warranty Information. xiii Web Support. xiii Telephone Support . xiii Service Location Support . xiv Who Should Read This Document . xiv Related Documents . xiv Patent Information . xv 1 Using the Printer . 1 Learning About the Printer Models. 2 Guidelines for Operating the Printer . 3 Understanding the Control Panel . 3 Using the Reset Button . 4 Understanding the Power Supply Options . 6 Using the Internal Battery. 6 Connecting to a Vehicle Power Supply. 6 Connecting to a DC Power Source . 7 Fixed Mount Printer . 7 Portable Printer. 7 2 Installing the Printer . 9 Installing the Internal Battery . 10 Installing the Ribbon Cartridge. 11 Adjusting the Printhead Gap . 12 Loading the Paper Tray . 13 Loading Paper in the Printer . 13 Positioning the Paper . 13 Adjusting the Pinfeed Holders . 14 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual iii Contents Inserting a Computer in the Terminal Holder . 16 3 Maintaining the Printer . 19 Cleaning the Printer Case . 20 Cleaning the Outside of the Case . 20 Cleaning the Inside the Case. 21 Cleaning the Printer Ribbon . 21 Cleaning the Mask Spring. 22 4 Configuring the Printer . 25 Connecting to the Printer. 26 Understanding the Font Modules . 27 Using the Windows 95 or Windows 98 Printer Configuration Utility . 28 Installing the Configuration Files . 28 Generating Custom Configuration Files . 29 Understanding the Printer Configuration . 29 Selecting an International Font. 34 Selecting Parameters . 37 Saving Files to the Printer . 40 Default Printer Settings. 41 Using the Windows 2000 or Windows XP Printer Configuration Utility. 42 Installing the Windows 2000/XP Printer Configuration Utility . 42 Disabling the Microsoft ActiveSync Serial Port Connections . 46 Operating the Printer Configuration Utility . 46 Communicating with the Printer. 47 Setting the 6822 Configuration . 49 Default Printer Settings. 53 Error Messages . 54 Timeout Error . 54 Port Not Found Error . 54 Access Denied Error. 54 Connecting to the Bluetooth Adapter . 54 5 Control Code Definitions . 57 Understanding Control Code Definitions . 58 I/O Buffer . 58 iv 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Contents Print Image Buffer . 58 Special Notations . 58 Using Printer Control Codes . 59 Backspace . 59 Beeper . 59 Cancel Line . 60 Carriage Return. 60 Delete . 60 Form Feed . 61 Select Half-Speed Printing . 61 Cancel Half-Speed Printing . 61 Set Inactivity Time for Sleep Mode . 61 Line Feed . 62 Perform Line Feed . 62 Perform n/216-inch Line Feed . 62 Perform n/216-inch Reverse Line Feed . 62 Perform Master Reset . 62 Set Print Position (absolute) . 63 Set Print Position (relative). 63 Select Top-Down Printing . 64 Select Bottom-Up Printing . 64 Select Unidirectional Printing . 64 Cancel Unidirectional Printing. 64 Select Unidirectional (one line) Printing . 65 Page Formatting Functions . 65 Set Page Length (lines). 65 Set Page Length (inches) . 66 Select 7/72-inch Line Spacing (7 dots) . 66 Select 1/6-inch Line Spacing . 66 Select n/216-inch Line Spacing . 67 Select n/72-inch Line Spacing (n dots) . 67 Set Right Margin . 67 Set Left Margin. 68 Set Skip Over Perforation. 68 Cancel Skip Over Perforation. 69 Character Style and Text Mode Functions . 69 Select Condensed Mode (compressed). 69 Cancel Condensed Mode . 70 Select Double-Strike Mode . 70 Cancel Double-Strike Mode. 70 Select Double-Wide Mode . 71 Cancel Double-Wide Print . 71 Select Double-Wide Mode . 71 Cancel Double-Wide Mode . 72 Select Elite Pitch. 72 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual v Contents Select Emphasized Print Mode. 72 Cancel Emphasized Print Mode . 73 Defining Intercharacter Space . 73 Select Italic Mode. 73 Cancel Italic Mode . 74 Master Select . 74 Select Pica Pitch . 75 Select Superscript Mode. 76 Select Subscript Mode . 76 Cancel Subscript/Superscript Mode . 76 Select Underline Mode. 77 Cancel Underline Mode . 77 Tabs and Tab Setting Functions . 77 Perform Horizontal Tab . 78 Set Horizontal Tabs . 78 Clear Horizontal Tabs. 79 Perform Vertical Tab . 79 Set Vertical Tabs . 79 Clear Vertical Tabs. 80 Set Vertical Tabs in Channel . 80 Clear Vertical Tabs in Channel . 80 Select Vertical Tab Channel. 81 Using Character Sets and User-Defined Functions . 81 Single-Byte Character Sets. 81 Double-Byte Character Sets . 82 Multi-Byte Character Sets . 82 Select National Character Set. 83 Hebrew Character Fonts. 84 User Defined Characters. 85 Copy ROM to RAM . 86 Define User-Defined Characters . 86 Select User-Defined Character Set. 87 Select Default Character Set. 87 Enable Printing of Codes 128-159 . 88 Disable Printing of Codes 128-159 . 88 Expand Printable Code Area . 88 Enable Printing of Character Graphics. 89 Disable Printing of Character Graphics . 90 Printing Character Graphics . 90 Graphics Functions . 91 Select Graphics Mode. 92 Reassign Graphics Mode . 92 Select Single Density Graphics Mode . 93 Select Low-Speed Double Density Graphics Mode. 93 Select High-Speed Double Density Graphics Mode . 93 Select Low-Speed Quadruple Density Graphics Mode . 94 Select 9-Pin Single Density Graphics Mode . 94 vi 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Select 9-Pin Double Density Graphics Mode. 95 6 Troubleshooting . 97 Checking the Power Source . 98 Contents Aligning the Printer Mechanism . 98 Troubleshooting System Components. 100 Verifying the Printer Components . 100 Power Source Verification . 100 Communications / Host Computer Verification. 101 Understanding Printer Errors . 102 Runtime Errors . 102 Power-On-Self-Test (POST) Errors . 103 Fatal Errors . 104 Self-Test Function Descriptions . 105 Detailed Printer Self-Test . 106 Self-Test Report . 106 Understanding the Self-Test Report . 107 Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Tips . 111 Compatibility Issues . 114 Understanding Diagnostic Information. 114 Communications Pin-Out Configurations. 119 A Specifications . 125 Specifications . 126 Printer Dimensions . 127 Fixed Mount Printer . 127 Portable Printer . 128 Media Specifications. 128 Material Breakdown . 129 Caliper Breakdown . 130 Understanding the Fanfold Paper Page Layout. 131 B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications. 133 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual vii Contents Using Configuration Commands. 134 Operating Modes. 135 Command and Control Modes . 136 Set Local Bluetooth Device Name . 137 Set Class of Device/Service Field . 137 Set Service Name . 137 Connectable On/Off . 137 Specify Page Scan Timing . 138 Enable Discoverable. 138 Specify Inquiry Scan Timing . 138 Set Encryption/Authentication: PIN CODE . 139 Manage Security Modes. 139 Read Module Version. 140 Read Local Device Address . 140 Set Shutdown Timing. 141 Clear Link Key Table . 141 Understanding Adapter States or Modes. 141 700 Series or CK60 to 6822 Pass Through . 143 700 Series, CK60, or CN3 to Bluetooth Module Communication Interface 143 Power Management Flow Diagram. 144 Radio Power On/Off Mechanism . 145 Persistent Storage . 145 System Behavior/Software Considerations . 145 Remote Configuration. 146 Bluetooth Performance . 147 Diagnostics Capabilities . 147 Applications . 148 System Qualification. 149 Operation Resilience. 149 Environmental Specifications . 149 Safety/Regulatory/Agency Requirements. 150 Default Configuration . 152 C Cross-Reference Tables . 153 Control Codes and Escape Sequences. 154 Single Character Control Code Definitions . 170 viii 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Contents Escape Sequence Quick Reference . 173 Factory-Installed Printer Defaults . 175 D Printer Font Test Jobs. 179 About the Printer Font Jobs. 180 Big 5 Traditional Chinese Character Set. 180 Simplified Chinese Character Set . 181 IBM 437 Code Page Character Set . 181 Japanese (Shift JIS) Character Set . 181 Korean Character Set . 182 International Character Set . 182 I Index . 183 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual ix Before You Begin Before You Begin This section provides you with safety information, technical support information, and sources for additional product information. Safety Information Your safety is extremely important. Read and follow all warnings and cautions in this document before handling and operating Intermec equipment. You can be seriously injured, and equipment and data can be damaged if you do not follow the safety warnings and cautions. This section explains how to identify and understand dangers, warnings, cautions, and notes that are in this document. You may also see icons which tell you when to follow ESD procedures. A warning alerts you of an operating procedure, practice, condition, or statement that must be strictly observed to avoid death or serious injury to the persons working on the equipment. A caution alerts you to an operating procedure, practice, condition, or statement that must be strictly observed to prevent equipment damage or destruction, or corruption or loss of data. This icon appears at the beginning of any procedure in this manual that could cause you to touch components (such as printed circuit boards) that are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD). When you see this icon, you must follow standard ESD guidelines to avoid damaging the equipment you are using. Note: Notes either provide extra information about a topic or contain special instructions for handling a particular condition or set of circumstances. x 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Global Services and Support Before You Begin Warranty Information To understand the warranty for your Intermec product, visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com and click Service & Support > Warranty. Web Support Visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com to download our current manuals (in PDF). To order printed versions of the Intermec manuals, contact your local Intermec representative or distributor. Visit the Intermec technical knowledge base (Knowledge Central) at intermec.custhelp.com to review technical information or to request technical support for your Intermec product. Telephone Support These services are available from Intermec. Services Order Intermec products Order Intermec media Order spare parts Technical Support Service Service contracts Description Place an order. Ask about an existing order. Order printer labels and ribbons. Order spare parts. Talk to technical support about your Intermec product. Get a return authorization number for authorized service center repair. Request an on-site repair technician. Renew a contract, ask about an existing contract. In the USA and Canada call 1-800-

755-5505 and choose this option 1 and then choose 2 1 and then choose 1 1 or 2 and then choose 4 2 and then choose 2 2 and then choose 1 1 or 2 and then choose 3 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual xi Before You Begin Outside the U.S.A. and Canada, contact your local Intermec representative. To search for your local representative, from the Intermec web site, click Contact. Service Location Support For the most current listing of service locations, click Support >

Returns and Repairs > Repair Locations. For technical support in South Korea, use the after service locations listed below:

AWOO Systems 102-1304 SK Ventium 522 Dangjung-dong Gunpo-si, Gyeonggi-do Korea, South 435-776 Contact: Mr. Sinbum Kang Telephone: +82-31-436-1191 Email: sbkang@awoo.co.kr Sammi Information Systems Co Ltd 7-9FL, Seo Jo Building 103-15, Galwor-Dong Seoul, Yong San-ku Korea, South 140-807 Contact: Kyung-Hee Koo Telephone: +82-2-790-5508 Email: jlovekoo@sammicomputer.co.kr Who Should Read This Document This users guide is for the person who is responsible for installing, configuring, and maintaining the 6822 printer. This users guide provides you with information about the features of the 6822 printer, and how to install, configure, operate, maintain, and troubleshoot them. Related Documents The Intermec web site contains Intermec documents (in PDF) that you can download for free. To download documents 1 Visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. xii 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Before You Begin 2 Click Support > Manuals. 3 In the Select a Product field, choose the product whose documentation you want to download. To order printed versions of the Intermec manuals, contact your local Intermec representative or distributor. Patent Information This product is protected by one or more of the following United States patents:

5,581,293; 5,613,790; 5,927,876; 6,088,049; 6,345,920 There may be U.S. and Foreign Patents Pending. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual xiii Before You Begin xiv 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 1 Using the Printer Use this chapter to familiarize yourself with the 6822 printer. In this chapter you will find these sections:

Learning about the printer models Guidelines for operating the printer Understanding the control panel Understanding the power supply options 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 1 Chapter 1 Using the Printer Learning About the Printer Models The 6822 printer is used in the route accounting industry to produce high-quality customer invoices, receipts, load reports, transfers, and other documents. A unique sleep feature saves energy when the printer is not printing, eliminating the need for an ON/OFF switch. Data input is normally provided by hand-held or mobile computers. The 6822 printer is available in the following models:

Fixed Mount Printer The fixed mount printer is mounted in motor vehicles or used in a settlement room. The terminal holder may be mounted on the printer or a remote dock can connect to the side of the printer. A deep paper tray, which holds up to 200 3-ply forms (up to 5 cm or 2 in of paper) is located under the printer mechanism. Portable Printer The portable printer has a handle so that you can carry it. An optional internal battery permits operation without the use of an external power source. The terminal holder is an integral part of this printer. A shallow paper tray, which holds up to 50 3-ply forms (up to 2.5 cm or 1.0 in of paper) is located under the printer mechanism. Note: The printer models are shown on page 8. The discharge of electrostatic energy accumulated on the human body, clothing, or other surfaces can damage or destroy the printhead or electronic components used in this printer. Avoid touching the electrical connectors while unpacking or setting up your printer. 2 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Guidelines for Operating the Printer Chapter 1 Using the Printer Make sure that you mobile computer remains connected to the printer when printing or operating. Keep the printer cover closed except during maintenance or when loading paper. Make sure the paper is properly installed in the paper tray or dashboard mount. Disconnect the printer power cable when jump-starting the vehicle. Make sure your printer is loaded with paper before communicating with your mobile computer. Do not spill liquids or food crumbs into the printer. Do not use solvents or abrasive cleaners on the printer. Do not rest objects on, under, or against the printer. If the printer is attached to a vehicle electrical system, do not start or stop the vehicle engine while printing. Do not overload the paper tray or paper jams will occur. Understanding the Control Panel The printer control panel has four status indicators in the top row and three buttons in the bottom row. Three indicators blink when there is a problem. The three buttons adjust and align the paper. Understanding the Status Indicators Description Indicator Description Paper Out The printer is out of paper. Head Jam Low Battery The printhead is jammed and cannot move. The internal battery voltage, the vehicle battery voltage, or the power module voltage is too low. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 3 Chapter 1 Using the Printer Understanding the Status Indicators (continued) Description Indicator Description Power The power LED turns green when you press any button and goes off after ten seconds. The LED also goes on when:

the printer is attached to an external power supply the printer is using the internal battery and the battery charge is low a print job is sent to the printer you perform a power-on-self-test Understanding How to Use the 6822 Buttons Name Form Feed Button Set Page Line Feed FORM FEED SET PAGE LINE FEED Function Press this button to feed the paper into the printer mechanism or when the printer should advance to the next form. If the printer ran out of paper, press this button to initiate automatic paper loading. Press this button to signal the beginning of the page to the printer after you have made the appropriate paper adjustments;

or to set the line feed counter to zero and move the printhead to its home position. Press this button to clear a Paper Out error so printing can resume. Press this button to adjust the top of the paper to the next line. Note: All printer covers are hinged to the printer. These hinges have a tension screw (turn clockwise to tighten, turn counterclockwise to loosen), should you need to adjust them. Using the Reset Button Use the printer reset button to:

reset a printer that is unresponsive and apparently locked up 4 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the Printer force a synchronization between the printer and a connected PC when sending control codes restart the printer for any reason Note: The reset button does not reset a connected Bluetooth module as it is powered from a different power source. Both the fixed mount printer and the portable printer have a reset button on the left-hand side of the raised printer mechanism. See the following illustration for the location of the reset button. Reset button Fixed mount and portable printer reset button 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 5 Chapter 1 Using the Printer Understanding the Power Supply Options The following power supply options are available for the 6822s. Using the Internal Battery The internal battery (P/N 317-075-001) allows the portable printer and some fixed mount printers to operate independently of other power sources. The 6822 discharges the internal battery even when the printer is not is use. Over time, the internal battery can discharge to the point where the battery is not recoverable. Plug the printer into an external charge source or disconnect the battery when you store the printer for any length of time. A total discharge of the battery is most likely to occur when the battery is new and the battery chemical reactions are not fully formed, or the battery has had only one charge cycle. Connecting to a Vehicle Power Supply You will need to order a printer installation kit to install the 6822 printer in a vehicle. The following kits are available:

P/N 203-242-101 (fixed mount printers) P/N 203-242-102 (portable printers). The installation kits contain all of the hardware (nuts, bolts, washers, a terminal ring, and a fuse link) for connecting the battery cable directly to the vehicle battery. These kits also contain adjustable wire clamps to secure the cable in place. Note: The 6820 printer and associated electrical wiring should be installed under the supervision of properly trained and qualified personnel. See the 6820 Printer Installation Instructions (P/N 931-052-001) to learn how to connect the printer to a vehicle power supply. 6 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Connecting to a DC Power Source Chapter 1 Using the Printer Each printer has a dc power jack that connects the printer to a power source, such as the vehicle battery or an external power supply. Each printer communicates with a mobile computer through the mobile computer socket (in terminal holder, remote terminal holder, or vehicle dock). Fixed Mount Printer The dc power connector is on the bottom rear of the printer behind the printer terminal holder. The data communications socket is in either the printer terminal holder or a separate vehicle dock. Portable Printer The dc power connector is on the side of the printer beneath the printer terminal holder. The data communications socket is either in the printer terminal holder or a separate vehicle dock. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 7 Chapter 1 Using the Printer DC Power connector Mobile computer socket Fixed Mount Printer Mobile computer socket DC Power connector Portable Printer 6822 Printer Models 8 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 2 Installing the Printer Installing the internal battery Installing the ribbon cartridge This chapter provides instructions how to set up the 6822 printer for the first time. In this chapter you will find these sections:

Adjusting the printhead gap Loading the paper tray Loading paper in the printer Inserting a computer in the terminal holder 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 9 Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Installing the Internal Battery The optional internal battery is primarily for portable printers. The battery can go in some fixed mount printers using a cable and a factory-

installed adapter. The printer battery recharges automatically when the printer is connected to an external power source. For most installations, the external power source is passed through the printer to the mobile computer. The printer battery does not provide charge to the computer. Note: Remove the printer battery when storing a printer for more than 30 days. After storage, reinstall the battery and connect the printer to an external power source for at least 14 hours to recharge the battery. To install the internal battery 1 Unlatch and open the printer mechanism. 2 Lower the battery into the rear of the printer case, as shown. 3 Attach the battery cable to the battery. 4 Push the battery down and back under the back edge of the case. The battery should snap into place. 5 Close and latch the mechanism. Battery Battery cable Printer mechanism Installing the internal battery 10 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Installing the Ribbon Cartridge Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Make sure there is a ribbon cartridge in the printer before you print and that the ribbon is fully seated (the cartridge makes a distinct snap or click when properly seated) with the visible portion of the ribbon straight and even. To install the ribbon cartridge 1 Turn the ribbon advance knob (in the direction of the raised arrows) to remove any slack in the ribbon. 2 Squeeze the ribbon cartridge locking tab into the cartridge, then lower the cartridge over the printhead. 3 Lower the tab side of the cartridge until it clicks. 4 Release the tab and press down on the arrow to fully seat the ribbon cartridge (tab clicks outward). 5 Turn the ribbon advance knob (follow raised arrows) to align the ribbon in the front of the printhead. Ribbon Locking tab Advance knob Tighten ribbon Installing the ribbon cartridge 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 11 Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Adjusting the Printhead Gap The head gap adjuster is near the printer mechanism on the side opposite the green thumb wheel. The printhead adjuster has five notches between the printhead and the platen for different paper thicknesses. Verify the thickness of the paper loaded into the printer. To adjust the printhead gap If you are using single-sheet forms, set the head gap adjuster to the third notch away from the paper. If you are using multiple-sheet forms (2-ply or 3-ply), set the head gap adjuster to the fourth notch away from the paper. If you experience frequent head jams, set the head gap adjuster to the fifth notch away from the paper. This may stop the head jams. If the 2-ply and 3-ply paper have light printing, setting the gap adjuster to a closer setting will darken the print. 1 5 Adjusting the printhead 12 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Loading the Paper Tray Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Note: Do not exceed the recommended amounts of paper quantity or thickness. When loading multiple-sheet paper, be sure to have the original faced up, with the leading edge towards the rear of the printer. To load the paper tray in fixed mount and portable printers 1 Unlatch and raise the printer mechanism. 2 Lower a stack of paper, with the original faced up, into the paper tray under the printer mechanism. The fixed mount printer holds up to 200 3-ply forms about 5 cm

(2 in) thick. The portable printer holds up to 50 3-ply forms about 2.5 cm (1 in) thick. 3 Pull the top form out and over the rear of the printer mechanism. Lower and latch the printer mechanism. To load paper from the flat paper tray 1 Hold a stack of paper, up to 6 cm (2.5 in) thick, with the original facing you, and lay the stack flat into the tray. 2 Pull the top form out to load into the printer. Loading Paper in the Printer Follow these steps to load the paper into the printer, or paper jams may occur. Positioning the Paper Paper for the 6822 has perforated strips that fit onto the pinfeed holder pins, guiding the paper into the printer. This paper is sold separately in 1, 2, or 3-ply forms. To position the paper 1 Open the pinfeed holders outward. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 13 Chapter 2 Installing the Printer 2 Take the top edge of the sheet of paper and position it, original side facing down, over the pinfeed holder pins. 3 Align the first few holes of the paper, on each side of the paper, onto the pinfeed holder pins. 4 Close the pinfeed holders. 5 Raise the paper bail. 1 3 4 2 5 Positioning the paper Adjusting the Pinfeed Holders Note: There are two pinfeed holders, one next to the green thumb wheel and one opposite the same wheel. Always loosen the pinfeed holder opposite the green thumb wheel. Note: Adjusting the pinfeed holder next to the green thumb wheel may cause information to print in the wrong place. If this pinfeed holder is moved, correct its location by releasing the pinfeed holder tab, moving the pinfeed holder as close to the green thumb wheel as possible, then locking the pinfeed holder tab, before adjusting the opposite pinfeed holder. To adjust the pinfeed holders 1 With the pinfeed holders open, release the locking tab on the pinfeed holder opposite the green thumb wheel. 14 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 2 Installing the Printer 2 Adjust the pinfeed holder position so that the pins align with the paper. 3 Close the pinfeed holder. 4 Ensure that the paper is smooth (no folds, bulges, bows, etc.) between the pinfeed holders. If so, push the locking tab down on the pinfeed holder that you adjusted. Pinfeed holder Locked pinfeed holder locking tab Released pinfeed holder locking tab Thumbwheel

(green) Adjusting the pin feed holders To feed paper into the printer 1 Press Form Feed button to feed the paper into the printer. 2 Lower the paper bail. An empty printer autofeeds new paper approximately 0.25 cm (0.1 in) beyond the top of the paper bail. Note: The ideal distance to feed paper beyond the paper bail may vary due to environmental conditions (such as humidity) and specific aspects of certain paper. Use the green thumb wheel to position the paper to a desired distance according to your conditions. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 15 Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Note: If your paper has a preprinted logo on every page, make sure the printhead is below the preprinted logo. If not, you can adjust the position of the paper, either by pressing the Line Feed button, or by using the green thumb wheel. 3 Once the paper is properly positioned, press the Set Page button to clear the Paper Out light and indicate where the top of the page is. 4 Close the printer lid. Make sure the paper passes through the paper slot when the printer begins to print. Inserting a Computer in the Terminal Holder Note: When removing the computer, do not press the computer keys against the terminal slide retainer. Always store the computer in the terminal holder. The fixed mount or portable printers have terminal holder options for the 4000 Series, 61XX, 62XX, 600 Series, 700 Series, CK60, and the CN3 computers. To insert a 4000 series or a 62XX in the terminal holder 1 Insert the bottom of the computer into the terminal slide retainer. 2 Use the computer to push the terminal slide retainer and make room for the computer. 3 Lower the connector end of the computer into the terminal holder. 4 Slide the computer to fully seat it in the printer docking connector. To insert a 61XX, a 600 Series, a 700 Series, CK60, or a CN3 in a terminal holder 1 Insert the top of the computer into the terminal slide retainer. 2 Use the computer to push the terminal slide all the way in the direction shown. 3 Lower the connector end of the computer into the terminal holder. 16 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 4 Slide the computer to fully seat it in the docking connector. Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Inserting a computer in a terminal holder 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 17 Chapter 2 Installing the Printer 18 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 3 Maintaining the Printer Use this chapter maintain your 6822 printer. In this chapter you will find these sections:

Cleaning the printer case Cleaning the printer ribbon Cleaning the mask spring 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 19 Chapter 3 Maintaining the Printer Cleaning the Printer Case Periodic cleaning helps maintain the appearance and reliability of the printer. When cleaning the printer, inspect both the outside and the inside for signs of damage or wear. Glass cleaners containing ammonia will cause permanent damage to the printer cover. Do not use abrasives or solvents (acetone, ketone, toluene, or xylene) to clean any part of the printer or permanent damage to the printer will occur. Note: MICRO-CLEAN II is the only cleaner recommended for the printer case. Other cleaners can damage the printer case. Note: GUIDE SHAFT CLEANER is recommended for cleaning your 80-column printer guide shafts. Cleaning the printer guide shaft can reduce the number of head jams caused by dirt and buildup. Note: Both cleaners are sold separately. Cleaning the Outside of the Case Do not pour liquid cleaners directly on the printer case. Instead, dampen a soft, lint-free cloth with a quality cleaner and clean the exterior surfaces with this cloth. Do not use solvent solutions. Inspect the DC power jack, all cables, and the remote terminal holder or vehicle dock for damage. 20 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 3 Maintaining the Printer Cleaning the Inside the Case Let the printer cool before you clean the inside of the printer or you may burn your fingers. Open the printer cover and inspect the ribbon cartridge and all visible moving parts on the printer mechanism for signs of wear or damage. Pinfeed holder Thumbwheel

(green) Paper bail Ribbon cartridge Moving parts in the printer mechanism Use a low-pressure, dry air source, such as canned air, or a vacuum, to remove accumulated paper dust from the printer mechanism. Head gap adjuster Cleaning the Printer Ribbon The printer ribbon contains a special lubricant to ensure that the fine dot wires inside the printhead receive adequate lubrication. Replace the ribbon frequently to prolong the life of the printhead. The printer requires no additional lubrication. To remove the ribbon cartridge 1 Move the printhead mechanism to an open area. 2 Squeeze the ribbon cartridge locking tabs (on the side of the cartridge) against the ribbon cartridge. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 21 Chapter 3 Maintaining the Printer 3 Lift the ribbon cartridge to remove the ribbon from the printhead. Make sure the ribbon does not catch or get sticky. 4 Lift the ribbon cartridge out of the printer. Cleaning the Mask Spring Check the mask spring behind the printhead.If the mask spring appears to be in good condition, install a new ribbon cartridge. If the mask spring is dirty, clean it as described below. To clean the mask spring 1 Unlatch the printhead locking tabs to release the printhead, lift the printhead aside, then lift up the paper bail. Do not detach the printhead unit. Never use a sharp object to clean between the printhead and the platen (rubber roller). This can damage the mask spring and printhead. 2 Remove the clear plastic paper guide that seats the mask spring, if necessary. Use your fingernails to loosen the base of the paper guide, then pull the paper guide straight up from the printer mechanism. 3 Remove the metal mask spring from the paper guide and clean with a quality cleaner. Replace if damaged. 4 Insert the mask spring in the paper guide and install the paper guide into the printer. 22 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 3 Maintaining the Printer 5 Close the paper bail, reinsert the printhead, latch the two printhead locking tabs, and install the ribbon. Print head locking tabs Print head lifted aside Mask spring Cleaning the mask spring Raised paper bail 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 23 Chapter 3 Maintaining the Printer 24 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual

 

 

6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 4 Configuring the Printer A Printer Configuration Utility is used to load font on the printer and to change the printer settings. In this chapter you will find these sections:

Connecting to the printer Understanding the font modules Using the Windows 95 or Windows 98 Printer Configuration Utility Using the Windows 2000 or Windows XP Printer Configuration Utility 25 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer Connecting to the Printer Connect your printer to your desktop computer using a serial cable

(P/N 226-270-001). The serial COM port connector on either the fixed mount printer or portable printer is on your printer mechanism, the same side as the green thumb wheel. Before connecting to your PC, locate and disconnect the gray terminal holder ribbon cable connector from the floor of the printer cavity. The cable is located behind the printer mechanism on the same side as the green thumb wheel and is the one that is not attached to the printer mechanism. Disconnect this terminal holder ribbon cable from the floor of the printer cavity Ignore this cable attached to the printer mechanism Intermec provides printer configuration utilities for the following Windows operating systems. If your PC has either Windows 95 or Windows 98, go to page 27 for instructions. If your PC has Windows 2000 or Windows XP, go to page 42. Understanding the Font Modules Intermec provides the following font modules for your 6822:

nft00000.mod Default International, 4820 compatible nft00437.mod IBM/Microsoft compatible Code Page 437 nft00932.mod JIS Japanese nft00936.mod GB2312 Chinese Simplified nft00949.mod KSC5601 Korean 26 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer nft00950.mod Big 5 Traditional Chinese Note: There are three versions of the default font module

(nft0000.mod): Arabic, Turkish, and International. Any one version of this module, but not all three versions, can appear in the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility FONTS directory and install on the 6822. The International version of this font module is automatically placed in the FONTS directory when the Printer Configuration Utility is installed on the PC. All three versions are included on the printer toolkit CD:

The Arabic version is included in the Default Fonts\Arabic directory. The Turkish version is in the Default Fonts\Turkish directory. The International version is in the Default Fonts\International directory. Use the Printer Configuration Utility to replace the existing default font module (nft00000.mod) with any of the of the other provided fonts. The Printer Configuration Utility is provided in the 6820 Tool Kit. Instructions for installing fonts are provided later in this chapter. For Windows 95 and Windows 98 Users If the default installation process was followed, the Printer Configuration Utility FONTS directory is located at 6820PRTR\TOOLKIT\FONTS where 6820PRTR is replaced by the actual directory in which you chose to extract the files. For Windows 2000 and Windows XP Users If you followed the default installation process, the Printer Configuration Utility FONTS directory is located at Program Files\Intermec\6820 Printer Configuration Utility\FONTS. Do not rename the font files in the FONTS directory. If rename the fonts will not work correctly. Using the Windows 95 or Windows 98 Printer Configuration Utility 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 27 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer These instructions apply to desktop computers running either Windows 95 or Windows 98 operating systems. Installing the Configuration Files Configuration files for the 6822 are located in the toolkit CD

(P/N 215-270-001), these include the rpgpconf.exe Printer Configuration Utility program and the rpgpconf.ini initialization file. The Printer Configuration Utility uses the initialization file to specify the location and names of font and printer control program folders. To set up your PC 1 Extract the toolkit files from the nptk6822.exe self-extracting archive file. 2 Create a directory, on your PC, with an appropriate name for the Printer Configuration Utility files. You could choose to have the files extracted at the root directory of your PC or specify another folder. Execute the self-extracting file from the target directory while specifying the path to nptk6822.exe in the command line. When you run nptk6822.exe, a TOOLKIT folder is created, as well the following folders:

DOS FONTS PCFS 6820SYS Generating Custom Configuration Files The Printer Configuration Utility also helps you create custom configuration files. These files have a .pcf file extension, and stored in the folder specified in the initialization file. See the default .pcf file in the PCFS folder for an example configuration file. Understanding the Printer Configuration A configuration consists of a list of fonts, some parameter settings, and optionally, a printer control program. 28 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer When you start the Printer Configuration Utility, it creates a printer configuration. This configuration has no fonts, parameters are set to the default values, and there is no printer control program in memory. You can modify the basic printer configuration to meet your needs and load the custom configuration to your printer. Note: The working configuration is deleted when you exit the Printer Configuration Utility. To start the Printer Configuration Utility. 1 Run rpgconf.exe and click OK on the first screen to continue to the Main Menu. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 29 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 2 The following options are available on the Main Menu. Use Load Printer Configuration to load an existing configuration. Load either from a file or from the printer. Use Modify Printer Configuration to review or modify the working configuration, include the printer control program in the currently loaded configuration, or load fonts. Use Save Printer Configurations to save a configuration file to disk or download the working configuration to your 6822. Use Defaults to restore the printer to its default configuration. Note: When the Main Menu is first displayed, the Save Printer Configuration options are grayed out, prohibiting selection of those options until a configuration is loaded or modified. 3 Click Exit, then click Yes to exit the Printer Configuration Utility. Click No to the keep the Main Menu open. 30 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer To load configuration files from your PC 1 Click From File to access the File, Open window. 2 Select a configuration file to load, then click OK. If the selected file does not exist, a File does not exist! error message appears. Click OK to return to the Main Menu without loading a file. 3 If the file does exist, a warning message indicates that loading the selected file will overwrite your working configuration. Click OK to overwrite settings in working configuration, or Cancel to return to the Main Menu. 4 OK, the configuration from the selected file is loaded into memory and becomes the current working configuration. If this load is 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 31 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer successful, a message similar to the one shown below is displayed. Click OK to return to the Main Menu. 5 If the working configuration is not replaced successfully with the configuration from the selected file, an error message appears indicating that the operation failed. Click OK to return to the Main Menu without loading a file. To load a configuration from the 6822 1 Click From Printer from the Main Menu to display a warning message that indicates that the printers configuration will overwrite the working configuration. 2 Click OK to overwrite the configuration, otherwise click Cancel to return to the Main Menu without loading the printers configuration. 3 If you click OK, a message is then displayed prompting you to reset the printer. If the connection is not successful, after approximately 20 seconds, the following message appears. 32 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 4 Click Yes, to retry connecting to the printer. 5 If you click No, an error message appears and indicates that the configuration was not loaded. Click OK to return to the Main Menu. 6 If a connection is established, no further action is required The Printer Configuration Utility communicates with the 6822 to find out the current settings and which font modules are loaded. The name, version, and size of the font modules are displayed on the Get From Printer screen. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 33 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer To modify a printer configuration Use this option to view or change a working configuration, including adding fonts from disk (on the PC), deleting printer fonts, and changing parameters settings. Select Modify Printer Configuration to view or modify the printer configuration. To include the control program Use this option to include the printer control program when saving the working configuration to the printer. The npfl6822.mod control program only needs to be changed when a new version becomes available. Select the Include Control Program check box to add the control program the next time you save the printer configuration. Selecting an International Font A variety of different international fonts are also available in the toolkit for the 6822. To select a font Click Fonts from the Main Menu to access the Font Selection screen where you can perform operations related to font files. The Fonts Available list shows font files that are available on disk. The Fonts Selected list show fonts that are in the current printer configuration. 34 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer Note: Save is grayed out, prohibiting that selection, until either new fonts are selected, or fonts are removed from the Fonts Selected list. To copy font files 1 Highlight the font files in the Fonts Available list. You can highlight several files at one time, using conventional Windows selection methods. Click Copy to copy those font files to the Fonts Selected list Note: If you attempt to copy fonts from the Fonts Available list when these fonts already exist in the Fonts Selected list, the following error message is displayed, once for each of the duplicate fonts (where the current font file name is listed in place of nft00000.mod). 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 35 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 2 Click OK to close the error message and not copy the font to the Fonts Selected list. If there are two or more duplicate fonts, the cycle repeats until an error message is displayed for each of the duplicate font files. To delete font files Delete fonts from the Fonts Selected list to increase available memory in the printer. Select the font names you want to delete from the Fonts Selected list, then click Erase to clear those names. The Space Selection box, below the Fonts Selected list, displays the space remaining in flash (in kilobytes), based on fonts currently selected. When this number is negative, it means the available space in flash is less that the size of the selected fonts. Delete some fonts before saving the rest. Fonts marked with an asterisk (*), in the Fonts Selected list, are currently in printer memory. To cancel changes Click Cancel to return to the Main Menu without making any changes. If you have not made any changes to the Fonts Selected list, you return to the Main Menu. 36 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer Selecting Parameters To select a parameter Click Parameters from the Main Menu to access the Parameters window where you can modify any of the parameters that are not grayed out. Default parameter values are marked with an asterisk (*). To modify parameter configurations Select parameters on the screen using your stylus. Note: If you are using Bluetooth communication, you must change from the Norand Portable Communications Protocol (NPCP) mode to the Epson DTR mode with the baud rate set to 19.2 K and the parity set to None. To save parameters Click Save to update the working configuration and return to the Main Menu. To cancel the operation Click Cancel to return to the Main Menu without modifying any configuration parameters. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 37 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer To save a printer configuration Click To File from the Main Menu to access the File Save As dialog. Specify the drive, directory, and filename for the printer configuration file. To specify a file name 1 Click the Alpha button, on either the File Open window or the File Save As window to open the keyboard onscreen for you to enter text. 2 Click Save to save the file name or click Cancel to exit without saving the text. The following confirmation message appears. 38 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 3 Click OK to return to the previous window without the entered text, or click Cancel to continue using the alpha keyboard. To save the configuration to disk After you have selected the drive, directory, and file name, click OK to save the configuration file. If a file by the same name exists, the following confirmation message is displayed, informing you that if you continue it will overwrite the existing file. Click Cancel to return to the Main Menu without saving the working configuration. Click OK fto continue. The following information is displayed assuring you that the working configuration was successfully saved to disk. Click OK to return to the Main Menu. To cancel the Save to File operation From the File, Save As window, click Cancel to abort the Save to File operation and return to the Main Menu without saving the working configuration. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 39 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer Saving Files to the Printer Select the Save File to Printer option from the Main Menu, to send the working configuration to your 6822. When you select this option, the following warning message is displayed:

The message indicates the configuration will be copied into the 6822 flash memory and overwrite the current configuration. Click OK for the system to connect to the printer and transfer the configuration, or Cancel to return to the Main Menu without updating the printer. Connecting to the printer 1 After you click OK, a message appears informing you that the system is attempting to establish connection with the printer. 2 Connect a serial cable (P/N 226-270-001) between your PC and the printer. 3 Press the Reset button to reset the printer. 4 If the connection is not successful after approximately 20 seconds, the following message is appears. 5 Click Yes to retry making a connection to the printer. 40 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 6 If the configuration was not saved to the printer, the following error message appears. If the connection is successful, the following screen appears and the printer configuration is updated. The screen also displays the data transfer status. Default Printer Settings The following are the default settings used when you click Restore Defaults to Printer:

Default Printer Settings Settings Zero Print Option Autofeed Configuration Protocol Values Slash all zeros (zeros are printed with a slash) CR (carriage return at end of line without line feed) NPCP 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 41 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer Default Printer Settings Settings Parity Bit Rate Values N/A (for NPCP) 19.2 K For other printer defaults, see Factory-Installed Printer Defaults on page 175. Using the Windows 2000 or Windows XP Printer Configuration Utility These instructions apply to desktop computers running either Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating systems. Installing the Windows 2000/XP Printer Configuration Utility The Windows 2000/XP Printer Configuration Utility is provided on the 6822TKCD toolkit CD (P/N 235-145-001). To set up your PC to use the Printer Configuration Utility 1 Insert the toolkit CD in your PC. 2 From your desktop, use your Explorer application to view the contents of the toolkit CD. 42 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 3 Double-click the setup.exe executable file, then click Next from the Welcome screen to continue. 4 The printer configuration utility files are copied to the Program Files\Intermec\6822 Printer Configuration Utility folder. To install the files in a different folder, enter the path and folder name. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 43 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer You can also specify if everyone who uses the computer has access to the printer configuration files or limit access to yourself. 5 Click Disk Cost to see the amount of disk space required to install the Printer Configuration Utility. Click OK to close and return to the installation screens. 44 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 6 Click Next to verify installation, click Back to adjust the information on the previous screen, or click Cancel to exit the installation. 7 Installation Complete appears on the screen. Click Close to exit the installation program. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 45 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer Disabling the Microsoft ActiveSync Serial Port Connections If you use Microsoft ActiveSync to connect to your computers, you need to disable the serial port connections before using the Printer Configuration Utility. To disable ActiveSync 1 In the ActiveSync application on your desktop, select File >

Connection Settings. 2 Clear Allow USB connections and Allow connections to one of the following. 3 Click OK. 4 Close the ActiveSync application. Operating the Printer Configuration Utility The Printer Configuration Utility consists of a list of fonts, some parameter settings, and a printer control program. When the Printer Configuration Utility is active, it holds a configuration clipboard in memory. Initially, this configuration has parameters set to their default values. Consider the contents of the configuration clipboard as temporary and lost when you exit from the utility. Click the Get 6820 Configuration button to view the current printer configuration. 46 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer Click the Set 6820 Configuration button to change printer setting and send those settings to the printer. Click the Reset to Defaults button to reset the to the factory default printer configuration. To start the Printer Configuration Utility Click Start > Programs > Intermec > 6820 Printer Configuration Utility > PConfigApp.exe to start the Printer Configuration Utility. Communicating with the Printer You can use COM port 1, 2, or 3 to communicate with your printer. COM port 1 is the default selection, but if it is not available or is being used by another application, select another COM port. To communicate with the printer 1 Click either the Get 6820 Configuration or the Set 6820 Configuration button to open communications with the printer. The Opening COM Port x to printer . message appears in the text box when you initiate communications sith the printer. The x in the message indicates which COM port is being used. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 47 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 2 When the Press Reset on the printer message appears in the text box, press the Reset button on your printer. For the location of the Reset button on your printer, see Using the Reset Button on page 4 3 The Opening COM Port x to printer. Done. message indicates that communication between your PC and the printer has been established. Note: If Unable to open COM Port x to printer appears in the text box another software application may be using the selected COM port. Select another COM port or disable the software application using the COM port. See page 54 for more error messages. 48 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer To view the settings on your 6822 1 Click the Get 6820 Configuration button to initiate communication. 2 The Getting printer parameters . message appears when the Printer Configuration Utility retrieves configuration information from the printer. 3 The message Getting printer parameters . Done appears after configuration information is retrieved. 4 Modify configuration settings or click OK to close the Printer Configuration Utility. Setting the 6822 Configuration To modify configuration settings 1 Make changes to the Configuration Clipboard or click the Reset to Defaults button to undo your selections and return them to their defaults. Note: When using a Bluetooth adapter you must select the DTR communications protocol and a bit rate of 19.2K. 2 Click the Set 6820 Configuration button to initiate communication with the printer. The Setting printer parameters . message appears when you initiate communication with the printer. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 49 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 3 The Setting printer parameters . Done message appears when configuration parameters are set. Note: The Unable to set printer parameters message indicates a dropped connection between your PC and your printer. 4 Click OK to close the utility and detach the serial cable. To update 6822 fonts or the 6822 control program Click the Fonts and Control button to update the fonts stored in your printer or to update the printer control program. The Fonts Available for Update list shows font files that are available. The Fonts Selected for Update list show fonts that are to be installed jon the printer. 50 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer To learn what fonts are currently installed on your printer Click the Get Printer Fonts button. The installed fonts appear in the text box in the bottom right corner of the dialog. To select font files Highlight the font files you want to download in the Fonts Available for Update list. Click the right arrow pointing to the Fonts Selected for Update list to copy the selected font files to this list. Below is a sample screen. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 51 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer If the fonts you select exceed the space available in printer memory, an error message appears. Click OK to close the error message and not copy the font to the Fonts Selected for Update list. If there are two or more fonts that exceed the space allowed, this message repeats until an error message is displayed for each of the font files that went over the space allowed. The Space Needed information shown beneath the Fonts Available for Update list indicates the total space required (in bytes) for all of the fonts in the list. The Space Remaining information listed below the Fonts Selected for Update list displays the space remaining in the printer, given the fonts in the Selected list. Click Update Printer to update the printer fonts and the control program depending on the options selected on the dialog. If the Selected list is empty and the Include control program update is not checked, a Nothing selected for update message appears in the text box. Formats the printer flash for font updates and writes new font files to the printer for any fonts in the Selected list. Click the top, right arrow to copy selected font files from the Fonts Available for Update list to the Fonts Selected for Update list. Click the bottom, left arrow to remove any selected files from the Fonts Selected for Update list. Click Update Printer to update the fonts in the printer with those in the Fonts Selected for Update list. The Update progress: bar indicates the progress as the control program or fonts are written to the printer. 52 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer Check the Include program control update check box to include the printer control program when updating the printer. Note: You only need to update the control program when new versions of the control program are released. Default Printer Settings. Default Printer Settings Settings Zero Print Option Autofeed Configuration CR (carriage return at end of line without Value Print zeros without a slash Protocol Parity Bit Rate line feed) NPCP N/A (for NPCP) 19.2 K (19200) For other printer defaults, see Factory-Installed Printer Defaults on page 175. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 53 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer Error Messages There are three instances when the 6822 may not connect to your PC. In the example error messages, an x indicates the assigned COM port number. Timeout Error The timeout error may occur due to either of these situations:

The printer was not reset in the time allowed. The COM port exists on the desktop computer but nothing is connected to the port. Error Message Unable to open COM port x to printer. Printer not reset within the time allowed or printer not connected to COM port x. Port Not Found Error The COM port does not exist. The particular COM port is identified in the error message. Error Message Unable to open COM port x to printer. COM port x cannot be found. Access Denied Error The COM port exists but a connection with the 6822 is not established. The particular COM port is identified in the error message. Error Message Unable to open COM port x to printer. Access to COM port x is denied. Close applications using COM port x or try another port. Connecting to the Bluetooth Adapter If your 6822 has a Bluetooth adapter, be sure to connect this adapter after you finish reconfiguring the 6822 fonts and exit the Printer Configuration Utility (gray cable beneath the printer mechanism). To enable Microsoft ActiveSync serial port based connections 1 Start ActiveSync and select File > Connection Settings. 54 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 2 Check Allow USB connections and Allow connections to one of the following. 3 Click OK. 4 Close the ActiveSync application. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 55 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 56 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 5 Control Code Definitions This chapter contains a set of control code definitions and specifications for page layout for the 6822 printer. In this chapter you will find these sections:

Understanding control code definitions Using printer control codes Understanding the fanfold paper page layout 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 57 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Understanding Control Code Definitions I/O Buffer All characters and control codes received by the printer are stored in this buffer. Characters and controls codes are read from this buffer and acted upon to form the print buffer. Characters are removed from the I/O buffer as they are processed. Print Image Buffer All characters go through this buffer on their way to the printed page. This buffer contains the graphic image of the dots to print, from which characters are rendered. It is cleared when its contents are printed. Special Notations The following information defines notations included in the format definitions of the escape sequences, throughout this section. Special Notations Notation

(0)

(1)

NUL Description Used in the ASCII column of any of the Format definitions, indicates that its value can only be zero (and not the character 0). For example: Select Top-

Down Printing ESC US (0). Used in the ASCII column of any of the Format definitions, indicates that its value can only be one (and not the character 1). For example: Select Bottom-Up Printing ESC US (1). When a number (at the end of an escape sequence) is marked with an asterisk, then either the value corresponding to that number or the value of the string character can be used for that number. For example, if 1* is shown, then either the value (1), or the value of the string character

(decimal: 49, hex: 31) can be used. The NUL character is represented in the Dec column as 0, in the Hex column as 00, and in the ASCII column as NUL. 58 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Using Printer Control Codes Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions These control code definitions are organized by categories of functions. The following methods assist in locating control codes easily:

Alphabetically organized (complete list)refer to the Control Codes and Escape Sequences table on page 164. Locate the index for the control code, and turn directly to that page. Numeric order (single character codes only)refer to the Single Character Control Code Definitions table on page 180. Locate the index for the control code, and turn directly to that page. Numeric order (complete list)refer to the Escape Sequence Quick Reference table on page 183 and look up control codes by their actual code values. Locate the index for the escape sequence, and turn directly to that page. The print buffer is emptied. The printhead is moved to the left one character space (using the current pitch). This can be performed to, but not beyond, the left margin setting. The backspace is ignored if justification of right, full, or centered is selected. Decimal 8 Hex 08 ASCII BS The backspace control code (BS) is not reliable when text contains different character pitches. For reliable backspacing, use the escape sequence (ESC \), Set Relative Print Position. The printer produces a beep lasting approximately 1/10 of a second Decimal 7 Hex 07 ASCII BEL Backspace Format Beeper Format 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 59 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Cancel Line All of the characters currently in the print buffer are discarded. Current print position is set to left margin. Text already printed cannot be canceled Format Decimal 24 Hex 18 ASCII CAN Carriage Return Repositions the printhead at the start of the print line (usually at the left margin), and repositions the pointer to the start of the print buffer, after printing all data in the buffer. Also, all of the one line functions are reset, such as bold, double-strike, double-wide, or unidirectional printing. Decimal 13 Hex 0D ASCII CR Note: You can add an automatic line feed with a configuration item. Deletes the last character in the print buffer. This functions only in left justification. Decimal 127 Hex 7F ASCII DEL Format Delete Format 60 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Prints the contents of the print buffer, clears the print buffer, and advances the paper to the top of the next page (Top of Form), according to the current page length setting. The carriage position is moved to the start of the line Form Feed Format Decimal 12 Hex 0C ASCII FF Select Half-Speed Printing Turns on half-speed mode to provide quiet printing, and more accurate print positioning during text mode printing. Format Decimal 27 115 1*

Hex 1B 73 01*

ASCII ESC s 1*

Cancel Half-Speed Printing Turns off half-speed mode (factory default), and continues with normal speed printing. Format Decimal 27 115 0*

Hex 1B 73 00*

ASCII ESC s 0*

Set Inactivity Time for Sleep Mode Sets the amount of time the printer waits before it goes into low-power mode. The factory default is 10 seconds. Format Decimal 27 122 n Hex 1B 7A n ASCII ESC z n 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 61 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Line Feed Perform Line Feed Prints and then clears the contents of the print buffer, resets the character count to zero; and advances the printhead to the next print line, using the current spacing. The position of the carriage is not affected and a carriage return is not executed. Decimal 10 Hex 0A ASCII LF Perform n/216-inch Line Feed Advances the paper to n/216 of an inch. This does not affect subsequent line feeds. Range of n is 0-255. Decimal 27 74 n Hex 1B 4A n ASCII ESC J n Perform n/216-inch Reverse Line Feed Reverses the line feed by n/216 of an inch. This does not affect subsequent line feeds. Range of n is 0-255. Decimal 27 106 n Hex 1B 6A n ASCII ESC j n Format Format Format Perform Master Reset Initializes the printer and restores factory installed printer defaults, (see Factory-Installed Printer Defaults on page 175 for a complete list of settings that are initialized with this command). Format 62 Decimal 27 64 Hex 1B 40 ASCII ESC @

6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Set Print Position (absolute) Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Moves the printhead to an absolute horizontal position on the paper. The distance is specified in dots from the left margin to the new print position

(at which subsequent characters are printed). Each dot represents 1/60 of an inch. The values for n1 and n2 determine the distance, as follows:

number of dots = n1 + (n2 * 256) Maximum position is 480. The previous contents of the current print buffer is printed. If the position specified moves the printhead outside the current margins, the command is ignored and the previous setting remains in effect. This command is also ignored in right, center, and full justification modes. Format Decimal 27 36 n1 n2 Hex 1B 24 n1 n2 ASCII ESC $ n1 n2 Set Print Position (relative) Moves the printhead to a horizontal position on the paper, relative to the current printhead position. The distance specified is in dots. To determine n1 and n2, first calculate the displacement required in 1/120ths of an inch. If the displacement is to the left, subtract it from 65536. The values for n1 and n2 determine the distance, as follows:

number of dots = n1 + (n2 * 256) Maximum displacement is 960. If the position specified would place the printhead outside the current margins, this function is ignored and the previous setting remains in effect. This function is also ignored in right, center, and full justification modes. Format Decimal 27 92 n1 n2 Hex 1B 5C n1 n2 ASCII ESC \ n1 n2 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 63 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select Top-Down Printing Enables top-down printing (factory default). First page is printed first. Format Format Format Format Decimal 27 31 0 Hex 1B 1F 00 ASCII ESC US (0) Select Bottom-Up Printing Enables bottom-up printing. The last page is printed first. Decimal 27 31 1 Hex 1B 1F 01 ASCII ESC US (1) Select Unidirectional Printing Turns on unidirectional printing mode. Unidirectional printing moves the printhead from left-to-right only, allowing for more accurate print positioning during text mode printing. Decimal 27 85 1*

Hex 1B 55 01*

ASCII ESC U 1*

Cancel Unidirectional Printing Turns off unidirectional printing (factory default), allowing the printhead to print in both directions Decimal 27 85 0*

Hex 1B 55 00) ASCII ESC U 0*

64 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select Unidirectional (one line) Printing Turns on unidirectional printing for the current line only. The contents of the print buffer is printed, and cleared before setting this mode. This allows more accurate print positioning during text mode printing, for the current line. Format Decimal 27 60 Hex 1B 3C ASCII ESC <

Page Formatting Functions This set of functions consists of control codes that change the formatting of the page. The page length (form length) and margin settings define the printable area on the page. These settings need to conform to the actual size of the paper used in the printer. The line spacing functions set the amount of space from one line to the next, for line feeds. The factory default is 1/6 inch (6 lines per inch). The page length, vertical tab, and skip over perforation functions are also dependent on the line spacing function. Set Page Length (lines) Sets the length of the paper in lines, where the range of n (number of lines) is 1-127 (default = 66). Keep in mind the line spacing and actual length of the paper when specifying this value, since this function is dependent on those parameters. Top-of-Form is reset to the current line and the Skip Over Perforation setting is canceled. Format Decimal 27 67 n Hex 1B 43 n ASCII ESC C n 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 65 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Set Page Length (inches) Sets thee length of the paper in inches, where the range of n (number of inches) is 1-22 (default = 11). Keep in mind the line spacing and actual length of the paper when specifying this value, since this function is dependent on those parameters. Top-of-Form is reset to the current line and the Skip Over Perforation setting is canceled. Decimal 27 67 0 n Hex 1B 43 00 n ASCII ESC C NUL n Select 1/8-inch Line Spacing Sets the line spacing is set to 1/8 of an inch (8 lines per inch), for subsequent lines. Decimal 27 48 Hex 1B 30 ASCII ESC 0 Select 7/72-inch Line Spacing (7 dots) Sets the line spacing to 7/72 of an inch (approximately 9.7 lines per inch), for subsequent lines. Decimal 27 49 Hex 1B 31 ASCII ESC 1 Select 1/6-inch Line Spacing Sets the line spacing to 1/6 of an inch (6 lines per inch), for subsequent lines (factory default). 1/6 inch is equal to 12 dot spacing. Decimal 27 50 Hex 1B 32 ASCII ESC 2 Format Format Format Format 66 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Format Format Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select n/216-inch Line Spacing Sets the line spacing to n/216 of an inch, for subsequent lines. A spacing of 1/216 inch is 1/3 the distance between pins of the printhead

(approximately 1/3 of a dot) and 27/216 is 8 lines per inch. Range of n is 0-255. Decimal 27 51 n Hex 1B 33 n ASCII ESC 33 n Select n/72-inch Line Spacing (n dots) Sets the line spacing to n/72 of an inch, for subsequent lines. A spacing of 1/72 inch (1 point in font size) is the distance between pins on the printhead (approximately 1 dot) and 9/72 is 8 lines per inch. Range of n is 0-85. Decimal 27 59 n Hex 1B 41 n ASCII ESC A n Set Right Margin Clears all text in the print buffer and sets the right margin to n columns, using the current character pitch. This is the number of the characters from column 1 (at the left edge of the paper) to the last column before the right margin (factory default = 80). Minimum space between margins is the width of one double-width pica character. Maximum value for this is the maximum number of characters

(based on the current pitch) that would fit between the left margin and the right edge of the default printable area of the page. Ranges shown below could vary, depending on values of other parameters that affect character width. If the value specified is not within the allowed range, it is ignored. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 67 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Range of n is 2-80 in Pica mode, 2-96 in Elite mode, and 2-136 in Compressed mode. Decimal 27 81 n Hex 1B 51 n ASCII ESC Q n Set Left Margin Clears the print buffer text and sets the left margin, relative to the number of columns to the left of the first column to print

(factory default = 0). Minimum space between margins is the width of one double-width pica character. Maximum value must be less than the right margin. Ranges shown below could vary, pending on other parameter values that affect character width. If the specified value is not within the range, it is ignored. Range of n is 0-78 in Pica mode; 0-93 in Elite mode, and 0-133 in Compressed mode. Decimal 27 108 n Hex 1B 6C n ASCII ESC l n Set Skip Over Perforation Defines the number of lines to skip between the last printed line on the page and the first printed line on the next page is set. If the value specified for this function is greater than the page length, it is ignored. This function is canceled by using one of the Set Page Length functions

(factory default = disabled). This function is valid for continuous paper only. The amount of space left blank at the bottom of the printed page is dependent upon the current Line Spacing. Decimal 27 78 n Hex 1B 4E n ASCII ESC N n 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Format Format Format 68 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Cancel Skip Over Perforation Cancels the skip over perforation, which allows the maximum number of lines to print on each page. Format Decimal 27 79 Hex 1B 4F ASCII ESC O Character Style and Text Mode Functions The following set of functions affect the appearance of text on the printed page. This could involve size, typeface, or other characteristics of the text. Select Condensed Mode (compressed) Selects condensed mode which prints characters at approximately 60%

of the normal width. This results in character pitches, as shown below

(for exact pitch values, see Master Select on page 74). Character Pitches Condensed Mode 17 cpi (approximate) Condensed + Expanded 9 cpi (approximate) Condensed + Elite 20 cpi (approximate) This function empties the print buffer and turns compressed mode on, and stays on until canceled by Cancel Compressed Mode, ESC SI or DC2 (factory default = disabled). Note: This function is not supported in Double-Byte Character Sets (DBCS). Format Decimal 27 15 15 Hex 1B 0F 0F ASCII ESC SI SI 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 69 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Cancel Condensed Mode Cancels the compressed mode, enabled by Select Compressed Mode, SI or ESC SI (1). Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Format Format Format Decimal 27 18 18 Hex 1B 12 12 ASCII DC2 DC2 Select Double-Strike Mode Enables double-strike printing, until Cancel Double-Strike Mode is encountered. Factory default disables double-strike. Text is made bolder by printing each dot twice, with the second dot slightly below the first dot. This mode is not available in NLQ, but is not canceled when you select NLQ. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Decimal 27 71 Hex 1B 47 ASCII ESC G Cancel Double-Strike Mode Cancels Double-Strike Mode. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Decimal 27 72 Hex 1B 48 ASCII ESC H 70 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select Double-Wide Mode Enables expanded print for the current line only. The mode set previously returns on subsequent lines. However, expanded print can be canceled with Cancel Expanded Print, DC4 or ESC W (0), before end of current line, or wrapping of the print buffer. This works with all three pitches (Pica, Elite, Compressed). This mode is also terminated by the execution of a Carriage Return, Line Feed, Form Feed, Vertical Tab or wrapping of the print buffer. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Decimal 27 14 14 Hex 1B 0E 0E ASCII ESC SO SO Cancel Double-Wide Print Cancels expanded print for the current line only. Modes set previously return on subsequent lines. However, it does not cancel expanded mode set by Select Double-Wide (expanded) Mode, ESC W (1) or Master Select, ESC !. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Decimal 27 20 20 Hex 1B 14 14 ASCII DC4 DC4 Select Double-Wide Mode Enables expanded print until Cancel Expanded Print is encountered. Factory default disables double-wide mode. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Format Format 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 71 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Format Decimal 27 87 1*

Hex 1B 57 01*

ASCII ESC W 1*

Cancel Double-Wide Mode Cancels Double-Wide Print mode. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Format Format Decimal 27 87 0*

Hex 1B 57 00*

ASCII ESC W 0 Select Elite Pitch A character pitch of 12 cpi (characters per inch) is selected. This also cancels Pica Pitch (factory default = Pica). Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Decimal 27 77 Hex 1B 4D ASCII ESC M Select Emphasized Print Mode Enables Emphasized Print mode until Cancel Emphasized Mode is encountered. The text is made bolder by printing each dot twice, with the second dot slightly to the right of the first dot. Factory default disables Emphasized mode. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. 72 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Decimal 27 69 Hex 1B 4B ASCII ESC E Cancel Emphasized Print Mode Cancels Emphasized Pring mode. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Format Format Decimal 27 70 Hex 1B 46 ASCII ESC F Defining Intercharacter Space Format Format Defines the amount of space to the right of each character, in addition to the space allowed in the character design. The variable n represents the number of units of space, with each unit equal to 1/120 of an inch. Range of values for n is 0-63 with a factory default of 0. Decimal 27 32 n Hex 1B 20 n ASCII ESC SP n Select Italic Mode The text (nongraphic) characters are italicized. Factory default disables Italic mode. Note: This function does not work well with DBCS or alternate Single Byte Character Sets (SBCS). Decimal 27 52 Hex 1B 34 ASCII ESC 4 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 73 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Cancel Italic Mode Cancels the Italic mode. Note: This function does not work well with DBCS or alternate Single Byte Character Sets (SBCS). Format Format Decimal 27 53 Hex 1B 35 ASCII ESC 5 Master Select Allows you to specify a combination of print modes. The variable n is determined by combining values for the desired modes, by adding them together. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Decimal 27 33 n Hex 1B 21 n ASCII ESC ! n Valid combinations of the values in the following table include any combinations except that Pica cannot combine with Elite. Example Pica Compressed Italic Underlined, by adding values (00h + 04h + 40h +

80h), which results in C4h for the value of n. Master Select Values Hex Value 00h 01h 04h 08h 10h 20h Mode Pica Elite Condensed (compressed) Emphasized Double-Strike Double-Width (expanded) 74 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Master Select Values (continued) Hex Value 40h 80h Mode Italic Underlined The following print conflicts occur between modes. A mode in any column takes precedence over all modes in the columns to its right. 1 Elite 2 Emphasized 3 Compressed The following print modes can be combined producing different pitches:

Print Conflicts Print Modes Pitch 5 cpi 6 cpi 8.58 cpi 10 cpi 12 cpi 17.16 cpi Mode Expanded Expanded Elite Expanded Compressed Pica Elite Compressed Select Pica Pitch Selecta a character pitch of 10 cpi (characters per inch) (factory default). This also cancels Elite pitch. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Format Decimal 27 60 Hex 1B 50 ASCII ESC P 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 75 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select Superscript Mode Prints all subsequent characters in approximately 2/3 the normal height in the upper part of the character space, until Cancel Subscript/

Superscript is encountered. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Format Format Format Decimal 27 83 0*

Hex 1B 53 00*

ASCII ESC S 0*

Select Subscript Mode Prints all subsequent characters in approximately 2/3 the normal height in the lower part of the character space, until Cancel Subscript/

Superscript is encountered. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Decimal 27 83 1*

Hex 1B 53 01*

ASCII ESC S 1*

Cancel Subscript/Superscript Mode Cancels the effects produced by Select Superscript Mode and Select Subscript Mode. Factory default also disables both of these modes. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Decimal 27 84 Hex 1B 54 ASCII ESC T 76 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select Underline Mode Enables the underlining of all subsequent characters (including spaces) until the Cancel Underline mode function is encountered. Decimal 27 45 1*

Hex 1B 2D 01*

ASCII ESC 1*

Cancel Underline Mode Cancels the effect of the Select Underline mode. Factory default also disables the Underline mode. Format Format Decimal 27 45 0*

Hex 1B 2D 00*

ASCII ESC 0*

Tabs and Tab Setting Functions There are control codes for setting horizontal and vertical tabs. Horizontal tabs:

Are not affected by subsequent changes in pitch. May range up to maximum width for character and printer size. All previous tab stops are cleared when new tab stops are set. If the left margin is changed after the horizontal tabs are set, tab stops are cleared. Become absolute positions and are not affected by any subsequent change in character size. Set outside of the printable area are ignored. Vertical tabs:

Tab positions are line numbers, counting from the Top of Form. All tabs set beyond the page length are stored, but are not used. Any tab set within the SOP range (Skip Over Perforation), during the time SOP is active, are stored but not used until SOP is canceled. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 77 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions If a vertical tab, and the next tab stop is outside the printable page area, a form feed is executed placing the printhead at the next Top of Form. Previous tab stops are cleared when new tab stops are set. Are not affected by subsequent changes in line spacing. Perform Horizontal Tab Moves the print position to the next horizontal tab stop. The tab positions, set by ESC D, the Set Horizontal Tabs function, are not affected by any changes in character pitch. The factory default tab settings are at intervals of eight characters, in the currently selected pitch. For the default tabs, the actual distance to each tab position is affected by changes in character pitch. Decimal 9 Hex 09 ASCII HT Set Horizontal Tabs Resets the current horizontal tabs, and new horizontal tabs are set up, based on the current character width (pitch). Format Format Decimal 27 68 n1 n2 ..nk 0 1B 44 n1 n2 .. nk 00 ESC D n1 n2 .. nk NUL ASCII Hex n1 is the first tab (range for tab stops: 1-160), n2 is the second tab (all tabs in ascending order), ... are subsequent tabs (maximum tabs: 32), nk is the last tab to set (any value less than the previous tab value acts as a terminating character), NUL is the terminating character. 78 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Clear Horizontal Tabs Clears all horizontal tab stops. It is merely a variant behavior of the Set Horizontal Tabs function, where the NUL acts as an early terminating character, as existing tabs normally clear before setting any new tabs. Decimal 27 68 0 Hex 1B 44 00 ASCII ESC D NUL Perform Vertical Tab Prints the contents of the current print buffer, and then moves the print position to the next vertical tab stop. If no channel is selected, then channel 0 is used. The carriage position is changed to the start of the next print line. If the vertical tab is performed beyond the last tab position set or beyond the last line of a form, then a form feed is performed. If no vertical tabs are defined, then the paper advances one line, using the currently selected line spacing, without changing the carriage position. Decimal 11 Hex 0B ASCII VT Set Vertical Tabs Resets the current tabs, and vertical tabs are set up, based on the current line spacing. Tab settings are not affected by subsequent changes in line spacing. Format Format Format Decimal 27 66 n1 n2 .. nk 0 1B 42 n1 n2 .. nk 00 ESC B n1 n2 .. nk NUL ASCII Hex n1 is the first tab (range of values for tab stops: 1-255), n2 is the second tab (all tabs must be in ascending order), ... are subsequent tabs

(maximum number of tabs: 16), nk is the last tab to set (any value less than the previous tab value acts as a terminating character), NUL is the terminating character. All tab settings with this function are stored in channel 0. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 79 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Format Format Format Clear Vertical Tabs Clears all vertical tab stops . This is a variant behavior of the Set Vertical Tabs function, where the NUL acts as an early terminating character. Decimal 27 66 0 Hex 1B 42 00 ASCII ESC B NUL Set Vertical Tabs in Channel This function works the same as the Set Vertical Tabs function, except that it stores the tabs into a specified channel, as specified by the variable c. This channel is selected for use by the Select Vertical Tab Channel function. Decimal 27 98 c n1 n2 .. nk 0 1B 62 c n1 n2 .. nk 00 ESC b c n1 n2 .. nk NUL ASCII Hex c is the channel number (range: 0-7), n1 is the first tab (range of values for tab stops: 1-255), n2 is the second tab (all tabs must be in ascending order), ... are subsequent tabs (maximum number of tabs: 16), nk is the last tab to set (any value less than the previous tab value acts as a terminating character), and NUL is the terminating character. Clear Vertical Tabs in Channel Clears all vertical tab stops in the specified channel. This is merely a variant behavior of the Set Vertical Tabs in Channel function, where the NUL acts as an early terminating character, since this function normally clears the existing tabs before setting any new tabs. Decimal 27 98 c 0 Hex 1B 62 c 00 ASCII ESC b c NUL 80 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select Vertical Tab Channel Selects a specified vertical tab channel. It sets up the current tabs from that channel. Once this function is performed, all subsequent Perform Vertical Tab commands use the tab stops from the list retrieved from the specified channel. At power on, the printer uses the tabs stored in channel 0. Format Decimal 27 47 c Hex 1B 2F c ASCII ESC / c c is the channel number (range: 0-7). Using Character Sets and User-Defined Functions You can install different character sets on the printer. In some cases more than one character set may be present at one time, depending on the amount of available font memory. The 6822 reserves 438K of memory for installing fonts in flash memory. You can install fonts using NPCP or the Printer Configuration Utility. Single-Byte Character Sets Single-byte character sets (SBCS) are supported for MS-DOS, PL/N, and Intermec application compatibility. Nft00000.mod is the default character set (font) for compatibility with the 6822 80-Column Printer. Nft00437.mod is the IBM/Microsoft compatible character set for code page 437. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 81 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Double-Byte Character Sets Double-byte character (DBCS) sets require two bytes to send to the printer to define the character to print. The first byte of the character code sent to the printer is known as a lead-in byte. The second byte of the character code is known as the trailing byte. Different character sets have different requirements for the values of both lead-in and trailing byte. When the lead-in byte does not fall in the range listed for the character set, a character from a SBCS may print. The following double-

byte character sets are supported by the 6822. Double Byte Character Sets Code Page 936 Font Module nft00936.mod nft00950.mod nft00932.mod nft00949.mod 950 932 949 DBCS Languages GB 2312 Chinese

(simplified) big 5 Traditional Chinese Shift JIS Japanese KSC 5601 Korean Lead-in Byte A1hABh B0hF7h A1hC6h C9hF9h 81h9Fh E0hFCh A1hACh B0hC8h CAhFDh Trailing Byte A1hFEh 40hFEh (except 7Fh) 40hFCh (except 7Fh) A1hFEh Multi-Byte Character Sets Double-byte character sets and single-byte character sets can mix when printing a report. This mixture is referred to as a Multi-Byte Character Set (MBCS). When a DBCS is selected, the characters from the SBCS code page currently selected are used for rendering character codes and control codes from 0 to 127. Codes above 127 (that fall within the range of lead-in bytes for the selected character set) treat the byte that follows as a trailing byte for that character set. Otherwise, for character codes above 128, the character code from the selected SBCS is printed. NFT00950.MOD (BIG 5 DBCS) does not allow the MBCS mode. For this character set, only control codes from 0-31 are treated as single byte characters when they are not proceeded by a lead-in byte. All escape sequence character strings are treated as SBCS. 82 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Format Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select National Character Set By default, code page 0 is selected by the printer at reset. Use the following escape sequence to select international character support. Escape sequence codes can only be used for code page 0. All other code pages use direct character code mapping to select the appropriate font for rendering. Decimal 27 82 n Hex 1B 52 n ASCII ESC R n n is 0-14 and is the country code, as shown in the International Character Sets table on the next page. The default value for n is zero (USA). A full 256 character set is not provided for these sets. There are 64 international characters stored in ROM, 32 in Roman and 32 in Italic. They are stored as codes 0-31 and 128-255. These are normally not accessible. The ESC R command makes these codes available, but only 12 characters at a time. These 12 are available in these positions of the ASCII character table: 35, 36, 64, 91, 92, 93, 94, 96, 123, 124, 125, and 126, as shown in the International Character Sets table. International Character Sets Country USA France Germany England (UK) Denmark 1 Sweden Italy Spain 1 Japan Norway Denmark 2 Spain 2 Latin America Country Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 35

P

64 92 93

94 36 91

96

123 124 125 126

b

6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 83 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions International Character Sets (continued) Country Hebrew Greek Country Number 13 14 96 94 91 64 36 92 93 35 123 124 125 126 Hebrew fonts are available in the supplied font files. See Hebrew Character Fonts below. Greek fonts are available in the supplied font files. See the Greek Character Sets on page 85. Hebrew Character Fonts Hebrew characters represented by decimal values 38 and 65 through 90 are represented by the following 7x7 font descriptions. 70 69 68 67 66 72 71

*.*.*.* ..*...* .....*. *....*. .....* ...*... *....*. *....*. ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... *.*.*.. ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... 65

....... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... 73

....... ...... .....* ....... .....* ....... *...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... 81 80 75 74 77 78 79 85 88 83 84 82 86 76 87 84 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions

....... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... 89 90 91 Greek Character Sets Chr Dec A 97 B 98 99 G D 100 E 101 102 Z H 103 104 q Hex 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 Dec 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 Hex 69 6a 6b 6c 6d 6e 6f 70 Chr I K L M N X O P Dec 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 Hex 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 Chr P S T Y F X Y W The selected set stays in effect until the printer is reset and receives a Master Reset command, or a new international character set is selected. Note: This function is only used with the default character set. User Defined Characters This code addresses user-defined characters and selection into memory. Note: RAM-based definition or redefinition of standard characters is only useful when the default SBCS code page is selected. There is no method to redefine characters in the other code pages, since unique code pages can be created and loaded into the printer memory. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 85 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Copy ROM to RAM The characters in ROM are copied into RAM, so a complete user-defined character set is created by editing selected characters. This ensures that all characters are defined when a user-defined character set is selected. This eliminates the need to cancel the selection when printing defined characters. Note: This function is only useful with the default SBCS. Format Format Decimal 27 58 0 0 0 Hex 1B 3A 00 00 00 ASCII ESC . NUL NUL NUL Define User-Defined Characters Characters are redefined by the user in the currently selected mode. However, they can only be used in draft mode. Note: This function is only useful with the default SBCS. Decimal 27 38 0 k1 k2 s1 d1 ... d11 Hex 1B 26 00 k1 k2 s1 d1 ... d11 ASCII ESC & k1 k2 s1 d1.....d11 k1 is the character code of the first character to redefine, k2 is the character code of the last character to redefine (any character between 0-255 can be redefined), and (k1 could equal k2, if only one character is defined). For each character defined, you must supply 12 bytes of data. Bits 0-3 represent the end position in the grid Bits 4-6 represent the start position in the grid Bit 7 determines whether the character uses the top eight pins or the bottom eight pins of the printhead. If bit 7 = 0, the top eight pins are s1 is the first byte that describes the character format 86 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions used. If bit 7 = 1, the bottom eight pins are used. The start and end positions are ignored during character imaging, but must be accurate to redefine the character code. d1...d11 is the data that comprises the dot image pattern of the defined character. When printable code expansion is enabled with ESC I, the Printable Code Area Expansion function, and the user-defined character set is selected with ESC % (1), the Select User-Defined Set function, then the codes (less than 20h and greater than 7Fh) can be defined for use and are printable. When printable code expansion is enabled with the Enable Printing of Codes 128-159 function, and the user-defined character set is selected with the Select User-Defined Set function, then codes (between 80h and 9Fh) can be defined for use and are printable. For a list of these characters, refer to the Printable Code Expansion Characters on page 89 Select User-Defined Character Set A user-defined character set can be selected, after the Define User-Defined Characters function is used to define the character set. Note: This function is only useful with the default SBCS. Decimal 27 37 1 Hex 1B 25 01 ASCII ESC % (1) Select Default Character Set If the Select User-Defined Set function was previously set, this function switches back to the default character set. Note: This function is only useful with the default SBCS. Format Format Decimal 27 37 0 Hex 1B 25 00 ASCII ESC % (0) 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 87 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Format Format Enable Printing of Codes 128-159 All codes (128-159) are treated as printable characters, rather than control codes, with this function. This allows the use of these characters for user-defined characters. A user-defined set must be selected, using the Select User-Defined Set function, before these characters can print. Factory default disables printing of these codes.. Note: This function can only be used when the default SBCS is selected. Decimal 27 54 Hex 1B 36 ASCII ESC 6 Disable Printing of Codes 128-159 Disables the printing of codes 128-159. By default, these codes are disabled. Decimal 27 55 Hex 1B 37 ASCII ESC 7 Expand Printable Code Area This function allows certain ASCII codes (00h to 1Fh) and codes (80h to 9Fh) to print when the variable n is set to the value of 1. This allows the use of these codes for user-defined characters. If n = 0, the function returns these two ranges of characters to non-printable control codes. A user-defined character set must be selected by ESC % (1), the Enable Printing of Codes 128-159 function, before these codes can print. In both ranges, only the following codes can redefine as printable characters. Codes not listed, within the range (00h-1Fh), print as standard control codes. Codes not listed, within the range (80h-9Fh), are converted to a control code in the range of (00h-1Fh), by subtraction of 80h. Note: This function is only useful with the default SBCS. 88 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Format Decimal 27 73 n Hex 1B 49 n ASCII ESC I n Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Printable Code Expansion Characters ASCII Hex DC1 00 NAK 01 02 SYN ETB 03 FS 04 GS 05 06 RS US 10 ASCII NUL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK DLE Hex 11 15 16 17 1C 1D 1E 1F Hex 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 90 ASCII none none none none none none none none Hex 91 95 96 97 9C 9D 9E 9F ASCII none none none none none none none none Format Enable Printing of Character Graphics Enables the printing of character graphics, until disabled with the Disable Printing of Character Graphics function. Note: This function is only useful with the default SBCS. Decimal 27 116 1 Hex 1B 74 01 ASCII ESC t (1) For character values from 0 to 31 (00h-1Fh):

When the default SBCS code page is selected, the FX-86e IBM character graphics symbol set is printed. When other SBCS code pages are selected, the codes (00h-1Fh), listed above in the Printable Code Expansion Characters table are printed. For character values from 32 to 126 (20h-7Eh):

6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 89 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions When the default SBCS code page is selected, the selected international character set is printed. When other SBCS code pages are selected, the international character set selection is not in effect. For the character value 127 (7Fh):

When the default SBCS code page is selected, a space is printed When other SBCS code pages are selected, the character associated with the code page is printed. For character values from 128 to 255 (80h-FFh), the FX-86e Epson Character Graphics set is printed. Disable Printing of Character Graphics Disables the printing of character graphics. Factory default disables this function. Decimal 27 116 0 Hex 1B 74 00 ASCII ESC t (0) Printing Character Graphics This function allows printing of character graphics from the currently selected SBCS code page, by sending a graphics string to the printer. The values of the graphics data bytes can range between 0-255. Decimal 27 43 n d1 ... dn Hex 1B 2B n d1 ... dn ASCII ESC + n d1 ... dn n is the length of the character graphic string and d1 ... dn are the character graphics data stream. The number of data bytes must be equal to the value of the variable n. The range of values (for the characters in each graphics data byte):

0-255. For character values from 0 to 31 (00h-1Fh):

Format Format 90 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions When the default SBCS code page is selected, the FX-86e IBM character graphics symbol set is printed. When other SBCS code pages are selected, currently selected single byte code page character graphics are printed. For character values from 32 to 126 (20h-7Eh):

When the default SBCS code page is selected, the selected international character set is printed. When other SBCS code pages are selected, the character from the currently selected code page are printed. For the character value 127 (7Fh):

When the default SBCS code page is selected, a space is printed When other SBCS code pages are selected, the character graphics symbol is printed. For character values from 128 to 255 (80h-FFh):

When the default SBCS code page is selected, the FX-86e Epson Character Graphics set is printed. When other SBCS code pages are selected, the corresponding character is printed. Graphics Functions Eight-Pin Graphics Modes All 8-pin graphics functions require parameters, n1 and n2, which represent the length of the graphics string that follows the Select Graphics Mode command, and are calculated as follows (assuming a temporary variable n):

The simplest calculation, is to divide n (total number of dots needed for the graphics string) by 256. Then n2 is the quotient (the whole number) and n1 is the remainder. If you require less than 256 dots (columns), then n1 indicates the number of dots and n2 is set to zero. n = total number of graphics dots needed for the graphic string n2 = integer of (n divided by 256) n1 = remainder of the n2 calculation 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 91 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Format Format Select Graphics Mode Enables the Graphics moderepresented by the variable m in the Graphic Modes table. The total number of dot columns to print is represented by n1 and n2. Any graphic string that exceeds the length of the print line is discarded. Decimal 27 42 m n1 n2 Hex 1B 2A m n1 n2 ASCII ESC * m n1 n2 Reassign Graphics Mode Changes Graphic modes. Decimal 27 63 s n Hex 1B 3F s n ASCII ESC ? s n s is one of the K, I, Y, or Z characters and n is one of the 0-7 modes as shown in Graphic Modes table. Graphic Modes Mode Single-density Low Speed Doubledensity

*High Speed Double-density

*Low-Speed Quadruple-density CRT I SingleDensity Plotter CRT II

*Double-Density Plotter

*Adjacent dots in a given row cannot be printed in these modes. m Dots per Inch / Dots per 8 in Line 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 60 dots per inch, 480 dots per 8 in line 120 dots per inch, 960 dots per 8 in line 120 dots per inch, 920 dots per 8 in line 240 dots per inch, 1920 dots per 8 in line 60 dots per inch, 480 dots per 8 in line 72 dots per inch, 576 dots per 8 in line 90 dots per inch, 720 dots per 8 in line 144 dots per inch, 1152 dots per 8 in line 92 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Format Format Format Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select Single Density Graphics Mode This is a simple method of printing graphics. The resolution is 60 dots per inch. Each 8 in line can accommodate 480 columns of graphic dots. A graphic string that exceeds the length of the print line is discarded. Calculating the parameters, n1 and n2, is described on page 94. Decimal 27 75 n1 n2 Hex 1B 4B n1 n2 ASCII ESC K n1 n2 Select Low-Speed Double Density Graphics Mode If Single Density graphics does not produce high enough density, try this mode. The number of dots per inch is doubled. However, the speed is reduced to half of what it would be with single density. Calculating the parameters, n1 and n2, is described on page 94. This is 8-pin single density graphics. The resolution is now 120 dots per inch. Each 8-inch line can accommodate 960 columns of graphic dots. A graphic string that exceeds the length of the print line is discarded. Decimal 27 76 n1 n2 Hex 1B 4C n1 n2 ASCII ESC L n1 n2 Select High-Speed Double Density Graphics Mode This 8-pin graphics mode produces the same density as the Low-Speed Double Density mode, however, the speed is doubled. Calculating the parameters, n1 and n2, is described on page 94. Decimal 27 89 n1 n2 Hex 1B 59 n1 n2 ASCII ESC Y n1 n2 The resolution is still 120 dots per inch. Each 8-in line can accommodate 960 columns of graphic dots. A graphic string that exceeds the length of the print line is discarded. Make sure adjacent dots in a given dot row are not printed. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 93 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select Low-Speed Quadruple Density Graphics Mode With this 8-pin graphics mode, the number of dots per inch has gone up to 4x what it was in single density. Calculating the parameters, n1 and n2, is described on page 94. Decimal 27 90 n1 n2 Hex 1B 5A n1 n2 ASCII ESC Z n1 n2 The resolution is now 240 dots per inch. Each 8-in line can accommodate 1920 columns of graphic dots. A graphic string that exceeds the length of the print line is discarded. Make sure adjacent dots in a given dot row are not printed. Nine-Pin Graphics Modes These 9-pin graphics functions also require two parameters, n1 and n2. However, they are calculated slightly different than in the 8-pin graphics modes. Since two data bytes represent each dot column to print, first divide the total length of the graphic string (following the Select ... Graphics Mode command) by two. These parameters are calculated as follows (assuming a temporary variable n):

First, divide n (the total number of dots needed for the graphics string) by 2, then divide the result by 256. Then n2 is the quotient (the whole number) and n1 is the remainder. If you require less than 256 dots

(columns), then n1 indicates the number of dots and n2 is set to zero. Select 9-Pin Single Density Graphics Mode Enables Single Density 9-pin Graphics mode. Calculating the parameters, n1 and n2, is described previously under Nine-Pin Graphics Modes. n = total number of dots needed, divided by 2 n2 = integer of (n divided by 256) n1 = remainder of the n2 calculation Decimal 27 94 0 n1 n2 Hex 1B 5E 00 n1 n2 ASCII ESC ^ (0) n1 n2 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Format Format 94 Format Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions The resolution is 60 dots per inch. Each 8-in line can accommodate 480 columns of graphic dots. A graphic string that exceeds the length of the print line is discarded. Select 9-Pin Double Density Graphics Mode Enables Double Density, 9-pin graphics Mode. The parameters, n1 and n2, is described previously under Nine-Pin Graphics Modes Decimal 27 94 1 n1 n2 Hex 1B 5E 01 n1 n2 ASCII ESC ^ (1) n1 n2 The resolution is now 120 dots per inch. Each 8-in line can accommodate 960 columns of graphic dots. A graphic string that exceeds the length of the print line is discarded. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 95 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions 96 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual

 

 

6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 6 Troubleshooting This chapter helps you correct printing problems that may occur. If you experience a printing problem, you can perform several tests to find and possibly correct the problem. In this chapter you will find these sections:

Checking the power source Aligning the printer mechanism Troubleshooting system components Communications pin-out configurations 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 97 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Checking the Power Source Press any button on the printer control panel. If there is power, the power indicator (green LED) turns on and the printhead moves to its starting position. If the printer emits beeps and any of the other indicators light up or flash, observe the number of beeps and indicator flashes and see Printer Failure Indicators on page 102 If there is no reaction from the printer after you press a key on the control panel, or only the green power light blinks, verify that the power cables are properly connected between the printer mechanism and its power source (internal battery, vehicle cable, or ac). If none of these steps wake up the printer with the problem, then you need to return the printer for service. Internal battery Check the battery and its cable by installing into another known-

good printer. Vehicle cable Attach the printer in question to another vehicle power cable. AC power Plug the printer into another outlet. Aligning the Printer Mechanism If head jams occur, you may need to align the printer mechanism. To align the printer mechanism 1 Open the printer top cover, then install a ribbon cartridge (see page 15) and position the printhead to the far left toward the green thumb wheel. 98 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting 2 Check the area between the printhead and the printer cavity. If the ribbon cartridge touches the pivot frame, the printer mechanism needs realignment. Pivot frame Printhead at far left in the printer 3 Loosen the four screws that hold the mechanism in place using a Phillips screwdriver (see the following illustration). 4 Push the printer mechanism to the right away from the green thumb wheel. 5 Press on the right side of the printer mechanism to the back as far as it will go. Note: In this position, the right back edge of the printer mechanism may touch the pivot frame. The left side must not touch the pivot frame. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 99 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting 6 Hold the printer mechanism in place and tighten the screws in the sequence shown below. 3 Top left 1 Top right 2 Bottom left 4 Bottom right Four screws hold down the printer mechanism Troubleshooting System Components The printing system is composed of four basic components: printer, computer, power source, and communications. Any one of these components can prevent the printer from functioning properly. Verifying the Printer Components Power Source Verification Start by verifying that power is available at the printer. Visually inspect the control panel to verify that the power indicator (green LED) is lit. If it is not, press the Set Page button and note if the power indicator lights up. If it does, the power system is all right. If it does not, press the printer reset button. If the power indicator still does not light, check the power cable, by connecting it to a different printer. If the power indicator works on the new printer, then the cable is all right, and the printer that was originally connected is suspect. If it does not light, then the problem is most likely the cable or the power source. Depending on the results, either replace the cable or return the printer for service. 100 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Printer Verification If the power indicator works properly and the printer still does not print, then printer errors are noted. If any indicators light when you press the Set Page button, or the printer beeps, refer to the Printer Failure Indicators table on page 102 to determine the problem. If none of the listed conditions are indicated by the beep codes and LEDs, yet the printer does not perform properly, then perform a printer self-test. Press and hold (for several seconds) both Form Feed and the Set Page buttons at the same time, until the printer beeps and all indicator lights come on. The lights change throughout the test, as it progresses. At the end of the self-test, the printer generates a report. This report verifies the following: errors detected during self-test, the error history, and the communication configuration. If the printer self-test report does not print, then reset the printer. If the report does print after resetting, then the printer is all right and the reason the printer does not respond to PC print requests is probably communications or PC related. If the report is partially completed, and a printer error occurs during the printing of self-test, refer to the Printer Failure Indicators table on page 102 for the cause of the printer failure. Perform a power-on-self-test (POST) to test for errors either by resetting the printer or powering it up. If errors occur, audible error codes, along with indicator light status, are produced during POST (see the POST Error Codes table on page 104). If the POST completes without error, try the printer self-test again. If the self-test prints correctly, but the printer does not respond to the PC, then the problem may be related to communications or PC problems. Communications / PC Verification Use the self-test report to verify that the communications protocol options, selected at the printer, match those expected by the host. If they do not match the expected results, reconfigure the printer using the control panel configuration modes described below in the Configuration part of this chapter. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 101 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting If the protocol options match, then the communications cable may be defective. To determine if the cable is working, substitute a new cable. If the PC is suspect, substitute a different PC. A defective computer dock might be another possibility. Understanding Printer Errors Printer Errors are divided into classes:

Runtime errors POST errors, Fatal errors (consisting of flash write errors and EEPROM block errors). Runtime Errors Runtime errors can occur during the course of printing. These errors are displayed on the LEDs, along with beep sequences. This causes the printer to stop printing and enter an error state. Then beep sequences are emitted, LED codes are displayed, the error status may be sent to the host (depending on the protocol), and the printer goes into suspend mode. The printer exits from the suspend mode when the user presses one of the keyboard keys or communications is resumed from the host. The printer also places the printhead in its home position and attempts to recover from the error condition. Until the error condition is corrected, the error procedure does not end, and the error state is not removed. For paper out errors, load paper and press the Set Page button before printing begins. Press the Form Feed button to load the paper to the top of form. The following table provides a listing of printer failure indicators and describes what they mean. Printer Failure Indicators Sets of Beeps 1 beep 1 set of 2 beeps Paper Out Head Jam Low Batt Off Off On 2 blinks Off Off 1 set of 3 beeps Off Off 3 blinks Meaning 12 V under voltage fault (Low Battery) 12 V over voltage fault (Input Voltage too high) 24 V under voltage fault (internal power supply failure) 102 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Printer Failure Indicators (continued) Sets of Beeps 1 set of 4 beeps Paper Out Head Jam Low Batt Off 4 blinks Off 1 set of 13 beeps 2 sets of 2 beeps 2 sets of 3 beeps 2 sets of 4 beeps 5 sets of 2 beeps Off Off On Off 5 blinks Off 2 blinks Off On 5 blinks Off 2 blinks Off Off 5 blinks 3 sets of 2 beeps 3 blinks Off 3 blinks 3 sets of 4 beeps 4 sets of 2 beeps 12 sets of 12 beeps Off Off 4 blinks 3 blinks 4 blinks Off Off Off Off Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Meaning 24 V over voltage fault (internal power supply failure) Configuration error printhead over temperature Paper Out Head Jam Paper feed current fault

(Possible paper jam or feed motor failure) printhead over current (printhead failure) Home switch failure printhead short (printhead failure) Operating System software failure Note: The most common errors are Paper Out, Low Battery, and Head Jam. Status indicators on the front panel alert you to these errors. For a description see Understanding the Status Indicators on page 3 Power-On-Self-Test (POST) Errors When you reset the printer, a POST runs to determine why the printer might be failing. Audible error codes, along with indicator light status, are produced during POST if an error occurs. See on POST Error Codes on page 104. To perform a POST 1 Open the printer case. 2 Insert the printer diagnostic cable into the phone jack on the printer and then connect the 9-pin D-Sub plug to your PC. The cable is used during POST to configure the printer, access printer diagnostics, update software, and install new fonts. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 103 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting 3 Press the Reset button to start the POST. When the POST starts, green Power LED will come on followed by a single beep indicating that the printer is active. Note: After the test is completed, all LEDs turn off and the printhead moves to the home position. Only runtime errors or fatal errors are reported until the next time the printer is reset and POST is performed. The printer emits beeps and flashes the LEDs to indicate the cause of any POST errors. POST error codes are described in the following table. POST Error Codes Long Beep 0 0 0 Short Beep 1 0 0 Paper Out Off Off Off Head Jam Off Off Off Low Batt Off Off Off Power Meaning On Off On 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 2 4 4 0 5 5 0 Off Off Off Off On On On On On On Off Off Off Off On On Off On Off On Off On Off On On On On On On On On On Operational No Power Control program Initial Program Load (IPL) successful Invalid CRC on boot block Invalid CRC on control program or program not found Upper 192K RAM failure Upper 64K RAM failure Diagnostic mode command check Diagnostic flash memory check failed or is not initialized Diagnostic memory write failure Control program IPL Fatal Errors There are two types of fatal errors, flash write errors and EEPROM configuration block errors. These errors are extremely rare, but measures are built into the printer diagnostics to track possible occurrences. Flash Write Errors Errors related to writing or erasing flash are critical errors. These errors cause the printer to stop all processing and produce an LED code and a sequence of beeps. The LED code indicates the address of the segment where the error occurred in octal notation. 104 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting The octal digit changes every four beeps until four octal digits are output. Only four octal digits are output since blocks are 256 bytes in size and flash can be addressed with a total of 0x7ff blocks. The segment address output is the runtime address of the flash block and not the offset of the block within flash. To obtain the block offset within the flash Subtract 0x800 from the address output to determine the block offset. The printer suspends after the processing the error code. When the printer resumes, an error again and the printer suspends again. Reset the printer to correct the error. If a reset does not correct the error, have the printer checked by a qualified service technician. Note: Flash write errors may be unrecoverable. EEPROM Configuration Block Errors Errors related to an invalid configuration block (diagnostic block) produce 13 beeps, and then the printer suspends. It continues to produce this symptom until the configuration block error is corrected. Configuration block errors may be caused by a flash write error or an incorrect printer configuration. Reset the printer to correct the error. If a reset does not correct the error, have the printer checked by a qualified service technician. Self-Test Function Descriptions The self-test performs the following functions. Boot Block Program Verification A CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is performed on the boot block program. The calculated CRC is compared to the CRC embedded in the program module. Control Program Verification A CRC is performed on the control program, which is loaded into writable flash program memory. The calculated CRC is compared to the CRC embedded in the program module. The results of this test are printed on the self-test report. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 105 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Font Module Verification A CRC is performed on the font modules, which are loaded into writable flash font memory. The calculated CRC is compared to the CRC embedded in the program module. Results are printed on the self-test report. A2D Check Current reading of the A2D sources are performed, and the results are printed on the self-test report. Nonvolatile Diagnostic Memory Verification A CRC is performed on the area of the nonvolatile diagnostic memory that has a CRC over it. Results are printed on the self-test report. Nonvolatile Diagnostic Memory Update The nonvolatile diagnostic memory is updated from the nonvolatile diagnostic memory data shadowed in memory. Detailed Printer Self-Test Perform a self-test to verify printer functions, and provide reporting of printer diagnostics. The self-test performs a series of internal diagnostics and prints the results. When the self-test begins, the beeper sounds for half a second and all LEDs turn on for half a second. Initiating Self-Test While the printer is idle or in Suspend mode, press the Line Feed and Set Page buttons simultaneously to initiate a self-test. Terminating Self-Test Press the Line Feed and Set Page buttons simultaneously to manually terminate a self-test. Self-Test Report Note: This method is recommended to determine printer functionality. 106 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting A self-test is equivalent to a warm start. Both are performed when you simultaneously press Form Feed and Set Page buttons on the control panel for a few seconds. Release the buttons when the printer beeps and all indicators are lit. If you press the buttons for too long, the self-test will not happen and the printer will form-feed one page. As the self-test progresses, the indicator lights change. Internal tests are performed and the two page report is printed. This report provides helpful information in diagnosing and troubleshooting printer problems. When you perform a self-test, the following actions occur:

All LEDs are turned on to verify the lights work A 600 ms beep is emitted to verify the beeper works LEDs flash individually to show progress during internal tests Current voltage and ambient temperature are obtained Validity of diagnostic block program is checked Validity of boot block program is checked Validity of control program is checked Validity of loaded fonts is checked LEDs turn off Self-test report is printed Printer capability is diagnosed by printing the report. Device errors are displayed on the LEDs and emitted by the beeper. The printer then does a warm reset (soft reboot) when an error is encountered or when the self-

test report prints. Understanding the Self-Test Report The self-test report is divided into sections. Refer to page 110 and page 111 for a sample printout. All other values are informational only. Remember that these values are cleared after the self-test. The printer model number is given on line 1 (first line). This identifies the printer type used, in this case the 6822. The 8-digit serial number of the printer is listed on line 4 under the Serial# heading on line 3. The serial number is also on the inside of the printer. In portable printers, raise the printer mechanism to look for the number on the inside back wall. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 107 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Battery Voltage, (line 13) Indicates the input voltage sampled at the beginning of the self-test. The input range must be between 7.5 and 15 V. The input voltage must be greater than 10.5 V to charge the internal battery. At 7.5 V or less, the Low Batt LED comes on and the printer enters Sleep mode. At 10.5 V or less, the Low Batt comes on but the printer still prints. Auto Feed (line 16) Auto feed is a configurable item. Carriage Return (CR) means no auto linefeed. This is the most common setting for applications using NPCP CR+LF means a line feed will be added to each CR. This setting can produce double-spacing of reports. See Setting the Autofeed on page 29 Interface Mode (line 17) Interface mode lists the interface protocol for the printer. The typical setting is NPCP. Others include DTR with no, odd, or even parity, and IrDA. See Protocol Selection Mode on page 29 Bit Rate (line 18) Bit rate is commonly set to 19200 (19.2K) or 9600 bps. See Selecting the Bit Rate on page 29 A2D History (lines 21 through 25) Shows the recorded history for voltage measurements and temperature measurements. Head Jam History (lines 26 through 29) Provides information on head jams. If the printer is having frequent head jams, these lines can assist in determining the problem. Head Jam History Information Heading Home Command Direction Speed Description Err indicates the home position LED sensor has failed. Indicates which printer command was executed when the head jammed. Indicates which way the head was moving, left is toward the home position and right is away from the home position. Home position is at the extreme left, toward the green thumb wheel. Indicates the acceleration speed of the printhead when the jam occurred. 108 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Head Jam History Information (continued) Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Heading Step Temp Position Description The acceleration step at the jam. 0 means no steps were taken, 15 means all steps were taken. 1-14 indicates the printer jammed during acceleration or deceleration. The ambient temperature at the last head jam. The temperature is listed in Celsius. Position of carriage at the time of the jam in 1/720 in = 12 *

step position. Divide the number by 12 to get the step position. There are 512 steps across the page. If it is jammed at position 0, check the printer mechanism alignment. If it is jamming in the middle, it is more likely a dirty ribbon or obstruction in the printheads path. Head Dot Pattern (line 37) Is used to verify the individual dot wires. There should be nine dots. If some dots are missing, it could be a printhead failure or a circuit board failure. Error Log information appears on lines 38-43. This information is cleared after every self-test. Error Log Information Heading PE HJ 12Vu 12Vo 24Vu 24Vo Home Temp OverC HeadS Fault Description Number of paper jams while feeding paper Number of head jams while printhead is moving Number of 12 V under-voltage Number of 12 V over-voltage Number of 24 V under-voltage (head/motor voltage) Number of 24 V over-voltage Number of home detect errors (typically caused by paper scraps or circuit failures) Unused Number of head over-current errors (typically caused by a bad printhead) Number of head driver short errors (typically caused by circuit failures) Number of paper feed motor over current errors (excess current in paper feed motor could indicate circuit failure) 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 109 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Error Log Information (continued) Heading ADErr EEErr Dlink Llink Description Number of A2D conversion failures Number of EEPROM write failures to diagnostic block Number of software memory errors (corruption in internal memory) Number of software memory errors Sample First Page of the Self-Test Note: Lines 15-18 are factory default printer settings. Take note of these lines when reading the self-test report.

------------------------------------------- 1NP6822 2 Copyright 1997, 1998, Intermec Technologies Corporation. All Rights Reserved. 3Serial# MFG Date Hardware Check Repairs Svc Date 412345678 yy/mm/dd ddd-ddd-ddd/dddd (TOP) GO/NG 00 yy/mm/dd 5 ddd-ddd-ddd/dddd (MLB) 6 ddd-ddd-ddd/dddd (PS) 7 ddd-ddd-ddd/dddd (IOB) 8Revisions:..........0000000000303100 9Bootblock: NPBB6822.MOD - Version XX.XX XXXX XXXX GO/NG 10Control Program: npfl6822.mod - Version XX.XX XXXX XXXX GO/NG 11Font Module: nftxxxxx.mod - Version XX.XX XXXX XXXX GO/NG 12Font Module: nftxxxxx.mod - Version XX.XX XXXX XXXX GO/NG 13Battery Voltage: 012.34 Low...../....High 14Total Pages: 123456 15Zero Font Style: O 16Auto Feed: CR 17Interface mode: NPCP 18Bit Rate: 19200 19Cold Starts: 00024 20Warm Starts: 00050 21A2D History 22 Curr Low High Min Max Error Page Count 2324v: 024.00 023.21 023.91 023.21 024.51 027.21 00401 00021 2412v: 012.55 010.91 013.51 010.90 014.50 8.71 00401 00021 25Temp: 023 -020 055 -021 060 000 00401 00021 26Head Jam History 27Total Head Jams: 00186 28Home Command Direction Speed Step Temp Position Page 29 Print Left Const 010 -010 01440 12345 30NPCP History 31Disc Addr Parity IFTS Seq CRC Frame Bind IPLDU 3212345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 33IRDA History 34 FramesOk BroadCasts CRC/TMO DISCARD 35rx 1234567890 1234567890 0123456789 0000000000 36tx 1234567890 1234567890 0123456789 0000000000 37HEAD DOT PATTERN 38 Error Log 39PE HJ 12Vu 12Vo 24Vu 24Vo Home Temp OverC HeadS Fault ADErr EEErr 40Dlink Llink 4112345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 4212345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 4312345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 110 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Sample Second Page of the Self-Test Page 2 of the self-test contains the print pattern used to diagnose printer mechanical behavior. The pattern continuously prints the ASCII characters between 33 and 126 decimal inclusive for the entire page, or until you cancel the print by pressing a button on the printer. An example of that rotating pattern is shown below.

0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~!#$%

0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~!#$%

0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~!#$%

0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL Self-Test Failure For help, see Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Tips on page 111. Check the power source (internal battery, charge cable, or ac adaptor) for a possible power failure. Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Tips The following table lists actual printing problems, possible causes, and actions you should take to correct a problem. Possible Printer Problems Symptom Printer does not communicate with the mobile computer. Bluetooth unable to connect. Make sure you are in range

(10 cm to 10 m) Double-spacing on application reports but single-

spacing on self-test. Zero prints incorrectly (with or without slash). Solution Test or Cause Incorrect protocol selection. Check lines 17 and 18 on the self-test report for correct bit rate and protocol selection. Change protocol settings through configuration process. Make sure the Bluetooth shutdown timer has not expired Make sure your device is configured to be discoverable and/or connectable. For help, see Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications on page 133. Check line 16 on the self-test report. CR+LF indicates an incorrect configuration for NPCP. Check line 15 on the selftest report for the Zero Font Style setting. For help, see Cleaning the Mask Spring on page 22. If incorrect, adjust the zero print option, see Cleaning the Mask Spring on page 22 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 111 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Possible Printer Problems (continued) Symptom Test or Cause Check line 11 or 12 on the Does not print extended character set missing font. selftest report to see if the NFT0000.MOD file is listed after Font Module. Printer mechanism does not have adequate power for printing. The 12 V may be under or over voltage fault.

(Note: Error lights do not flash if voltage is too high) If power supply, adjust supply voltage to 7.5 to 15 V. Printer emits 1 or 2 beeps or blinking green light is the only indicator. If battery, recharge or replace

(see Installing the Internal Battery on page 10 Printer emits 2 sets of 3 beeps Printer out of paper Printer works but some or all LEDs do not work. Printer does not print Gray ribbon cable connecting control panel board to pivot frame assembly is loose. No voltage No data input Test: Pull paper toward roller. Cause: If paper is resistant:

Paper wrinkled, creased, moist, or perforations missing Adjust supply voltage to 7.5-15 V Tighten computer connections. Paper tray too full White ribbon cables obstructing paper Ensure fewer than 200 3-ply sheets in the deep paper tray and fewer than 50 3-ply sheets in the shallow paper tray. Solution Use the 6820 Printer Tool Kit to reload the font file or send the printer in for hardware repair. Check battery or power supply. Check the printers internal battery, if installed. Check the vehicle charge cable (see 6822 Printer Installation Instructions P/N 931-052-001). Reload paper into printer mechanism. For help, see Loading the Paper Tray on page 13. Call Customer Support

(800-755-5505) or send printer for hardware repair. Voltage too high or low. Check line 13 on the selftest report, under the Battery Voltage heading No paper feed (paper jam or head jam) Torn paper perforation Head Jams due to carriage alignment. Check line 29 on self-test report, under Position heading, for value. Remove torn paper, load and center new paper, readjust pinfeed holders. 112 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Possible Printer Problems (continued) Symptom Test or Cause Straighten the white ribbon Replace the paper. cables. No paper feed (paper jam or head jam) Move the printhead manually from side to side. Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Solution If 0, realign mechanism in pivot tray. See Aligning the Printer Mechanism on page 98 Remove ribbon cartridge, move printhead. If smooth, ribbon is jammed. Remove ribbon cartridge, move printhead. If still resistant, mask spring is bent or damaged. Cause: printhead gap adjuster too tight. Cause: Paper scraps found in printer mechanism or around platen. Printer mechanism unlatched

(unlocked). (portable, fixed mount printers) Remove ribbon cartridge and turn knob. If ribbon resists, replace ribbon cartridge (see Installing the Ribbon Cartridge on page 11 Replace the mask spring see Cleaning the Mask Spring on page 22 Set the head gap adjuster to the fifth notch away from the paper see Adjusting the Printhead Gap on page 12 If ribbon cartridge bumps against inside of printer, check white ribbon cable, home position sensor, and four screws. Remove any paper scraps, do a cleaning. Latch (lock) the printer mechanism into place. Perform a self-test. Note: In paper jams or head jams, press the Set Page button to clear the printer before printing can resume. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 113 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Compatibility Issues Use the following information to determine some compatibility issues that come up relative to the 6822:I Compatibility Issues and Conclusions Issue Does a 6820 ribbon work on the 6822?

Do 6820 applications work on the 6822?

Conclusion Yes. Yes. Applications that work on the 6820 also work on the 6822. Yes. The downloadable character set feature is the same for both the 6820 and 6822. Does the 6822 work with an application that downloads some custom characters to the printer?

Can 6820 printers be replaced with 6822s? Yes. 6822s can be installed on existing 6820 mounting brackets. Understanding Diagnostic Information Diagnostic information is stored in flash to support the hardware configuration, both at time of manufacture and in the field. This includes recording the initial configuration changes to hardware and software, and various environmental statistics helpful in determining why failures are occurring in the field. The flash is provided for storage of critical data that must remain in the unit after power to the unit is lost. The data in the flash is used for diagnostic information for a catastrophic failure, or over the phone with a customer. Diagnostic information is updated and maintained by the printer. All diagnostic information is shadowed in RAM. At the end of every 50 forms, the flash information is updated from the RAM. The printer also updates the diagnostic information for nonrecoverable error, printer resets, printer self-test, and remote polling of diagnostic information. Fields are stored with ID first, then length, then data. The details of the data and the length of the entire field, including ID and Length bytes, are shown in the Diagnostic Information table on page 115. The amount of flash memory reserved for nonvolatile diagnostic memory is 16 K bytes. Printer self-test prints most of the information contained in the diagnostic memory for remote and end-user diagnostic access. 114 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Diagnostic Information Field Id 01 Length Description 4 3 Serial Number Date of Manufacture, yy/mm/dd Hardware Configuration ddd-ddd-ddd/ddd (top level P/N) ddd-ddd-ddd/ddd (control board) ddd-ddd-ddd/ddd (power supply) ddd-ddd-ddd/ddd (I/O board) CRC of preceding fields Hardware Revisions: ECNs. applied. 64 ECNs can record separately by number 1-64. Service Repairs: a two-digit field indicating number of times serviced Date of last repair, yy/mm/dd Cold starts since MFG or last repair Warm starts since last cold start Pages printed over life Last high and low voltage extremes on 24 V input over last 50 reports. Extremes stored as 8-bit A2D conversions Voltage extreme history stores min/max 24 V A2D conversions over printer life 24 V voltage error. Voltages greater than 10%

considered errors. A2D error count Form number at last voltage error 24 V error count Last high and low voltage extremes on 12 V input over last 50 reports. Extremes stored as 8-bit A2D conversions Voltage extreme stores min/max 12 V A2D conversions over printer life 12 V error. Voltages less than 10.5 V and greater than 14.5 V are considered errors. A2D value is recorded Page number at last 12 V error 12 V error count Temperature, maximum and minimum over last 50 reports. Set A2D value 7 7 7 7 2 8 1 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 08 09 10 20 30 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Total Length Stored as 7 digit BCD set at MFG 39 bytes 6 digit BCD set at MFG 52 digit BCD set at MFG 2 byte binary set at MFG 8 byte bit field 11 bytes 2 BCD digits 6 BCD digits binary digits binary digits binary digits 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 8 bytes 11 bytes 11 bytes 11 bytes 115 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Diagnostic Information (continued) Field Id Length Description 2 Temperature, min/max over printer life. Set A2D value Temperature error. Last A2D conversion below -10 or above 60C recorded Page number at last temperature error Total number of temperature errors Total number of head jams Command 0 = Stop 2 = Print 4 = Print/LF 6 = Seek 8 = Slow Seek 10 = Change Speed 12 = Feed 14 = Wait Speed 00 = Init 01 = Low 10 = High Direction 1 = Left 0 = Right Home Switch 0 = No Error 1 = High Error Acceleration or deceleration stop motor value when jam occurred Ambient temperature when had jam occurred. Set A2D value Form number where head jam occurred Carriage position where head jam occurred IrDA rxFramesOK total frames received OK Total Length 11 bytes Stored as 2 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes binary bits 0-3 bits 4-5 bit 6 bit 7 1 byte binary 1 byte 2 bytes binary 2 bytes binary in 1/720 in 4 bytes 46 bytes 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 4 40 60 116 Diagnostic Information (continued) Field Id Length Description 4 Stored as 4 bytes Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Total Length 74 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes IrDA rxFrameCrcErr total frames received with CRC error IrDA rxTotalBytes total bytes received OK 4 bytes IrDA rxFramesDiscardBuf total frames 4 bytes discarded due to no buffer space IrDA rxBroadcastFrames total broadcast frames received OK IrDA rxFramesDiscardHwErr total received frames discarded due to hardware error IrDA txFramesOK total frames transmitted OK IrDA txTotalBytes total bytes transmitted OK IrDA txBroadcastFrames total broadcast frames transmitted OK IrDA txFramesNotTxTimeout total frames not transmitted due to time out IrDA txFramesNotTxHwErr total frames not transmitted due to a hardware error Paper out count Head jam count 12 V low count 12 V high count 24 V low count 24 V high count Home switch error count Unused Over current error count Head short error count Paper fault error count A2D conv. error count EEPROM write error count Double link error count Lost link error count 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 70 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 117 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Diagnostic Information (continued) Field Id Length Description 2 2 Out of buffers error count Unused Total Length Stored as 2 bytes 20 * 2 bytes 118 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Communications Pin-Out Configurations Chapter 6 Troubleshooting This section shows common cable configurations between a mobile computer or a dock and the printer. Mobile Computer Signal Name Pin #

Pin #

Chassis Ground Charge Input SG (Signal Ground) DSR (Data Set Ready) DTR (Data Terminal Ready) CTS (Clear To Send) RTS (Ready To Send) RXD (Receive Data) TXD (Transmit Data) Dock_A/B_SW shell 8 9 7 2 6 3 5 4 NC shield 1 9 7 6 20 5 4 3 2 12 Wall Mount Printer or Remote Mount Terminal Holder Signal Name NC (No Connection) HHC_CHARGE GND DTR NC RTS CTS TXD RXD Term A/B 8 1 15 9 13 1 25 14 15-Pin DSUB Male 15-Pin to 25-Pin Cable (P/N 216-605-1XX) 15-Pin to 25-Pin Cable (P/N 216-605-1XX) 25-Pin DSUB Male 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 119 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting PC Wall Mount Printer Signal Name Pin #

Pin #

Signal Name DTR (Data Terminal Ready)*

RC (Receive Carrier) TC (Transmit Carrier) DCD (Data Carrier Detect) SG (Signal Ground) DSR (Data Set Ready)*

CTS (Clear to Send) RTS (Ready to Send) RXD (Receive Data) TXD (Transmit Data) 20 17 15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

* Signals are not available on the 6100 Dock 20 17 15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 NC (No Connection) NC NC NC GND DTR RTS CTS TXD RXD 1 13 14 25 13 1 25 14 25-Pin DSUB Female 25-Pin to 25-Pin Cable (P/N 216-771-XXX) 25-Pin to 25-Pin Cable (P/N 216-771-XXX) 25-Pin DSUB Male 120 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting PC Printer Signal Name Pin #

Pin #

Signal Name TXD (Transmit Data) RXD (Receive Data) RTS (Ready to Send) CTS (Clear to Send) DSR (Data Set Ready) SG (Signal Ground) Chassis Ground 3 2 7 8 6 5 4 5 3 6 7 9 RCT TXD CTS RTS DTR (Data Terminal Ready) GND shield shell shell 8 Chassis Ground Terminal Charge out to computer 1 5 6 9 1 8 9 15 9-Pin DSUB Female 9-Pin to 15-Pin Cable (P/N 226-016-XXX) 15-Pin DSUB Female 9-Pin to 15-Pin Cable (P/N 226-016-XXX) 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 121 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Dock Printer w/6210 Terminal Holder Signal Name Pin #

Pin #

Signal Name TXD (Transmit Data) DTR (Data Terminal Ready) RTS (Ready to Send) RXD (Receive Data) CTS (Clear to Send) DSR (Data Set Ready)*

SG (Signal Ground) 2 20 4 3 5 6 7 4 2 3 5 6 7 9 RXD NC (No Connection) CTS TXD RTS DTR GND open shield shell

* Signal is not available on the 6100 Dock 13 1 25 14 8 1 15 9 25-Pin DSUB Male 25-Pin to 15-Pin Cable (P/N 226-162-XXX) 25-Pin to 15-Pin Cable (P/N 226-162-XXX) 15-Pin DSUB Female 122 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting PC Printer Pin #

Pin #

7 5 3 2 8 6 5 3 2 1 5 1 9 6 1 6 9-Pin DSUB Male Data Communications Cable (P/N 226-270-XXX) RJ-11 Jack Data Communications Cable (P/N 226-270-XXX) The printer has a 25-pin connector with the following pinout designations and signal mnemonics:

Printer Communications Connector 15-Pin DSub 1 2 3 4 5 6 25Pin DSub Signal Name NC 20 4 2 3 5 NC DSR (Data Set Ready) CTS (Clear To Send) RXD (Receive Data) TXD (Transmit Data) RTS (Ready To Send) Type RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 I/O IN IN IN OUT OUT Description NC (No Connection) Printers DSR Wake up Printers RxD Printers TxD Printers RTS 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 123 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Printer Communications Connector (continued) 15-Pin DSub 7 25Pin DSub Signal Name 6 Type RS-232 DTR (Data Terminal Ready) HHC_CHARGE GND 8 9 9 7 I/O OUT OUT Description Printers DTR 11-13 V, 2 A maximum SG (Signal Ground) POWER POWER 124 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual A Specifications This appendix provides physical specifications for the 6822 printer models as well as specifications for the media used with the printers. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 125 Appendix A Specifications Specifications Print Speed 230 cps Note: Various print fonts do affect the print speed. Weight Fixed Mount Printers6.55 kg (14.41 lbs) Portable Printers w/ 4000 or 61XX terminal holder5.80 kg (12.75 lbs) w/ 62XX, 600 series, 700 series, or CK60 holder5.67 kg (12.25 lbs) Mounting plate1.93 kg (4.25 lbs) Flat paper tray2.45 kg (5.40 lbs) Compact paper tray2.05 kg (4.50 lbs) Temperature DC Operating -20C to 60C (-4F to 140F) AC Operating -20C to 45C (-4F to 113F) Storage -30C to 70C (-22F to 158F) Humidity Operating10 to 85% noncondensing Storage5 to 95% noncondensing Altitude Operating100 to 5000 m Storage15,000 m Electrical Voltage13.8 VDC (nominal) Current10 mA (idle, sleep mode not charging batteries);

3.5 A (average while printing);

450 mA (charging internal battery);

Up to 1.5 A (charging computer battery) Vibration 12 g RMS for 4 hours 126 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix A Specifications ESD 15 kV noncontact and 8 kV contact Battery Shelf Life 1 year at 25C (77 F) 2.3 Ah 12 V sealed lead-acid) Note: The battery goes dead within two weeks when connected to the printer and with no external charge source. Note: A printer and a computer, using the supplied serial cable, can operate up to 9 m (30 ft) apart. Printer Dimensions Listed below are the dimensions of the fixed mount and portable printers. Fixed Mount Printer The base of the fixed mount printer is 32.5 cm (12.75 in) wide by 35.5 cm (14.0 in) front to back. The upper portion varies according to the configurations shown in the following table. Fixed Mount Printer Dimensions Configuration

(with deep paper tray) with 61XX Holder Side Mount with 4000 Series, 62XX, 600 Series, 700 Series, or CK60 Holder Side Mount with 61XX Holder Top Mount with 4000 Series, 62XX, 600 Series, 700 Series, or CK60 Holder Top Mount Width 51.4 cm

(20.25 in) 47.0 cm

(18.5 in) 42.5 cm

(16.75 in) 38.1 cm

(15.0 in) Length 36.8 cm

(14.5 in) 36.8 cm

(14.5 in) 42.6 cm

(16.75 in) 42.6 cm

(16.75 in) Depth 19.1 cm

(7.5 in) 20.3 cm

(8.0 in) 19.1 cm

(7.5 in) 20.3 cm

(8.0 in) 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 127 Appendix A Specifications Portable Printer The portable printer may come with a handle, an AC foot, or with a terminal holder top mount. Portable Printer Dimensions Width Configuration 41.9 cm with handle, 61XX Holder Top Mount, and Deep Paper Tray

(16.5 in) with handle, 61XX Holder Top Mount, Shallow Paper Tray 42.5 cm

(16.8 in) 38.1 cm

(15.0 in) 41.9 cm

(16.5 in) with handle, 4000 Series, 62XX, 600 Series, 700 Series, or CK60 Holder Top Mount, and Deep Paper Tray with handle, 4000 Series, 62XX, 600 Series, or 700 Series, or CK60 Holder Top Mount or Fill Plate, and Shallow Paper Tray Length 42.6 cm

(16.8 in) 42.6 cm

(16.8 in) 42.6 cm

(16.8 in) 38.1 cm

(15.0 in) Depth 20.3 cm

(8.0 in) 19.1 cm

(7.5 in) 20.3 cm

(8.0 in) 13.0 cm

(5.1 in) Note: The AC foot adds 6.35 cm (2.5 in) to the length of the printer. Media Specifications Using paper that matches the following specifications ensures optimum 6822 performance. Variation from these specifications, use of aged paper, or use of paper exposed to elements such as dirt or humidity may cause printing problems. The printer works with 1-3 ply carbonless paper that is single-edge glued and designed for sprocket feed. Standard paper size is 8.5 x 11 in or 241 x 305 mm international (8.5 x 12 in). Use 3-ply forms up to a maximum of 0.23 mm (0.009 in) thick. A soft, flexible, rubber type cement applied to one perforation strip only is preferred. The paper should wrap around a 1 1/4 in diameter roll without curl or wrinkle. 128 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Material Breakdown The following tables show the material broken down per ply:

14# CBF (Carbonless Back and Front) Appendix A Specifications Basis Weight Caliper Moisture Smoothness (RS) Smoothness (CB) Brightness (Wht) Colors available: White, Canary, Pink, Goldenrod, Blue, Green Under 13.3 lb 2.6 4.0 110 220 86 Over 14.7 lb 3.2 6.0 230 320 90 Target 14 lb 2.9 5.0 165 270 88 15# CF (Carbonless Front) Basis Weight Caliper Moisture Smoothness (RS) Smoothness (CB) Brightness (Wht) Colors available: White, Canary, Pink, Goldenrod, Blue, Green Under 14.43 lb 2.5 4.0 100 100 84 Over 15.8 lb 3.2 6.0 180 180 86 Target 15 lb 3.0 5.0 140 140 85 16# CB (Carbonless Back) Basis Weight Caliper Moisture Smoothness (RS) Smoothness (CB) Brightness (Wht) Opacity (Wht) Colors available: White, Canary, Pink, Goldenrod, Blue, Green Under 15.2 lb 2.8 4.2 120 220 84 78.5 Over 16.8 lb 3.8 6.7 270 320 88 82 Target 16 lb 3.3 5.7 180 270 86 81 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 129 Appendix A Specifications 20# OCR Laser Bond Basis Weight Caliper Moisture Smoothness Brightness (Wht) Opacity (Wht) Target 20 lb 4.0 3.8 140 94 85 Under 15.2 lb 3.8 4.7 100 82 84 Over 16.8 lb 4.2 5.0 170 N/A N/A Caliper Breakdown The following table shows the caliper of forms broken down by ply:

Caliper Breakdown 1-Ply (20 lb) 2-Ply (15 lb and 16 lb) 3-Ply (14 lb, 15 lb, and 16 lb) Target 4.0 6.3 9.2 Maximum 4.2 7.0 10.2 130 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Understanding the Fanfold Paper Page Layout Appendix A Specifications The following illustration shows the printable area of the lower section of a page of fanfold paper and the upper section of the next page. The Assured Print Area is the best area to use for printing. Page width Assured Print Area 8 inches Max. Assured Print Area 55 lines max

(at 1/16 line spacing)

(area 2) 0.75 inch

(or more) Paper End Detection Position Perforation

...Xyz Abcdef...

(area 1) 1 inch 1 inch

(area 1) Abcdef... ..Xyz

(area 2) 0.75 inch

(or more)

(area 3) 1.833 inches

(11 lines) Printable Area of Fanfold Page You should leave a 1 in margin at both the top and the bottom of the page. This provides for a margin of six lines at 1/6 in line spacing. Even though printing in Area 1 (before or after the perforation) may be possible, you should keep in mind that paper feed precision is reliable only within the Assured Print Area. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 131 Appendix A Specifications The top and bottom margins are represented by Area 1, as shown in the previous illustration. The top margin is defined as the distance between the top edge of the paper and the first row of printed characters. The bottom margin is defined as the distance between the last row of printed characters and the bottom edge of the paper. There is a possibility that printing can start within one line below the perforation and printing could continue beyond the Assured Print Area, however paper feed precision is only reliable with top and bottom margins of approximately one inch. Basically, you should consider there are only 55 lines available for reliable printing. The left and right margins are represented by Area 2. For reliable printing, use a margin of at least 0.75 in for the left and right margins. The Paper End Detection line indicates the point where the Paper Out sensor detects the bottom edge of the paper. Area 3 represents the distance between the Paper End Detection position and the bottom edge of the page. Once the last page of the fanfold paper stack is in the printer, and the printhead has advanced past this Paper End Detection line, printing is no longer reliable. When the bottom end of the last page has advanced through the printer, past the spring plate along the front of the platen, the paper should not reverse back through the printer, because the printer could jam and cause paper feed problems. 132 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual

 

 

Compliance Statement Insert Model Number: 6820 Intermec Technologies Corporation 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, WA 98203 USA Device Name: AC, DC Portable, Van, Wall Mount Printer The responsible party for the compliance of this device is:

CAUTION: See users guide instructions for handling, charging, and replacing batteries. Failure to follow those instructions can result in personal injury, fire, or battery explosion. This product conforms to the following approvals. The user(s) of this product are cautioned to use accessories and peripherals approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation. The use of accessories other than those recommended, or changes to this product that are not approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation, may void the compliance of this product and may result in the loss of the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC Digital Emissions Compliance designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are Reorient or relocate the radio of television receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the computer equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the radio or television receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for help. This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Canadian Digital Apparatus Compliance Radio Wave Exposure Information for Model 6820 Configurations with Bluetooth Radio Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. The Model 6820 Printer has been designed to comply with applicable safety requirements for exposure to radio waves. These requirements are based on scientific guidelines that include safety margins designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The Model 6820 Printer with the Bluetooth option has been evaluated using the FCC Maximum Permissible Exposure (MPE) exposure guidelines when used with the Intermec accessories supplied or designated for this product. Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines. Users should maintain 20 cm (approximately 8 inches) of clearance between themselves and the 6820 Printer when using the Bluetooth radio interface. 578-100-026 Revision E

*578-100-026E*

*578-100-026E*

Page 1 of 3 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

(According to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014) THE PRODUCT HEREWITH COMPLIES WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF :

THE LOW-VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 73/23/EEC. THE EMC DIRECTIVE 89/336/EEC. THE R&TTE DIRECTIVE 1999/05/EC. ITE/Residential, Commercial, and Light Industrial Product Options: ALL Date Issued: August 10, 2005 EN 55024 : 1998 (CISPR 24) Information Technology Equipment Immunity Characteristics European Representative:

Intermec International Incorporated Sovereign House, Vastern Road Reading, Berkshire RG1 8BT England Manufacturers Name:

Intermec Technologies Corporation 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, WA 98203 USA Declares that the product listed below:

Product Type:

Product Name: 6820 DC Portable, Van, Wall Mount Printers Model Number: 6820 Beginning Serial Number: All Conforms to the following product specifications:

Safety: IEC 60950-1 / EN 60950-1 EMC: EN 55022 : 1998 / CISPR Publication 22 : 1997, Class B Limits and Methods Radio: ETSI EN 300 328 I, the undersigned, hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above Directive(s) and Standard(s). Company Official: Michael Abel Signature:

European Contact: Luc Van Geel, Intermec International Incorporated, Sovereign House, Vastern Road, Reading, Berkshire, RG1 8BT England; Phone INT+44 118 987 9400; Fax INT+44 118 987 9401 Czech Republic Contact: Global AmeriTech Corporation, Rytirska 10, 110 00, Prague 1, Czech Republic;

Phone INT+420-224 210 493; Fax INT+420-224 211 729 Limits and Methods of Measurement EN 61000-4-2 : 1995 Electrostatic Discharge EN 61000-4-3 : 1995 Radiated RF Field EN 61000-4-4 : 1995 Electrical Fast Transients EN 61000-4-5 : 1995 Voltage Surge EN 61000-4-6 : 1996 Conducted RF Field EN 61000-4-11 : 1994 Voltage Dips, Short Interruptions, and Variations EN61000-3-2 : 1995 + A1 : 1998 + A2 : 1998 + A14 : 2000 Harmonic Current Emissions EN61000-3-3 : 1995 Voltage Fluctuation and Flicker Position: Vice President Date: August 10, 2005 Signed Copy on File 578-100-026 Revision E

*578-100-026E*

*578-100-026E*

Page 2 of 3 PROHLEN O DODROVN TECHNICKCH NAZEN

(V souladu se smrnic 22 ISO/IEC a EN 45014) STRNKA JEDNA Z JEDN STRNKY ZDE UVEDEN VROBEK SPLUJE POADAVKY:

SMRNICE 73/23/EEC PRO NZKONAPOV ZAZEN SMRNICE EMC 89/336/EEC SMRNICE R&TTE 1999/05/EC Varianty: Vechny Datum vydn: 10. Dstojn 2005 Vybaven informan technologie/rezidenn, komern a lehk prmyslov EN 55024: 1998 (CISPR 24) Vybaven informan technologie charakteristiky odolnosti Evropsk zstupce:

Intermec International Incorporated Sovereign House, Vastern Road Reading, Berkshire RG1 8BT England Jmno vrobce:

Intermec Technologies Corporation 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, WA 98203, USA prohlauje, e ne uveden vrobek:

Typ vrobku:

Nzev vrobku: Model 6820 Koprka slo vrobku: Model 6820 Poten sriov slo: Vechna Spluje nsledujc parametry vrobku:

Bezpenostn: IEC 60950-1 / EN 60950-1 EMC: EN 55022 : 1998 / CISPR vyhlka 22: 1997, Limity a metody tdy B Radio: ETSI EN 300 328 J, ne podepsan, tmto potvrzuji, e ve uveden vybaven spluje poadavky ve uvedench nazen a standard. Zstupce spolenosti: Michael Abel Podpis:

Evropsk kontakt: Intermec International Incorporated, Sovereign House, Vastern Road, Reading, Berkshire, RG1 8BT England;

Telefon: MEZIN. +44 118 987 9400; Fax MEZIN.+44 118 987 9401 Kontakt v esk republice: Global AmeriTech Corporation, Rytsk 10, 110 00, Praha 1, esk republika;

Telefon: MEZIN. +420-224 210 493; Fax MEZIN. +420-224 211 729 Limity a metody men EN 61000-4-2 : 1995 Elektrostatick vboj EN 61000-4-3 : 1995 Vyzaovan vysokofrekvenn pole EN 61000-4-4: 1995 Rychl pechodov elektrick jevy EN 61000-4-5: 1995 Napov rz EN 61000-4-6: 1996 Veden vysokofrekvenn pole EN 61000-4-8: 1995 Magnetick pole EN 61000-4-11: 1994 Krtkodob poklesy napt, krtk peruen a pomal zmny napt EN61000-3-2: 1995 + A1: 1998 + A1: 1998 + A1: 2000 Vyzaovan harmonick proudy EN61000-3-3: 1994 Kolsn napt a blikn Podepsan kopie v evidenci Datum: 10. Dstojn 2005 Pozice: viceprezident 578-100-026 Revision E

*578-100-026E*

*578-100-026E*

Page 3 of 3 User's Manual 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Intermec Technologies Corporation Corporate Headquarters 6001 36th Ave. W. Everett, WA 98203 U.S.A. www.intermec.com Technical Communications Department 550 Second Street SE Cedar Rapids, IA 52401 U.S.A. The information contained herein is proprietary and is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers to operate and service Intermec-manufactured equipment and is not to be released, reproduced, or used for any other purpose without written permission of Intermec. Information and specifications contained in this document are subject to change without prior notice and do not represent a commitment on the part of Intermec Technologies Corporation. E 1997-2005 by Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. The word Intermec, the Intermec logo, Norand, ArciTech, CrossBar, Data Collection Browser, dcBrowser, Duratherm, EasyADC, EasyCoder, EasyLAN, Enterprise Wireless LAN, EZBuilder, Fingerprint, i-gistics, INCA (under license), InterDriver, Intermec Printer Network Manager, IRL, JANUS, LabelShop, Mobile Framework, MobileLAN, Nor*Ware, Pen*Key, Precision Print, PrintSet, RoutePower, SmartSystems, TE 2000, Trakker Antares, and Virtual Wedge are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Intermec Technologies Corporation. Throughout this manual, trademarked names may be used. Rather than put a trademark ( or ) symbol in every occurrence of a trademarked name, we state that we are using the names only in an editorial fashion, and to the benefit of the trademark owner, with no intention of infringement. There are U.S. and foreign patents pending. Bluetooth is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (EAY@cryptsoft.com). ii 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Document Change Record This page records changes to this document. The document was originally released as Revision A. Revision Date E F G H J 04/2004 08/2004 12/2004 05/2005 10/2005 Description of Change Updated printer paper specifications in Chapter 1, Introduction. Merged technical reference information into user guide to create a user manual. Added information about Bluetooth configuration, 600 Series Computers, 700 Series Comput-

ers, and the 6820 Configuration Utility application for Windows 2000 and Windows XP operating systems. Updated information for the Bluetooth shutdown timer. Added Appendix C, Printer Fonts Test Print Jobs to provide sample test font print jobs. Includes Bluetooth information for the wall mount printer. Included CK60 Handheld Computer infomration. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual iii iv 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Contents Contents Before You Begin Safety Summary Do not repair or adjust alone First aid Resuscitation Energized equipment

. Warranty Information Web Support Telephone Support xiii xiii xiii xiii xiii xiii xiv xv xv xv xv xvi xvi Who Should Read this Manual?

Related Documents Safety Icons Global Services and Support 1 2 Introduction

. 1 About the Printers Battery Options Connectors Control Panel Hinges on Printer Cover Internal Power Module Paper Internal Battery Vehicle Battery Fixed Mount Printer Portable Printer Wall Mount Printer

. Fixed Mount or Portable Printer Wall Mount Printer Wall Mount Printers Fixed Mount Printers Portable Printers Material Breakdown Caliber Breakdown 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 6 6 7 7 8 9 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 Remote Connections Reset Button Printer Dimensions Specifications

. 11 Inside Sales

. 12 Operation

. 13 Check List

. 14 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual v Contents Installing Internal Battery

. 15 Installing the Ribbon Cartridge

. 16 Adjusting the Print Head Gap

. 17 Loading Paper Tray Fixed Mount and Portable Printers Wall Mount Printer

. Loading the Flat Paper Tray Loading the Compact Paper Tray Loading Paper into Printer Positioning the Paper Adjusting the Pinfeed Holders Setting the Paper

. Inserting Computer in Terminal Holder Inserting a 4000 Series or a 62XX Computer Inserting a 61XX, a 600 Series, a 700 Series, or a CK60 Computer

. 18 18 19 19 19 20 20 21 22 23 23 24 Maintenance

. 25 Operating Guidelines

. 26 General Cleaning

. 27 Cleaning the Outside

. 27 Cleaning the Inside Removing Old Ribbon Cartridge Cleaning the Mask Spring

. Changing the Printer Settings Protocol Selection Mode Configuration Mode

. Setting the Autofeed Selecting the Bit Rate Adjusting the Zero Print Option 28 29 30 32 32 32 32 33 33 Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility

. 35 Font Modules

. 36 Connecting to the Printer

. 37 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 3 4 vi Contents Instructions for Windows 95 or Windows 98 Installation Configuration File Support Configuration Utility Operation

. Starting the Program Main Menu Load Printer Configuration Modify Printer Configuration Save Printer Configuration Save Defaults to Printer Alpha Keyboard Instructions for Windows 2000 or Windows XP Installation Configuration Utility Operation

. Starting the Program Default Printer Settings Error Messages About the Configuration Utility Bluetooth Adapter 38 38 38 38 39 39 40 43 47 50 52 53 53 56 56 61 61 62 62 Control Code Definitions

. 63 5 Control Code Definitions Buffers Special Notations General Printer Control Functions

. I/O Buffer Print (image) Buffer

. Backspace Beeper Cancel Line Carriage Return Delete Form Feed Select Half-Speed Printing Cancel Half-Speed Printing Set Inactivity Time for Sleep Mode Line Feed Perform Master Reset Set Print Position (absolute) Set Print Position (relative) Select Top-Down Printing Select Bottom-Up Printing Select Unidirectional Printing Cancel Unidirectional Printing Select Unidirectional (one line) Printing 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 65 65 65 65 65 66 66 66 66 67 67 68 68 68 68 68 69 vii Contents Page Formatting Functions Character Style and Text Mode Functions Page Length Line Spacing Set Margins Set Skip Over Perforation Cancel Skip Over Perforation Select Condensed Mode (compressed) Cancel Condensed Mode (compressed) Select Double-Strike Mode Cancel Double-Strike Mode Select Double-Wide (expanded) Mode (one-line-only) Cancel Double-Wide (expanded) Print (one-line-only) Select Double-Wide (expanded) Mode Cancel Double-Wide (expanded) Mode Select Elite Pitch Select Emphasized Mode Cancel Emphasized Mode Define Intercharacter Space Select Italic Mode Cancel Italic Mode Master Select Select Pica Pitch Select Superscript Mode Select Subscript Mode Cancel Subscript/Superscript Mode Select Underline Mode Cancel Underline Mode Tabs and Tab Setting Functions

. Single Byte Character Sets Double-Byte Character Sets Multi-Byte Character Sets User Defined Characters Eight-Pin Graphics Modes Nine-Pin Graphics Modes Character Sets and User-Defined Functions Horizontal Tabs Vertical Tabs Graphics Functions Page Layout for Fanfold Paper Printable Area Paper End Detection

. 69 69 70 71 72 72 72 72 73 73 73 73 74 74 74 74 74 75 75 75 75 75 76 77 77 77 77 77 78 78 79 81 81 81 82 84 89 89 91 93 93 94 6 viii Bluetooth Adapter

. 95 About the Bluetooth Adapter Bluetooth Adapter Indicators

. 700 Series or CK60 Handheld Computer to 6820 Pass Through

. 700 Series or CK60 Handheld Computer to Bluetooth Module Communication

. Interface 96 97 97 97 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Contents Bluetooth Adapter Power Management Flow Radio Power On/Off Mechanism Security Persistent Storage System Behavior/Software Considerations Remote Configuration Bluetooth Performance

. 98 98 99 99 99 100 100 Diagnostics Capabilities Radio Self Test

. 101 101 Applications

. 102 System Qualification Operation Resilience Environmental Specifications

. Temperature Altitude Vibration Unpackaged Drop Terminal Inspection 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 104 Safety/Regulatory/Agency Requirements 7 Default Configuration

. 105 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

. 107 Checking the Power Source

. 108 Self-Test Failure

. 108 Printer Mechanism Alignment

. 109 Communications or Host Computer

. 110 Communications Pin-Out Configurations

. 111 Troubleshooting Verifying the Printer Components Power Source Verification Printer Verification Communications / Host Computer Verification

. Run-Time Errors Power-On Self-Test (POST) POST Errors Fatal Errors Error Handling 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 117 117 117 117 118 118 118 119 119 120 ix Contents Detailed Printer Self-Test Self-Test Function Descriptions Boot Block Program Verification Control Program Verification Font Module Verification A2D Check Nonvolatile Diagnostic Memory Verification Nonvolatile Diagnostic Memory Update

. Initiating Self-Test Terminating Self-Test Self-Test Report First Page of Self-Test Sample First Page of Self-Test Second Page of Self-Test Self-Test Failure Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Tips Compatibility Issues Diagnostic Information Nonvolatile Flash Storage Updating Diagnostic Information Accessing Diagnostic Information

. 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 122 122 122 122 123 124 125 125 126 128 128 128 128 129 A B x Bluetooth Configuration Commands

. 133 Notation

. 134 Command Operating Modes Command and Control Modes Query Mode Commands Set Local Bluetooth Device Name Set Class of Device/Service Field Set Service Name Connectable On/Off: ON or OFF Specify Page Scan Timing Enable Discoverable Specify Inquiry Scan Timing Set Encryption/Authentication: PIN CODE

. Read Module Version Read Local Device Address Set Shutdown Timing Clear Link Key Table Manage Security Modes 134 135 136 136 137 137 137 137 138 138 138 138 139 139 140 140 140 Web Links

. 140 Cross-Reference Tables

. 141 Control Codes and Escape Sequences

. 142 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Contents Single Character Control Code Definitions

. 149 Escape Sequence Quick Reference

. 150 Factory-Installed Printer Defaults

. 152 Printer Font Test Jobs

. 155 Big 5 Traditional Chinese Character Set

. 156 Simplified Chinese Character Set

. 156 IBM 437 Codepage Character Set

. 156 Japanese (Shift JIS) Character Set

. 157 Korean Character Set

. 157 International Character Set

. 157 Index Control Codes

. 160 General Index

. 163 Files Index

. 169 C I 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual xi Contents xii 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Before You Begin Before You Begin Safety Summary This section provides you with safety information, technical support information, and sources for additional product information. Your safety is extremely important. Read and follow all warnings and cautions in this document before handling and operating Intermec equipment. You can be seriously injured, and equipment and data can be damaged if you do not follow the safety warnings and cautions. Do not repair or adjust alone Do not repair or adjust energized equipment alone under any circumstances. Someone capable of providing first aid must always be present for your safety. First aid Always obtain first aid or medical attention immediately after an injury. Never neglect an injury, no matter how slight it seems. Resuscitation Begin resuscitation immediately if someone is injured and stops breathing. Any delay could result in death. To work on or near high voltage, you should be familiar with approved industrial first aid methods. Energized equipment Never work on energized equipment unless authorized by a responsible authority. Energized electrical equipment is dangerous. Electrical shock from energized equipment can cause death. If you must perform authorized emergency work on energized equipment, be sure that you comply strictly with approved safety regulations. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual xiii Before You Begin Safety Icons This section explains how to identify and understand dangers, warnings, cautions, and notes that are in this manual. You may also see icons that tell you when to follow ESD procedures and when to take special precautions for handling optical parts. A warning alerts you of an operating procedure, practice, condition, or statement that must be strictly observed to avoid death or serious injury to the persons working on the equipment. Avertissement: Un avertissement vous avertit dune procdure de fonctionnement, dune mthode, dun tat ou dun rapport qui doit tre strictement respect pour viter loccurrence de mort ou de blessures graves aux personnes manupulant lquipement. A caution alerts you to an operating procedure, practice, condition, or statement that must be strictly observed to prevent equipment damage or destruction, or corruption or loss of data. Attention: Une prcaution vous avertit dune procdure de fonctionnement, dune mthode, dun tat ou dun rapport qui doit tre strictement respect pour empcher lendommagement ou la destruction de lquipement, ou laltration ou la perte de donnes. Note: Notes either provide extra information about a topic or contain special instructions for handling a particular condition or set of circumstances. xiv 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Global Services and Support Before You Begin Warranty Information To understand the warranty for your Intermec product, visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com and click Service & Support. The Intermec Global Sales & Service page appears. From the Service & Support menu, move your pointer over Support, and then click Warranty. Disclaimer of warranties: The sample code included in this document is presented for reference only. The code does not necessarily represent complete, tested programs. The code is provided as is with all faults. All warranties are expressly disclaimed, including the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Web Support Visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com to download our current manuals in PDF format. To order printed versions of the Intermec manuals, contact your local Intermec representative or distributor. Visit the Intermec technical knowledge base (Knowledge Central) at intermec.custhelp.com to review technical information or to request technical support for your Intermec product. Telephone Support These services are available from Intermec Technologies Corporation. Service Factory Repair and On-site Repair Technical Support Service Contract Status Schedule Site Surveys or Installations Ordering Products Description Request a return authorization number for authorized service center repair, or request an on-site repair technician. Get technical support on your Intermec product. Inquire about an existing contract, renew a contract, or ask invoicing questions. Schedule a site survey, or request a product or system installation. Talk to sales administration, place an order, or check the status of your order. In the U.S.A. and Canada call 1-800-755-5505 and choose this option 1 2 3 4 5 Outside the U.S.A. and Canada, contact your local Intermec representative. To search for your local representative, from the Intermec web site, click Contact. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual xv Before You Begin Who Should Read this Manual?

Related Documents This manual provides you with information about the features of the 6820 Series 80-Column Printer, how to install, configure, operate, maintain, access the programming capability, and troubleshoot the printer. This table contains a list of related Intermec documents and their part numbers. Document Title 6820 Printer Terminal Holder Upgrade Instructions 6820 Printer Installation Instructions Part Number 962-018-011 962-018-016 The Intermec web site at www.intermec.com contains our documents that you can download in PDF format. To order printed versions of the Intermec manuals, contact your local Intermec representative or distributor. xvi 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 1 Introduction The 6820 Printer is used in the route accounting industry to produce high-quality customer invoices, receipts, load reports, transfers, and other documents. A unique sleep feature saves energy when the printer is not printing, eliminating the ON/OFF switch. Data input is normally pro-

vided by hand-held or mobile computers. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 1 Chapter 1 Introduction About the Printers S Fixed Mount Printer The fixed mount printer is mounted in motor vehicles or used in a settlement room. The terminal holder may be mounted on the printer or a remote dock can connect to the side of the printer. A deep paper tray, which holds up to 200 3-ply forms (about 2 or 5 cm thick) is un-

der the printer mechanism. S Portable Printer The portable printer has a handle so that you can carry it. An optional internal battery permits operation without the use of an external power source. The terminal holder is an integral part of this printer. A shallow paper tray, which holds up to 50 3-ply forms (about an inch or 2.5 centimeters thick) is under the printer mechanism. S Wall Mount Printer The wall mount printer hangs on a mounting plate secured to a wall. Computers communicate with this printer through the remote terminal holder, remote dock, or vehicle dock. With no internal paper tray, pa-

per is loaded from a separate paper tray (holds up to 2.5 or 6 cm of pa-

per) or a box. The printer mechanism is permanently attached. Fixed Mount Printer

(with 4000 Series/62XX Terminal Holder) Portable Printer

(with 61XX Terminal Holder) Wall Mount Printer

(with mounting plate and flat paper tray) 2 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Battery Options Chapter 1 Introduction The following battery options are available for the 6820 Printers. See In-

side Sales for ordering information and part numbers Internal Battery This battery (P/N: 317-075-001) allows the portable printer and some fixed mount printers to operate independently of other power sources. Vehicle Battery A power cable provides power to the printer through a cable permanently installed in the vehicle. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 3 Chapter 1 Introduction Connectors Each printer has a dc power jack that connects the printer to a power source, such as the vehicle battery or an external power supply. Each printer communicates with a mobile computer through the 25-pin data communications connector (wall mount printer) or mobile computer socket (in terminal holder, remote terminal holder, or vehicle dock). Fixed Mount Printer The dc power connector is on the bottom rear of the printer behind the printer terminal holder. The data communications socket is in either the printer terminal holder or a separate vehicle dock. Portable Printer The dc power connector is on the side of the printer beneath the printer terminal holder. The data communications socket is either in the printer terminal holder or a separate vehicle dock. Wall Mount Printer The dc power connector is on the bottom left of the printer. The data communications connector (25-pin socket) is on the bottom right. DC power connector Mobile computer socket Portable Printer Fixed Mount Printer Wall Mount Printer DC power connector Mobile computer socket DC power connector Data communications connector 4 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Control Panel Chapter 1 Introduction The printer control panel has four indicators in the top row and three but-

tons in the bottom row. Three indicators blink when there is a problem. The three buttons adjust and align the paper. Indicators PAPER OUT HEAD JAM LOW BATT Power The printer is out of paper. The print head is jammed and cannot move. The internal battery voltage, the vehicle battery voltage, or the power module voltage is too low. This stays lit while the printer is in active mode, or awake. When the printer is in sleep mode, or without power, this is dark. Buttons FORM FEED Press this button to feed the paper into the printer mechanism or when the printer should advance to the next form. If the printer ran out of paper, press this button to initiate automatic paper loading. Press this button to signal the beginning of the page to the printer after you have made the appropriate paper adjustments; or to set the linefeed counter to zero and move the print head to its home posi-

tion. In Paper Out conditions, press this button to clear the Paper Out error before printing can resume. Press this button to adjust the top of the paper to the next line. SET PAGE LINE FEED HEAD JAM LOW BATT Power PAPER OUT FORM FEED SET PAGE LINE FEED 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 5 Chapter 1 Introduction Hinges on Printer Cover All printer covers are hinged to the printer. These hinges have a tension screw (turn clockwise to tighten, turn counterclockwise to loosen), should you need to adjust them. Internal Power Module The alternating current (ac) power module, or the ac foot, is available for fixed mount and portable printers not for wall mount printers and allows for ac operation. The ac foot is installed at the factory and is not an add-on option. Insert the power cord connector into the ac foot connector in the printer;

then plug the cord into an ac outlet. This power cord can wrap around the ac foot when not in use. AC foot Plug on power cord

(goes to ac outlet) 6 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Paper Chapter 1 Introduction Use of paper that matches the following specifications ensures optimum 6820 performance. Variation from these specifications, use of aged paper, or use of paper exposed to elements such as dirt or humidity may cause printing problems. The printer works with 13 ply carbonless paper that is single-edge glued and designed for sprocket feed. Standard paper size is 8.5 x 11 or 8.5 x 12 (241 x 305 mm international). Use 3-ply forms up to a maximum of 0.009 inch (0.23 mm) thick. A soft, flexible, rubber type cement applied to one perforation strip only is preferred. The resultant lamination should wrap around a 1-1/4 inch di-

ameter roll without curl or wrinkle. Material Breakdown The following tables show the material broken down per ply:

14# CBF (Carbonless Back and Front) Under Basis Weight 13.3 Caliper 2.6 Moisture 4.0 Smoothness (RS) 110 Smoothness (CB) 220 Brightness (Wht) 86 Colors available: White, Canary, Pink, Goldenrod, Blue, Green Target 14#

2.9 5.0 165 270 88 15# CF (Carbonless Front) Under 14.43 Basis Weight 2.5 Caliper 4.0 Moisture 100 Smoothness (RS) 100 Smoothness (CF) Brightness (Wht) 84 Colors available: White, Canary, Pink, Goldenrod, Blue, Green Target 15#

3.0 5.0 140 140 85 Over 14.7 3.2 6.0 230 320 90 Over 15.8 3.2 6.0 180 180 86 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 7 Chapter 1 Introduction 16# CB (Carbonless Back) Basis Weight Caliper Moisture Smoothness (RS) Smoothness (CB) Brightness (Wht) Opacity (Wht) 20# OCR Laser Bond Basis Weight Caliper Moisture Smoothness Brightness (Wht) Opacity (Wht)

* Not Applicable Target 16#

3.3 5.7 180 270 86 81 Target 20#

4.0 3.8 140 94 85 Under 15.2 2.8 4.2 120 220 84 78.5 Under 15.2 3.8 4.7 100 82 84 Over 16.8 3.8 6.7 270 320 88 82 Over 16.8 4.2 5.0 170 N/A*

N/A Caliber Breakdown The following information show the caliber of forms broken down per ply:

1-Ply (20#) Targeted: 4.0 Maximum: 4.2 2-Ply (15# and 16#) Targeted: 6.3 Maximum: 7.0 3-Ply (14#, 15#, and 16#) Targeted: 9.2 Maximum: 10.2 8 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Printer Dimensions Below are the three most common printer configurations:

Chapter 1 Introduction Wall Mount Printers See the 6820 Printer Installation Instructions P/N: 962-018-016 for Wall Mount assembly dimensions. Below are the width, height, and depth di-

mensions for the Wall Mount Printer. Depth 4.5

(11.4 cm) Length 10.5

(26.7 cm) Width 13.25

(33.7 cm) Fixed Mount Printers The base of the Fixed Mount Printer is 12.75 (32.5 cm) wide by 14

(35.5 cm) front to back. The upper portion varies according to the config-

urations shown in the following table. Fixed Mount Printer Dimensions Configuration (with deep paper tray) with 61XX Holder Side Mount with 4000 Sesries, 62XX, 600 Series, 700 Series, or CK60 Holder Side Mount with 61XX Holder Top Mount with 4000 Series, 62XX, 600 Series, 700 Series, or CK60 Holder Top Mount Width Length Depth 20.25

(51.4 cm) 18.5

(47.0 cm) 16.75

(42.5 cm) 15.0

(38.1 cm) 14.5

(36.8 cm) 14.5

(36.8 cm) 16.75

(42.6 cm) 16.75

(42.6 cm) 7.5

(19.1 cm) 8.0

(20.3 cm) 7.5

(19.1 cm) 8.0

(20.3 cm) Portable Printers The Portable Printer may come with a handle, an ac foot, or with a termi-

nal holder top mount. Note the ac foot adds 2.5 (6.35 cm) to the width. Portable Printer Dimensions Configuration with handle, 61XX Holder Top Mount, and Deep Paper Tray with handle, 61XX Holder Top Mount, and Shallow Paper Tray with handle, 4000 Series, 62XX, 600 Series, 700 Series, or CK60 Holder Top Mount, and Deep Paper Tray with handle, 4000 Series, 62XX, 600 Series, or 700 Series, or CK60 Holder Top Mount or Fill Plate, and Shallow Paper Tray Remote Connections Width 16.5

(41.9 cm) 16.75

(42.5 cm) 15.0

(38.1 cm) 16.5

(41.9 cm) Length 16.75

(42.6 cm) 16.75

(42.6 cm) 16.75

(42.6 cm) 15.0

(38.1 cm) Depth 8.0

(20.3 cm) 7.5

(19.1 cm) 8.0

(20.3 cm) 5.13

(13.0 cm) A printer and a computer, using the supplied serial cable, can operate while up to 30 feet (9 meters) apart. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 9 Chapter 1 Introduction Reset Button Each printer has a reset button that cold-boots the printer. Fixed Mount or Portable Printer Both the fixed mount printer and the portable printer have the reset but-

ton on the left-hand side of the raised printer mechanism. See the follow-

ing illustration for the location of the reset button. Printer mechanism

(raised) Reset button Wall Mount Printer The wall mount printer has the reset button on the right hand side of the printer case. Front of printer Reset button 10 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Specifications Chapter 1 Introduction Note: Various print fonts do affect the print speed. Print Speed:

Weight:

Fixed Mount Printer:

Portable Printer:

with 4000 or 61XX Terminal Holder:

with 62XX. 600 Series, 700 Series, or CK60 Terminal Holder:

Wall Mount Printer:

Mounting plate:

Flat paper tray:

Compact paper tray:

230 cps 14.41 lbs (6.55 kg) 12.75 lbs (5.80 kg) 12.25 lbs (5.67 kg) 10.00 lbs (4.54 kg) 4.25 lbs (1.93 kg) 5.40 lbs (2.45 kg) 4.50 lbs (2.05 kg) Temperature:

DC Operating:

AC Operating:

Storage:

Humidity:

Operating:

Storage:

Altitude:

Operating:

Storage:

Electrical:

Voltage:

Current:

Vibration:

ESD:

Battery:

Shelf life:

4_ to 140_ F (20_to 60_ C) 4_ to 113_ F (20_to 45_ C) 22_ to 158_ F (30_ to 70_ C) 10 to 85% noncondensing 5 to 95% noncondensing 100 to 5000 meters 15,000 meters 13.8 volts dc (nominal) 1 mA (sleep mode no charge); 3.5 amps

(average while charging internal battery) 1.5 Gs RMS for six hours 15 kV noncontact and 8 kV contact 1 year @ 77_ F (25_ C) 2.3 amperes-hour 12 volt lead acid

(order batteries through Inside Sales) Note: Battery goes dead within two weeks if connected to the printer and with no external charge source. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 11 Chapter 1 Introduction Inside Sales Contact Inside Sales at 1-800-255-6292 for these supplies:

Cables:

4 power cable 8 Battery cable 16 Battery cable 22 Battery cable Y power cable Internal battery:

Cleaning solutions:

MICRO-CLEAN II Guide Shaft Cleaner Paper:

1-ply:

2-ply:

3-ply:

Ribbon cartridges with:

Black ribbon:

Purple ribbon:

P/N: 226-215-001 P/N: 206-875-002 P/N: 206-875-006 P/N: 206-875-009 P/N: 226-325-001 P/N: 317-075-001 P/N: 901-438-001 P/N: 901-439-001 P/N: 816-027-111 P/N: 816-027-012 P/N: 816-027-013 P/N: 805-060-001 P/N: 805-060-002 12 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 2Operation This chapter provides instructions how to set up the 6820 Printer for the first time. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 13 Chapter 2 Operation Check List Make sure the following tasks are done:

S Printer is unpacked. S Foam blocks are removed from around the printer. Save the box and packaging materials for future use, such as servicing, relocations, etc. S Twist tie is removed from the print head. S Power cable is hooked up to the vehicle battery or power source. S Printer is mounted in the vehicle. The following tasks must be done. Specific instructions for these tasks are described on the pages given:

1 Connect the battery (page 15). 2 Install the ribbon cartridge (page 16). 3 Load the paper into the paper tray (page 18) and into the printer (sever-

al steps starting on page 20). 4 Insert the mobile computer (page 23). Note: Complete these tasks before starting any printer operations. 14 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Installing Internal Battery Chapter 2 Operation The optional internal battery (sold separately see Inside Sales in Chapter 1 for ordering information and part number) is primarily for portable print-

ers; not wall mount printers. The battery can go in some fixed mount print-

ers via a cable and a factory-installed adapter. The printer battery recharges automatically when the printer is connected to an external power source via power cable. For most installations, the external power source is passed through the printer to the mobile comput-

er. The printer battery does not provide charge to the computer. Note: Remove the printer battery when storing a printer for over 30 days. After storage, reinstall the battery and connect the printer to an external power source for at least two hours, to recharge the battery. 1 Unlatch and open the printer mechanism. 2 Lower the battery into the rear of the printer case, as shown. 3 Attach the battery cable to the battery. 4 Push the battery down and back under the back edge of the case. The battery should snap into place. 5 Close and latch the mechanism. Latches or rubber bumpers Battery Battery cable Printer mechanism

(raised) 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 15 Chapter 2 Operation Installing the Ribbon Cartridge Ensure there is a ribbon cartridge (sold separately see Inside Sales in Chapter 1 for ordering information and part number) in the printer before you print and that the ribbon is fully seated (cartridge makes a distinct snap or click) with the visible portion of the ribbon straight and even. 1 Turn the ribbon advance knob (in the direction of the raised arrows) to remove any slack in the ribbon. 2 Squeeze the ribbon cartridge locking tab into the cartridge, then lower the cartridge over the print head. 3 Lower the tab side of the cartridge until it clicks. 4 Release the tab and press down on the arrow to fully seat the ribbon car-

tridge (tab clicks outward). 5 Turn the ribbon advance knob (follow raised arrows) to align the ribbon in the front of the print head. Ribbon Locking tab Advance knob Tightens ribbon 16 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Adjusting the Print Head Gap Chapter 2 Operation The head gap adjuster is near the printer mechanism on the side opposite the green thumb wheel. The print head adjuster has five notches between the print head and the platen for different paper thicknesses. Verify the thickness of the paper loaded into the printer. S If you are using single-sheet forms, set the head gap adjuster to the third notch away from the paper. S If you are using multiple-sheet forms (2-ply or 3-ply), set the head gap adjuster to the fourth notch away from the paper. S If you experience frequent head jams, set the head gap adjuster to the fifth notch away from the paper. This may stop the head jams. S If the 2-ply and 3-ply paper have light printing, setting the gap adjuster to a closer setting will darken the print. Note the print head adjuster is set on the third notch. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 17 Chapter 2 Operation Loading Paper Tray Note: Do not exceed the recommended amounts of paper quantity or thickness. When loading multiple-sheet paper, be sure to have the original faced up, with the leading edge towards the rear of the printer. Fixed Mount and Portable Printers 1 Unlatch and raise the printer mechanism. 2 Lower a stack of paper, with the original faced up, into the paper tray under the printer mechanism. S The fixed mount printer holds up to 200 3-ply forms (about 2 or 5 cm thick). S The portable printer holds up to 50 3-ply forms (about an inch or 2.5 cm thick). 3 Pull the top form out and over the rear of the printer mechanism. Low-

er and latch the printer mechanism. Paper tray

(beneath printer mechanism) Printer mechanism

(raised) 18 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Wall Mount Printer Chapter 2 Operation The wall mount printer can load paper from either an optional flat paper tray or an optional compact paper tray. Loading the Flat Paper Tray If you have a flat paper tray attached to the wall mount printer, hold a stack of paper, up to 2.5 inches (6 cm) thick, with the original facing you, and lay the stack flat into the tray. Pull the top form out to load into the printer. Loading the Compact Paper Tray If you have a compact paper tray attached to the wall mount printer, do the following to load paper into that tray:

1 With the original facing you, hold a stack of paper, up to 2.5 inches (6 cm) thick, vertically over the compact paper tray. 2 Simultaneously lower the paper into the compact paper tray and pull up the bottom end of the paper until the entire stack fits, like a U, inside the compact paper tray. 3 Pull the top form out to load into the printer. The compact paper tray is filled in this illustration 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 19 Chapter 2 Operation Loading Paper into Printer CAUTION: Follow these steps to load the paper into the printer, or paper jams may occur. Paper for the 6820 Printer has perforated strips that fit onto the pinfeed holder pins, guiding the paper into the printer. This paper is sold separate-

ly in 1-, 2-, or 3-ply forms. See Inside Sales in Chapter 1 for ordering information and part numbers. Positioning the Paper 1 Open the pinfeed holders outward. 2 Take the top edge of the sheet of paper and position it, original side fac-

ing down, over the pinfeed holder pins. 3 Align the first few holes of the paper, on each side of the paper, onto the pinfeed holder pins. 4 Close the pinfeed holders. 5 Raise the paper bail. Note: Go to the next page to adjust the pinfeed holders. 20 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Adjusting the Pinfeed Holders Chapter 2 Operation Note: There are two pinfeed holders, one next to the green thumb wheel and one opposite the same wheel. Always loosen the pinfeed holder oppo-

site the green thumb wheel. Note: Adjusting the pinfeed holder next to the green thumb wheel may cause information to print in the wrong place. If this pinfeed holder is moved, correct its location by releasing the pinfeed holder tab, moving the pinfeed holder as close to the green thumb wheel as possible, then locking the pinfeed holder tab, before adjusting the opposite pinfeed holder. If the paper does not fit on the two pinfeed holders properly, follow these steps to adjust the area between the two pinfeed holders to fit the width of the paper. See the following illustration. 1 With the pinfeed holders open, release the locking tab on the pinfeed holder opposite the green thumb wheel. 2 Adjust the pinfeed holder position so that the pins align with the paper. 3 Close the pinfeed holder. 4 Ensure that the paper is smooth (no folds, bulges, bows, etc.) between the pinfeed holders. If so, push the locking tab down on the pinfeed holder that you adjusted. Pinfeed holder Locked pinfeed holder locking tab Released pinfeed holder locking tab Thumb wheel

(green) 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 21 Chapter 2 Operation Setting the Paper Do the following to feed the paper into the printer:

1 Press the FORM FEED button on the control panel to feed the paper into the printer. 2 Lower the paper bail. An empty printer autofeeds new paper approxi-

mately 0.1 (0.25 cm) beyond the top of the paper bail. Note: The ideal distance to feed paper beyond the paper bail may vary due to environmental conditions (such as humidity) and specific aspects of certain paper. Use the green thumb wheel to position the paper to a desired distance per your conditions. Note: If your paper has a preprinted logo on every page, make sure the print head is below the preprinted logo. If not, you can adjust the posi-

tion of the paper, either by pressing the LINE FEED button, or by us-

ing the green thumb wheel. 3 Once the paper is properly positioned, press the SET PAGE button, thus clearing the PAPER OUT light, and to indicate where the top of the page is. 4 Close the printer lid. Ensure that the paper passes through the paper slot when the printer begins to print. 22 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 2 Operation Inserting Computer in Terminal Holder Note: When removing the computer, do not press the computer keys against the terminal slide retainer. Always store the computer in the termi-

nal holder. The fixed mount or portable printers have terminal holder options for the 4000 Series, 61XX, 62XX, 600 Series, 700 Series, or CK60 Computer. Inserting a 4000 Series or a 62XX Computer Do the following to insert either a 4000 Series or a 62XX Computer into the terminal holder:

1 Insert the bottom of the computer into the terminal slide retainer. 2 Use the computer to push the terminal slide retainer all the way in the direction shown. See part A in the following illustration. 3 Lower the connector end of the computer into the terminal holder. 4 Slide the computer to fully seat it in the printer docking connector. See part B in the following illustration.

(A) Bottom (or battery) end of computer.

(B) Computer connector end in printer Terminal slide retainer 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 23 Chapter 2 Operation Inserting a 61XX, a 600 Series, a 700 Series, or a CK60 Computer Do the following to insert a 61XX, 600 Series, 700 Series, or CK60 Com-

puter into the terminal holder:

1 Insert the top of the computer into the terminal slide retainer. 2 Use the computer to push the terminal slide all the way in the direction shown. See part A in the following illustration. 3 Lower the connector end of the computer into the terminal holder. 4 Slide the computer to fully seat it in the docking connector. See part B in the following illustration.

(A)

(B) 1 2 1. Top (display) of computer inserted in terminal slide retainer 2. Docking connectors This illustration shows a 700 Series computer. 24 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 3 Maintenance The printer lasts longer and performs better when it is operated correctly and kept clean. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 25 Chapter 3 Maintenance Operating Guidelines Do Ensure that the computer remains connected to the printer throughout printing or operation. Make sure the printer cover is closed (except during maintenance or when loading paper). Ensure there is paper properly installed in the paper tray or dashboard mount. Disconnect the printer power cable when jump-starting the vehicle. Clean the external surface of the printer using a soft cloth moistened with mild soap and water, a good quality cleaner, such as MICRO-CLEAN II, and if necessary, rubbing alcohol. Make sure your printer is loaded with paper before communicating with your mobile computer. Do Not Spill liquids or food crumbs into the printer. Sit or stand on the printer. Use solvents or abrasive cleaners on the printer. Rest objects on, under, or against the printer. Allow the printer to be knocked over or physically damaged. Start or stop the vehicle engine while printing. Overload paper tray (paper jams will occur). Use objects to remove paper from between the print head and platen (damage to mask spring/print head will occur). 26 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual General Cleaning Chapter 3 Maintenance CAUTION: Do not use glass cleaners with ammonia. Permanent damage to the printer cover will occur if such glass cleaners are used. CAUTION: Do not use abrasives or solvents (or any product containing these substances) to clean any part of the unit. Permanent damage to the printer will occur if such substances are used. CAUTION: Never use ketonic solvents (acetone or ketone) or aromatic solvents (toluene or xylene) to clean any part of the printer. Doing this can damage the printer. Note: MICRO-CLEAN II is the only cleaner recommended for this pur-

pose. Other cleaners can damage the case. Note: GUIDE SHAFT CLEANER is recommended for cleaning your 80-column printer guide shafts. Cleaning the printer guide shaft can re-

duce the number of head jams caused by dirt and buildup. Note: Both cleaners are sold separately. See Inside Sales in Chapter 1 for ordering information and part numbers. Periodic cleaning helps maintain the appearance and reliability of the printer. When cleaning the printer, inspect both the outside and the inside for obvious signs of damage, wear, or impending failure. Cleaning the Outside Do not pour liquid cleaners directly on the printer case. Instead, dampen a soft, lint-free cloth with a quality cleaner and clean the exterior surfaces with this cloth. Do not use solvent solutions. Inspect the dc power jack, all cables, and the remote terminal holder or vehicle dock for damage. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 27 Chapter 3 Maintenance Cleaning the Inside CAUTION: Let the printer cool before you clean the inside of the printer, or you may burn your fingers. Open the printer cover and inspect the ribbon cartridge and all visible moving parts on the printer mechanism for signs of wear or damage. Pinfeed holder Thumb wheel (green) Paper bail Ribbon cartridge Head gap adjuster This illustration shows the visible moving parts of the printer mechanism. Use a low-pressure, dry air source, such as canned air available at elec-

tronic supply houses and typewriter repair facilities, or a vacuum, to re-

move accumulated paper dust from the printer mechanism. The printer ribbon contains a special lubricant to ensure that the fine dot wires inside the print head receive adequate lubrication. Replace the rib-

bon frequently to prolong the life of the print head. The printer requires no additional user-applied lubrication. Ribbon cartridges, available in black or purple, are sold separately. See Inside Sales in Chapter 1 for or-

dering information and part numbers. 28 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 3 Maintenance Removing Old Ribbon Cartridge Physically move the print head mechanism to an open area, then do the following to remove the old ribbon cartridge:

1 Squeeze the ribbon cartridge locking tab (on the side of the cartridge) against the ribbon cartridge. 2 Lift the ribbon cartridge to remove the ribbon from the print head. En-

sure the ribbon does not catch. 3 Lift the ribbon cartridge out of the printer. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 29 Chapter 3 Maintenance Cleaning the Mask Spring Look at the mask spring behind the print head. If the mask spring needs to be cleaned, go on to the next page. If the mask spring appears to be in good condition, install a new ribbon cartridge as described on page 16. Mask spring Print head This shows the location of the mask spring. 30 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 3 Maintenance Do the following to clean the mask spring:

1 Unlatch the print head locking tabs to release the print head, lift the print head aside, then lift up the paper bail. Do not detach the print head unit. CAUTION: Never use a sharp object, such as pinchers, to clean between the print head and the platen (rubber roller). This can damage the mask spring and print head. 2 Remove the clear plastic paper guide that seats the mask spring, if neces-

sary. Use your fingernails to loosen the base of the paper guide, then pull the paper guide straight up from the printer mechanism. 3 Remove the metal mask spring from the paper guide and clean with a quality cleaner. Replace if damaged. 4 Put the good, clean mask spring into the paper guide and install the pa-

per guide into the printer. 5 Close the paper bail, reinsert the print head, latch the two print head locking tabs, and install the ribbon. Print head locking tabs Print head

(lifted aside) Mask spring Paper bail (raised) 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 31 Chapter 3 Maintenance Changing the Printer Settings Note: If your printer configuration matches either of the following condi-

tions (manufacturing date or control program version #), then you may not be able to use your printer control panel to reconfigure the printer. For units built after March 15, 1999 (line 4 on your self-test report for the manufacturing date under the MFG Date header) or with control pro-

gram versions greater than 1.67 (line 10 on the self-test report), you do need to use the configuration utility to change settings. See Chapter 4, Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility for information on using the configuration utility to reflash your printer. Note: Old printers can be updated with newer control program versions. The following configuration information applies to units with control pro-

gram versions 1.67 or older. On rare occasions, you may need to reconfigure the printer. Use the con-

trol panel to enter the following modes and set the printer. Factory defaults are in bold:

S Protocol Selection Sets the protocol (NPCP or DTR) S Configuration S Autofeed (CR versus CR+LF) S Bit Rate (9600 bps or 19.2K) S Zero Print Option (slashed (4) or unslashed (0)) Protocol Selection Mode Configuration Mode Press and hold both the FORM FEED and LINE FEED buttons until you hear a beep to activate the protocol selection mode. See the Protocol Binary Sequence table on page 33 for available protocols in the order they are stored. The PAPER OUT, HEAD JAM, and LOW BATT lights turn ON or OFF in combinations to indicate which protocol is selected for the printer. (Factory default is NPCP, all three indicators must be OFF.) Press and hold both the SET PAGE and LINE FEED buttons, for about four seconds until you hear a beep, to activate the configuration mode. Setting the Autofeed S If the LOW BATT indicator stays dark, autofeed is set to CR only when the printer receives a CR in the input data. S If the same indicator is lit, autofeed is set to LF+CR and a linefeed is performed when a CR is received in the input data stream from the host. Press LINE FEED to toggle these two autofeed options. 32 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 3 Maintenance Selecting the Bit Rate S If the PAPER OUT indicator is lit, the printer is set for 19.2K. S If the same indicator stays dark, the printer is set for 9600 bps. Press the FORM FEED button to toggle these bit rates. Adjusting the Zero Print Option S If the HEAD JAM indicator is lit, the zero print option is set for the zero with a slash (4) to appear in printouts. S If the HEAD JAM indicator stays dark, the zero print option is set for the zero without a slash (0) to appear in printouts. Press the SET PAGE button to toggle between these zero print options. After selecting configurations, press both SET PAGE and LINE FEED buttons and listen for a beep to take the printer out of the Configuration Mode. Warm-start the printer to reset it with the new configurations. Protocol Binary Sequence Protocol NPCP (factory default) Reserved Reserved Reserved DTR no parity DTR odd parity DTR even parity IrDA PAPER OUT Indicator OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON HEAD JAM Indicator OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON LOW BATT Indicator OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Repeatedly press the LINE FEED button to increment the light sequence to the protocol of choice (NPCP to IrDA). Example If the printer is set for NPCP (OFF, OFF, OFF), press the LINE FEED button four times to increment the protocol selector to the DTR no par-

ity protocol (ON, OFF, OFF). Repeatedly press the SET PAGE button to decrement the light sequence to the protocol of choice (IrDA to NPCP). Example If set for DTR no parity protocol (ON, OFF, OFF), press the SET PAGE button four times to return to NPCP (OFF, OFF, OFF). After you have selected the protocol, press both the FORM FEED and LINE FEED buttons and listen for a beep. This takes the printer out of the Protocol Selection Mode. Warm-start the printer to reset it with the new protocol. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 33 Chapter 3 Maintenance 34 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 4 Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility The IntermecR 6820 Printer Configuration Utility is run on a host com-

puter to manipulate the configuration of a 6820 Printer flash memory. This chapter describes how to install and use the configuration utility. Be-

fore using the configuration utility, you must connect your host computer to your printer, go to page 37 for instructions. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 35 Chapter 4 Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility Font Modules Intermec Technologies provides the following font modules for your 6820 Printer:

S NFT00000.MOD Default International, 4820 compatible S NFT00437.MOD IBM/Microsoft compatible Code Page 437 S NFT00932.MOD JIS Japanese S NFT00936.MOD GB2312 Chinese Simplified S NFT00949.MOD KSC5601 Korean S NFT00950.MOD Big 5 Traditional Chinese Note: See Appendix C, Printer Font Test Jobs, for sample print jobs. Note that there are three versions of the default font module

(NFT00000.MOD) Arabic, Turkish, and International. Any one ver-

sion of this module, but not all three versions, can appear in the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility FONTS directory and install on the 6820 Printer. The International version of this font module is automatically placed in the FONTS directory when the Configuration Utility is installed on the host computer. All three versions are included on the toolkit CD as follows:

S The Arabic version is included in the Default Fonts\Arabic directory. S The Turkish version is in the Default Fonts\Turkish directory. S The International version is in the Default Fonts\International direc-

tory. Once the Configuration Utility is installed on the host computer, any of these default font modules can replace the existing default font module

(NFT00000.MOD). Copy the desired default font from the appropriate toolkit CD default fonts directory to the FONTS directory of the Con-

figuration Utility. The Configuration Utility has access to any font mod-

ules in this FONTS directory. For Windows 95 and Windows 98 users:

If the default installation process was followed, the configuration utility FONTS directory is located at 6820PRTR\TOOLKIT\FONTS where 6820PRTR is replaced by the actual directory in which you chose to extract the files. For Windows 2000 and Windows XP users:

If you followed the default installation process, the Configuration Utility FONTS directory is located at Program Files\Intermec\6820 Printer Configuration Utility\FONTS. Note: Do not rename the font files in the FONTS directory. If you do so, the files names will not match the data in these files and the fonts will not work as expected. 36 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility Connecting to the Printer Connect your printer to your desktop computer via a serial cable. The seri-

al COM Port connector on either your Fixed Mount Printer or your Por-

table Printer is on your printer mechanism, the same side as the green thumb wheel. Printer mechanism

(raised) COM Port connector Reset button Be sure to locate and disconnect the gray terminal holder ribbon cable connector from the floor of the printer cavity. The cable is located behind the printer mechanism on the same side as the green thumb wheel and is the one that is not attached to the printer mechanism. Disconnect this terminal holder ribbon cable from the floor of the printer cavity Ignore this cable attached to the printer mechanism. Intermec Technologies provides a printer configuration utility based on several operating systems that may be used on your host computer. Below are the operating systems for which the configuration utility is written. Se-

lect your operating system, then go to that page to begin instructions for your particular configuration utility. S If your host computer has either Windows 95 or Windows 98, go to page 38 for instructions. S If your host computer has Windows 2000 or Windows XP, go to page 53. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 37 Chapter 4 Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility Instructions for Windows 95 or Windows 98 Installation These instructions apply to desktop computers running either Windows 95 or Windows 98 operating systems. All files necessary to configure the 6820 Printer are located in the toolkit, including the Configuration Utility application program, RPGPCONF.EXE, and the initialization file, RPGPCONF.INI. The init-

ialization file is used by the Configuration Utility to specify the location and names of font and printer control program files. To set up your host computer to use the Configuration Utility, extract the toolkit files from the self-extracting archive file, NPTK6820.EXE. First, create a directory, on your host computer, with an appropriate name for the Configuration Utility files. The name of this directory is your choice. You could choose to have the files extracted at the root directory of your host computer. However, the directory used in the example below is

\6820PRTR. Execute the self-extracting file from the target directory while specifying the path to NPTK6820.EXE in the command line. Upon executing NPTK6820.EXE, a TOOLKIT subdirectory is created, as well as other associated subdirectories, as shown in the diagram below. The Configuration Utility application program and the initialization file are extracted to the TOOLKIT subdirectory. Other files are extracted to the other subdirectories created by the archive file. 6820PRTR TOOLKIT This is the directory where you executed NPTK6820, to extract the configuration utility files. 6820SYS DOS FONTS PCFS Configuration File Support The configuration utility allows the user to generate custom configuration files. These files have the file name extension of .PCF, and they reside in the directory specified in the initialization file. See DEFAULT.PCF, in the PCFS directory for an example. Configuration Utility Operation A configuration consists of a list of fonts, some parameter settings, and op-

tionally, a printer control program. When the utility is active, it holds a configuration in memory. This is called the working configuration. Initially, this working configuration 38 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility has no fonts, the parameters are set to the default values, and there is no printer control program in memory. You should consider the working con-

figuration as temporary and lost when you exit from the utility. The Configuration Utilitys main menu offers you various ways to manip-

ulate the working configuration. You can overwrite this working confi-

guration with a previously saved configuration, stored either in a disk file on the computer or in the 6820 Printer itself by using one of the Load Printer Configuration options. You can modify the working configuration by using one of the Modify Printer Configuration options. Once the working configuration is loaded and modified, you can save this to either a disk file or the printer by using one of the Save Printer Configuration op-

tions. In addition to the various Load, Modify, and Save options, a Defaults op-

tion is provided, which allows you to restore the printer to a default con-

figuration with a single option. Starting the Program When you run RPGPCONF.EXE, the first screen you see is like the fol-

lowing. Click OK to continue to the Main Menu. Main Menu The following options are available on the Main Menu. S Use Load Printer Configuration to load an existing configuration. Load either from disk or from the printer. S Use Modify Printer Configuration to review or modify the working configuration, or include the printer control program in the currently loaded configuration. S Use Save Printer Configurations to save a configuration file to disk or download the working configuration to your 6820 Printer. S Use Defaults to restore the printer to its default configuration. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 39 Chapter 4 Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility Note that when the Main Menu is first displayed, the Save Printer Con-

figuration options are grayed out, prohibiting selection of those options until a configuration is loaded or modified. Exit from the Configuration Utility Program If you click Exit, a message appears to prompt whether you want to exit. Click No to return to the Main Menu. Click Yes to exit the program. Load Printer Configuration This set of options allows you to load configuration information from disk

(on the host computer) or from the printer (connected to the host com-

puter). Load Configuration from File option This option, selected from the Main Menu, allows you to load a configura-

tion file from one of the drives on your host computer. Click From File from the Main Menu to access the File, Open window. Here, you can open a configuration parameters file from one of your host computer drives. It operates like the File, Open on a standard Windows program. 40 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility Canceling the Operation Click Cancel to return to the Main Menu without selecting a file to open. Selecting a File Name You can select the drive, directory, and file name with your pointing de-

vice, using standard MS Windows file selection methods. If you want to enter text for a file name, you can do this with the alpha keyboard, or use your host computer keyboard. Click Alpha to access the alpha keyboard described on page 52. Loading the Selected File After selecting a configuration file to load, click OK. If the selected file does not exist, you see an error message similar to the following. Click OK to return to the Main Menu without loading a file. If the file does exist, you see a warning that loading the selected file will overwrite your working configuration, as shown in the message box below. Click OK if this is acceptable, otherwise click Cancel to return to the Main Menu without loading a file. After clicking OK, the configuration from the selected file is loaded into memory and becomes the current working configuration. If this load is successful, a message similar to the one shown below is displayed. Click OK to return to the Main Menu. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 41 Chapter 4 Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility However, if the working configuration is not replaced successfully with the configuration from the selected file, an error message is displayed inform-

ing you that it was not successful, as shown below. Click OK to return to the Main Menu without loading a file. Load Configuration from Printer This option, selected from the Main Menu, loads a configuration from the 6820 Printer. Click From Printer from the Main Menu to display a warn-

ing message (as shown below) and indicate that the printers configuration will overwrite the working configuration. Click OK to overwrite the con-

figuration, otherwise click Cancel to return to the Main Menu without loading the printers configuration. If you click OK, a message is then displayed prompting you to reset the printer. If the connection is not successful, after approximately 20 seconds, the following message is displayed. If you click Yes, repeat the previous steps, starting with Attempting a Con-

nection to the Printer. 42 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility If you click No, an error message appears (as shown below) is displayed informing you that the configuration was not loaded. Click OK to return to the Main Menu without loading the printers configuration. Connection Successful If the connection to the printer is successful, then no user intervention is required throughout the remainder of this operation. The Get From Prin-

ter function is initiated, and the Configuration Utility copies the printer configuration into the working configuration. This utility communicates with the 6820 Printer to find out the current parameter settings and which font modules are loaded. The name, version, and size of these font modules are then displayed on the Get From Printer screen. If the operation is successful, you are returned to the Main Menu and the printer configuration is loaded as the working configuration. You can view or modify the working configuration by selecting a Modify Printer Con-

figuration option. Modify Printer Configuration This set of options allows you to view or change a working configuration, including adding fonts from disk (on the host computer), deleting printer fonts, and changing parameters settings. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 43 Chapter 4 Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility Include Control Program is a switch that determines whether to include the printer control program when saving the working configuration to the printer. Click this box to change the setting. When checked, the control program is included the next time you save the printer configuration. Generally, you only need to update the control program as new versions become available. The control program is named NPFL6820.MOD. Font Selection This option, selected from the Main Menu, selects fonts that are available on disk, or deletes existing fonts. A variety of different international fonts are also available in the toolkit for the 6820 Printer. Clicking Fonts from the Main Menu takes you to Font Selection where you can perform operations related to font files,. The Fonts Available list shows font files that are available on disk. The Fonts Selected list show fonts that are in the current printer configuration. Note that Save is grayed out, prohibiting that selection, until either new fonts are selected, or fonts are removed from the Fonts Selected list. Copying Font Files To select font files, highlight the font files in the Fonts Available list, with your pointing device. You can highlight several files at one time, using conventional Windows selection methods. Then click Copy to copy those font files to the Fonts Selected list. However, if you attempt to copy fonts from the Fonts Available list when these fonts already exist in the Fonts Selected list, the following error mes-

sage is displayed, once for each of the duplicate fonts (where the current font file name is listed in place of NFT00000.MOD). Click OK to close the error message and not copy the font to the Fonts Selected list. If there are two or more duplicate fonts, the cycle repeats un-

til an error message is displayed for each of the duplicate font files. The font file names become unhighlighted, you remain in the Font Selec-

tion window, and the duplicate fonts are not copied to the Fonts Selected list. 44 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility Deleting Font Files To avoid the problem of exceeding flash memory, you can delete fonts in the printer flash, from the Fonts Selected list. To do this, select the font names you want to delete in the Fonts Selected list, then click Erase to clear the names from the Fonts Selected list. Space Remaining in Flash The Space Selection box, below the Fonts Selected list, displays the space remaining in flash (in kilobytes), based on fonts currently selected. When this number is negative, it means the available space in flash is less that the size of the selected fonts. Delete some fonts before saving the rest. Saving the Selected Fonts Note that Save is initially grayed out, disabling its use. Once the Fonts Se-

lected list is changed, Save is enabled (no longer grayed out). Fonts marked with an asterisk (*), in the Fonts Selected list, are currently in printer flash, but not found on disk, and are lost when flash is updated from disk (Save to Printer option). When Save is clicked, and there is enough space in printer flash memory for the fonts in the Fonts Selected list, the working configuration is up-

dated with the selected fonts. The amount of printer flash memory to spare, after being loaded with the selected fonts, is shown (in kilobytes) in the Space box. As long as this number is not negative, there is enough space for the selected fonts. However, if you attempt to save fonts and there is not enough space in printer flash memory, the following error message is displayed. Click OK to return to the Font Selection window and delete fonts in the Fonts Se-

lected list. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 45 Chapter 4 Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility Canceling the Operation Click Cancel to return to the Main Menu without making any changes. If you have not made any changes to the Fonts Selected list, you return to the Main Menu. However, if you have already made some changes to the Fonts Selected list, a confirmation message appears, similar to that shown below. Click OK to return to the Main Menu with changes made to the Fonts Selected list discarded. Click Cancel to remain in the Font Selection window. Parameters Selection This option, selected from the Main Menu, allows you to review or modify the working configuration. Click Parameters from the Main Menu to access the Parameters window where you can modify any of the parameters that are not grayed out. De-

fault parameter values are marked with an asterisk (*). Modifying Parameters To modify the configuration, select parameters on this screen using your pointing device. Required for Bluetooth Convert the Printer to Epson DTR Mode Those using Bluetooth must switch the 6820 Printer from the Norand Portable Communications Protocol (NPCP) mode to the Epson DTR mode with the baud rate set to 19.2K and the parity set to None. Note: The 6820 Bluetooth adapter does not support any other settings. 46 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility Note: If your version of the Configuration Utility has a 38.4K bit rate selection, ignore that selection. If selected, it defaults to 19.2K bps. On future releases, the 38.8K bit rate will not show on the display. Note: If your version of the Configuration Utility has an XON/XOFF selection, ignore that selection. If selected, it defaults to DTR. On future releases, the XON/XOFF protocol will not show on the display. Saving Parameters Clicking Save updates the working configuration and returns you to the Main Menu. Canceling the Operation Click Cancel to return to the Main Menu without modifying any configu-

ration parameters. Save Printer Configuration These options allow you to save the working configuration to disk or to printer. Save is initially grayed out in the Main Menu, and cannot be used until a configuration is either loaded or modified. Save to File This option, selected from the Main Menu, allows you to select the drive, directory, and file name with your pointing device, using standard Win-

dows file selection methods. Click To File from the Main Menu to access the File Save As window

(similar to the File Open window). This option allows you to save the working configuration to a disk file. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 47 Chapter 4 Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility Choosing File Name and Location on Disk You can select the drive, directory, and file name with your pointing de-

vice, using standard MS Windows file selection methods. If you want to enter text for a file name, you can do this with the alpha keyboard, or use your host computer keyboard. Click Alpha to access the alpha keyboard described on page 52. Saving the Configuration to Disk After you have selected the drive, directory, and file name, click OK to save the configuration file. If a file by the same name exists, the following confirmation message is displayed, informing you that if you continue it will overwrite the existing file. Click Cancel to return to the Main Menu without the working configura-

tion saved to a file. Click OK for the File Save As operation to continue. The following infor-

mation is displayed assuring you that the working configuration was suc-

cessfully saved to disk. Click OK to return to the Main Menu. Canceling the Save to File Operation From the File, Save As window, if you click Cancel, this aborts the Save to File operation, and returns you to the Main Menu without saving the working configuration. 48 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility Save to Printer This option, selected from the Main Menu, allows you to send the work-

ing configuration to your 6820 Printer. When To Printer from the Main Menu is clicked, a warning message (as shown below) is displayed. This means that the working configuration is copied into flash memory, in your 6820 Printer, and overwrites the current configuration settings that are in your printer. Click OK to for the system to connect to the printer and transfer the configuration, or click Cancel to return to the Main Menu without updating the printer. Attempting a Connection to the Printer After clicking OK, a message is displayed, informing you that the system is attempting to establish connection with the printer. At this point you should connect a serial cable (P/N: 226-270-001) between your host com-

puter and the printer (if not already connected), then reset the printer. Connection Failed If the connection is not successful after the predetermined period of time

(approximately 20 seconds), the following message is displayed. Click Yes to repeat the previous steps above (starting with Attempting a Connection to the Printer), else click No. An error message (as shown be-

low) is displayed informing you that the configuration was not saved. Click No to return to the Main Menu without updating the printer. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 49 Chapter 4 Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility Connection Successful If the connection is successful, the following screen is displayed, the Send to Printer function is initiated, and the printers configuration is updated to match the working configuration. This screen displays the progress made while updating the printers config-

uration. Upon completion of this operation, the Total Transfer bar reach-

es 100%, and you return to the Main Menu. Save Defaults to Printer Click Save to Printer on the Main Menu to load the default configuration file, DEFAULT.PCF, and save it to the printer. This combines the opera-

tions of the [from file], the selection of the DEFAULT.PCF file, and the

[to printer] into a single button. The following message appears stating that the working configuration is overwritten. Click Cancel to return to the Main Menu without loading the default configuration file. 50 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility If you click OK, and if the default configuration file is not successfully loaded into the working configuration (such as an illegal directory), then the following error message appears. Click OK to return to the Main Menu without loading a file. If the default configuration file is successfully loaded into the working con-

figuration, a message, as shown below, is displayed. Click OK to continue with the Restore Defaults to Printer operation. Attempting a Connection to the Printer If the default configuration was successfully loaded into working configu-

ration, then a message is displayed, prompting you to reset the printer. Connection Failed If the connection is not successful, after approximately 20 seconds, the fol-

lowing message is displayed. Click Yes to repeat the previous steps, above, starting with Attempting a Connection to the Printer. If you click No, an error message (as shown be-

low) is displayed. Click OK to return to the Main Menu without saving the default configuration to the printer. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 51 Chapter 4 Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility Connection Successful If the operation was successful, your 6820 Printer is now set to the default configuration in flash memory, and you are returned to the Main Menu. Default Printer Settings These settings are used when Restore Defaults to Printer is selected:

Zero Print Option Autofeed Configuration Protocol Parity Bit Rate Slash all zeros (zeros are printed with a slash) CR (carriage return at end of line without line feed) NPCP N/A (for NPCP) 19.2K For other printer defaults, refer to the Printer Defaults paragraph in Appen-

dix B, Cross-Reference Tables. Alpha Keyboard The Alpha button, on either the File Open window or the File Save As window, brings up the alpha keyboard onscreen for you to enter text. Returning the File Name to the Previous Dialog Window After selecting all of the needed text, click Save to return the text to the window where needed. Click Cancel to exit without saving the text. The following confirmation message appears. Click OK to return to the pre-

vious window without the entered text, or click Cancel to stay with the alpha keyboard. 52 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility Instructions for Windows 2000 or Windows XP These instructions apply to desktop computers running either Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating systems. Installation All files necessary to configure the 6820 Printer are located on the CD for the 6820TKCD toolkit, including the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility application program, PCONFIGAPP.EXE. To set up your host computer to use the Configuration Utility, do the following:

1 Insert the toolkit CD in your host computer. 2 From your desktop, use your Explorer application to view the contents of the tookit CD. 3 Double-click the SETUP.EXE executable file, then click Next from the Welcome screen to continue. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 53 Chapter 4 Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility 4 If you wish to change the default location of this installation, click Browse to change the destination. If this installation is for anyone who uses this desktop computer, select Everyone near the bottom of this screen. Click Next to continue. If you wish to know the amount of space required for the configuration utility, click Disk Cost for the following screen. Click OK to close and return to the installation screens. 54 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility 5 Click Next to verify this installation, click Back to adjust the informa-

tion in the previous screen, or click Cancel to exit this installation. 6 A progress screen, followed by an Installation Complete screen finishes this installation. Click Close to exit the installation. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 55 Chapter 4 Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility If the default location was not changed in step 4 on the previous page, the Program Files\Intermec\6820 Printer Configuration Utility subdirectory is created. The Configuration Utility application program and applicable DLL files are extracted to this subdirectory. After installation, from your desktop, click Start > Programs > Intermec >

6820 Printer Configuration Utility to access the 6820 Printer Configura-

tion Utility executable and related documentation. Configuration Utility Operation Note: If your 6820 Printer has a Bluetooth adapter, its RS-232 line driver can be in contention with the configuration ports connected program-

ming PC. Disconnect the Bluetooth adapter before continuing. This configuration consists of a list of fonts, some parameter settings, and a printer control program. When the utility is active, it holds a configuration in memory. This is called the configuration clipboard. Initially, this configuration has pa-

rameters set to their default values. Consider the contents of the configura-

tion clipboard as temporary and lost when you exit from the utility. With the Configuration Utility, you can view the configuration stored in your 6820 Printer using the Get 6820 Configuration button. You can configure or modify the printer settings in your printer using the Set 6820 Configuration button. In addition, you can use the Reset to Defaults button to reset the configu-

ration clipboard to the recommended printer configuration. Note that this button does not send the default configuration to the printer. Starting the Program From your desktop, click Start > Programs > Intermec > 6820 Printer Configuration Utility > PConfigApp.exe to access the 6820 Printer Con-

figuration Utility. 56 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility COM Port This utility is flexible in which COM Port to use to communicate with your printer. If COM Port 1 is not available or is in use by another ap-

plication, select another COM Port with which to connect to your printer. Establishing a Communication with the Printer Click either the Get 6820 Configuration or the Set 6820 Configuration button to open communications with the printer. 1 The Opening COM Port x to printer . message appears in the text box of your utility. The x in the message indicates to which COM Port your utility is set. 2 When the Press Reset on the printer message appears in the text box, press the reset button on your printer mechanism. 3 As soon as successful communication is established between your desk-

top computer and your printer, an Opening COM Port x to printer. Done. message appears in the text box. Note: If an Unable to open COM Port x to printer message appears in the text box, as shown in the previous sample, another software application may be using the selected COM Port. Either select another COM Port or disable the software application using the COM Port in question. See page 61 for more errors. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 57 Chapter 4 Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility Get 6820 Configuration To view the settings on your 6820 Printer, do the following:

1 Click Get 6820 Configuration to initiate communication. 2 The Getting printer parameters . message appears in the text box. 3 When finished retrieving information from the printer, the Getting printer parameters . Done message replaces the message described in step 2. This message indicates parameters were successfully obtained from the printer and the utility settings reflect your printer settings. 4 Either go to Set 6820 Configuration in the next paragraph; or click OK to close the utility, then detach the serial cable. Set 6820 Configuration The settings in the configuration clipboard are what is sent into your printer when you change its configuration. 1 In the configuration clipboard, if necessary, select what settings are re-

quired for your printer. To undo your selections and return them to their defaults, click Reset to Defaults. 2 Click Set 6820 Configuration to initiate communication. The Setting printer parameters . message appears in the text box of your utility. 3 Once settings in your printer are changed, the Setting printer parameters

. Done message replaces the message described in step 2. Note: If the parameters cannot be set, a Unable to set printer parame-

ters message is shown. This indicates the connection broke down be-

tween your desktop computer and your printer. 4 Click OK to close the utility, then detach the serial cable. Required for Bluetooth Convert the Printer to Epson DTR Mode Those using Bluetooth must switch the 6820 Printer from the Norand Portable Communications Protocol (NPCP) mode to the Epson DTR mode with the baud rate set to 19.2K and the parity set to None. Note: The 6820 Bluetooth adapter does not support any other settings. 58 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility Fonts and Control Click Fonts and Control from the 6820 Configuration Utility to update the fonts stored in your printer or to update the printer control program. The Fonts Available for Update list shows font files that are available. The Fonts Selected for Update list show fonts that are to go to the printer. Get Printer Fonts To learn what fonts are currently in your printer, click Get Printer Fonts, then wait for the information to appear in the text box in the bottom right corner of the dialog. Below is a sample screen. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 59 Chapter 4 Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility Copying Font Files To select font files, highlight the font files in the Fonts Available for Up-

date list. You can highlight several files at one time. Then click the right arrow pointing to the Fonts Selected for Update list to copy the selected font files to this list. Below is a sample screen. If you select enough fonts that go over the space allowed, an error message will appear. Click OK to close the error message and not copy the font to the Fonts Selected for Update list. If there are two or more fonts that ex-

ceed the space allowed, this message repeats until an error message is dis-

played for each of the font files that went over the space allowed. Space in Flash The Space Needed information shown beneath the Fonts Available for Update list indicates the total space required (in bytes) for all of the fonts in the list. The Space Remaining information listed below the Fonts Se-

lected for Update list displays the space remaining in the printer, given the fonts in the Selected list. Update Printer This button updates the printer fonts and the control program depending on the options selected on the dialog. Note that if the Selected list is empty and the Include control program update is not checked, a Nothing selected for update message appears in the text box. S Formats the printer flash for font updates and writes new font files to the printer for any fonts in the Selected list. Click the top, right arrow to copy selected font files from the Fonts Available for Update list to the Fonts Selected for Update list. Click the bottom, left arrow to remove any selected files from the Fonts Se-

lected for Update list. 60 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility Click Update Printer to update the fonts in the printer with those in the Fonts Selected for Update list. The Update progress: bar indicates the progress as the control program or fonts are written to the printer. S The Include program control update box determines whether to in-

clude the printer control program when updating the printer. Check this box to update the setting and include the control program the next time you update the printer configuration. Generally, you only need to update the control program as new versions become available. The control program is named NPFL6820.MOD. Default Printer Settings The following settings are the defaults for your 6820 Printer:

Zero Print Option Autofeed Configuration Protocol Parity Bit Rate Print zeros without a slash CR (carriage return at end of line without line feed) NPCP N/A (for NPCP) 19.2K (19200) For other printer defaults, refer to the Printer Defaults paragraph in Appen-

dix B, Cross-Reference Tables. Error Messages There are three cases where the computer may not connect to the printer. Here are the three cases and error messages. Note that x indicates the number assigned to the COM Port in question. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 61 Chapter 4 Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility Timeout Error The timeout error may occur due to either of these situations:

S The printer was not reset in the time allowed. S The COM port exists on the desktop computer but nothing is con-

nected to the port. Error Message:

Unable to open COM port x to printer. Printer not reset within the time allowed or printer not connected to COM port x. Port Not Found Error The COM port does not exist. The particular COM port is identified in the error message. Error Message:

Unable to open COM port x to printer. COM port x cannot be found. Access Denied Error The COM port exists but a connection with the printer is not established. The particular COM port is identified in the error message. Error Message:

Unable to open COM port x to printer. Access to COM port x is denied. Close applications using COM port x or try another port. About the Configuration Utility Click About to learn about your version of the 6820 Configuration Util-

ity. When done, click OK to return to the utility. Bluetooth Adapter Note: If your 6820 Printer is to use a Bluetooth adapter, be sure to con-

nect this adapter after you exit the Configuration Utility, thus finish re-

configuring the 6820 Printer fonts. 62 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 5 Control Code Definitions This chapter contains a set of control code definitions and specifications for page layout for the 6820 Printer. These control code definitions are organized by categories of functions. To locate control codes easily, several methods have been provided:

S Alphabetically organized (complete list) refer to the Control Codes & Escape Sequences Index table in Appendix B, Cross-Reference Tables. Locate the index for the control code, and turn directly to that page. S Numeric order (single character codes only) refer to the Single Character Control Code Definitions table in Appendix B, Cross-Reference Tables. Locate the index for the control code, and turn directly to that page. S Numeric order (complete list) refer to the Escape Sequences Quick Reference table in Appendix B, Cross-Reference Tables and look up control codes by their actual code values. Locate the index for the escape sequence, and turn directly to that page. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 63 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Control Code Definitions Buffers I/O Buffer All characters and control codes received by the printer are stored in this buffer. Characters and controls codes are read from this buffer and acted upon to form the print buffer. Characters are removed from the I/O buffer as they are processed. Print (image) Buffer All characters go through this buffer on their way to the printed page. This buffer contains the graphic image of the dots to print, from which charac-

ters are rendered. It is cleared when its contents are printed. The following information defines notations included in the format defini-

tions of the escape sequences, throughout this section. Special Notations Notation

(0)

(1)

NUL Description Used in the ASCII column of any of the Format definitions, indicates that its value can only be zero

(and not the character 0). For example: Select Top-Down Printing ESC US (0). Used in the ASCII column of any of the Format definitions, indicates that its value can only be one

(and not the character 1). For example: Select Bottom-Up Printing ESC US (1). When a number (at the end of an escape sequence) is marked with an asterisk, then either the value corresponding to that number or the value of the string character can be used for that number. For example, if 1* is shown, then either the value (1), or the value of the string character (decimal:

49, hex: 31) can be used. The NUL character is represented in the Dec column as 0, in the Hex column as 00, and in the ASCII column as NUL. General Printer Control Functions Backspace The print buffer is emptied. The print head is moved to the left one char-

acter space (using the current pitch). This can be performed to, but not beyond, the left margin setting. The backspace is ignored if justification of right, full, or centered is selected. Format Decimal 8 Hex 08 ASCII BS The backspace control code (BS) is not reliable when text contains differ-

ent character pitches. For reliable backspacing, use the escape sequence

(ESC \), Set Relative Print Position. 64 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Beeper The printers sounding device produces a beep sound for approximately 1/10 of a second. Format Decimal ASCII Hex 7 07 BEL Cancel Line All of the characters currently in the print buffer are discarded. Current print position is set to left margin. Text already printed cannot be can-

celed. Format Decimal ASCII Hex 24 18 CAN Carriage Return The print head is repositioned at the start of the print line (usually at the left margin), and repositions the pointer to the start of the print buffer, after printing all data in the buffer. Also, all of the one line functions are reset, such as bold, double-strike, double-wide, or unidirectional printing. Format Decimal ASCII Hex 13 0D CR Note: You can add an automatic line feed with a configuration item (see Configuration Parameters in Chapter 7, Troubleshooting and Diagnostics). Delete The last character in the print buffer is deleted. This functions only in left justification. Format Decimal ASCII Hex 127 7F DEL Form Feed The contents of the print buffer is printed, the print buffer is cleared, and the paper is advanced to the top of the next page (Top of Form), according to the current page length setting. The carriage position is moved to the start of the line. Format Decimal ASCII Hex 12 0C FF 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 65 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select Half-Speed Printing Half-speed mode is turned on to provide quiet printing, and more accurate print positioning during text mode printing. Format Decimal 27 115 1*

Hex 1B 73 01*

ASCII ESC s 1*

Cancel Half-Speed Printing Half-speed mode is turned off (factory default), and continues with normal speed printing. Format Decimal 27 115 0*

Hex 1B 73 00*

ASCII ESC s 0*

Set Inactivity Time for Sleep Mode The time period, for which the printer waits during inactivity before it goes into low-power mode, is set (in n seconds). The factory default is 10 seconds. Format Decimal 27 122 n Line Feed Hex 1B 7A n ASCII ESC z n Perform Line Feed The contents of the print buffer is printed, then cleared, and the character count is reset to zero; then the print head advances to the next print line, using the current spacing. The position of the carriage is not affected and a carriage return is not executed. Format Decimal 10 Hex 0A ASCII LF Perform n/216-inch Line Feed The paper to immediately advanced n/216 of an inch. This does not affect subsequent line feeds. Range of n is 0255. Format Decimal 27 74 n Hex 1B 4A n ASCII ESC J n 66 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Perform n/216-inch Reverse Line Feed An immediate reverse line feed of n/216 of an inch is produced. This does not affect subsequent line feeds. Range of n is 0255. Format Decimal 27 106 n Hex 1B 6A n ASCII ESC j n Perform Master Reset The Master Reset code initializes the printer, by resetting all special modes to their default power-up states (see the Factory Defaults paragraph in Ap-

pendix B, Cross-Reference Tables for a complete list of settings that are initialized with this command). Format Decimal 27 64 Hex 1B 40 ASCII ESC @

Set Print Position (absolute) The print head is moved to an absolute horizontal position on the paper. The distance is specified, in dots from the left margin to the new print position (at which subsequent characters are printed). Each dot represents 1/60 of an inch. The values for n1 and n2 determine the distance, as fol-

lows:

number of dots = n1 + (n2 * 256) Maximum position is 480. The previous contents of the current print buffer is printed. If the position specified would have placed the print head outside the cur-

rent margins, this function is ignored and the previous setting remains ef-

fective. This function is also ignored in right, center, and full justification modes. Format Decimal 27 36 n1 n2 Hex 1B 24 n1 n2 ASCII ESC $ n1 n2 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 67 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Set Print Position (relative) The print head is moved to a horizontal position on the paper, relative to the current print head position. The distance specified is in dots. To deter-

mine n1 and n2, first calculate the displacement required in 1/120ths of an inch. If the displacement is to the left, subtract it from 65536. The values for n1 and n2 determine the distance, as follows:

number of dots = n1 + (n2 * 256) Maximum displacement is 960. If the position specified would place the print head outside the current margins, this function is ignored and the previous setting remains in effect. This function is also ignored in right, center, and full justification modes. Format Decimal 27 92 n1 n2 ASCII ESC \ n1 n2 Hex 1B 5C n1 n2 Select Top-Down Printing Top-down printing (factory default) is enabled. The first page is printed first. Format Decimal ASCII Hex 27 31 0 1B 1F 00 ESC US (0) Select Bottom-Up Printing Bottom-up printing is enabled. The last page is printed first. Format Decimal ASCII Hex 27 31 1 1B 1F 01 ESC US (1) Select Unidirectional Printing Unidirectional mode is turned on, causing the print head to print from left-to-right only. This allows more accurate print positioning during text mode printing. Format Decimal ASCII Hex 27 85 1*

1B 55 01*

ESC U 1*

Cancel Unidirectional Printing Unidirectional mode is turned off (factory default), allowing the print head to print in both directions. Format Decimal ASCII Hex 27 85 0*

1B 55 00) ESC U 0*

68 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select Unidirectional (one line) Printing Unidirectional printing is turned on, for the current line only. The con-

tents of the print buffer is printed, and cleared, before setting this mode. This allows more accurate print positioning during text mode printing, for the current line. Format Decimal 27 60 Hex 1B 3C ASCII ESC <

Page Formatting Functions This set of functions consists of control codes that change the formatting for the page, such as page length, margins, line spacing, etc. The page length (form length) and margin settings define the printable area on the page. These settings need to conform to the actual size of the paper used in the printer. Page Length Set Page Length (lines) The length of the paper is set, in lines, where the range of n (number of lines) is 1-127 (default = 66). Keep in mind the line spacing and actual length of the paper when specifying this value, since this function is depen-

dent on those parameters. Top-of-Form is reset to the current line and the Skip Over Perforation setting is canceled. Format Decimal 27 67 n Hex 1B 43 n ASCII ESC C n Set Page Length (inches) The length of the paper is set, in inches, where the range of n (number of inches) is 1-22 (default = 11). Keep in mind the line spacing and actual length of the paper when specifying this value, since this function is depen-

dent on those parameters. Also, Top-of-Form is reset to the current line and the Skip Over Perforation setting is canceled. Format Decimal 27 67 0 n Hex 1B 43 00 n ASCII ESC C NUL n 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 69 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Line Spacing These functions set the amount of space from one line to the next, for line feeds. The factory default is 1/6 inch (6 lines per inch). The Page Length, Vertical Tab, and Skip Over Perforation functions are also dependent upon this function. Select 1/8-inch Line Spacing Line spacing is set to 1/8 of an inch (8 lines per inch), for subsequent lines. Format Decimal ASCII Hex 27 48 1B 30 ESC 0 Select 7/72-inch Line Spacing (7 dots) Line spacing is set to 7/72 of an inch (approximately 9.7 lines per inch), for subsequent lines. Format Decimal ASCII Hex 27 49 1B 31 ESC 1 Select 1/6-inch Line Spacing Line spacing is set to 1/6 of an inch (6 lines per inch), for subsequent lines

(factory default). 1/6 inch is equal to 12 dot spacing. Format Decimal 27 50 ASCII ESC 2 Hex 1B 32 Select n/216-inch Line Spacing Line spacing is set to n/216 of an inch, for subsequent lines. A spacing of 1/216 inch is 1/3 the distance between pins of the print head (approxi-

mately 1/3 of a dot) and 27/216 is 8 lines per inch. Range of n is 0255. Format Decimal ASCII Hex 27 51 n 1B 33 n ESC 33 n Select n/72-inch Line Spacing (n dots) Line spacing is set to n/72 of an inch, for subsequent lines. A spacing of 1/72 inch (1 point in font size) is the distance between pins on the print head (approximately 1 dot) and 9/72 is 8 lines per inch. Range of n is 085. Format Decimal ASCII Hex 27 59 n 1B 41 n ESC A n 70 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Set Margins Margin settings define the horizontal print area on the page. The mini-

mum space between margins is the width of one double-wide pica charac-

ter. Set Right Margin All text in the print buffer is cleared, then the right margin is set to n col-

umns, using the current character pitch. This is the number of the charac-

ters from column 1 (at the left edge of the paper) to the last column before the right margin (factory default = 80). The minimum space between margins is the width of one double-width pica character. The maximum value for this setting is the maximum num-

ber of characters (based on the current pitch) that would fit between the left margin and the right edge of the default printable area of the page. Ranges shown below could vary, depending on values of other parameters that affect character width. If the value specified is not within the allowed range, it is ignored. Range of n is 280 in Pica mode, 296 in Elite mode, and 2136 in Com-

pressed mode. Format Decimal 27 81 n Hex 1B 51 n ASCII ESC Q n Set Left Margin All text in the print buffer is cleared, then the left margin is set, relative to the number of columns to the left of the first column to be printed (facto-

ry default = 0). The minimum space between margins is the width of one double-width pica character. The maximum value must be less than the right margin. Ranges shown below could vary, depending on values of other parameters that affect character width. If the value specified for this function is not within the allowed range, it is ignored. Range of n is 078 in Pica mode; 093 in Elite mode, and 0133 in Com-

pressed mode. Format Decimal 27 108 n Hex 1B 6C n ASCII ESC I n 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 71 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Set Skip Over Perforation This function is valid for continuous paper only. The number of lines to skip between the last printed line on the page and the first printed line on the next page is set. If the value specified for this function is greater than the page length, it is ignored. This function is canceled by the use of one of the Set Page Length functions (factory default = disabled). The amount of space left blank at the bottom of the printed page is depen-

dent upon the current Line Spacing. Format Decimal 27 78 n Hex 1B 4E n ASCII ESC N n Cancel Skip Over Perforation The Skip Over Perforation is canceled, which allows the maximum number of lines to be printed on each page. Format Decimal 27 79 Hex 1B 4F ASCII ESC O Character Style and Text Mode Functions The following set of functions affect the appearance of text on the printed page. This could involve size, typeface, or other characteristics of the text. Select Condensed Mode (compressed) The condensed mode is selected, which prints characters at approximately 60% of the normal width. This results in character pitches, as shown be-

low (for exact pitch values, see Master Select, on page 75):

Condensed Mode Condensed + Expanded Condensed + Elite 17 cpi (approximate) 9 cpi (approximate) 20 cpi (approximate) This function empties the print buffer and turns compressed mode on, and stays on until canceled by Cancel Compressed Mode, ESC SI (0) or DC2

(factory default = disabled). Note that this function is not supported in Dou-

ble-byte Character Sets (DBCS). Format Decimal 27 15 15 Hex 1B 0F 0F ASCII ESC SI SI 72 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Cancel Condensed Mode (compressed) This function cancels the compressed mode, enabled by Select Compressed Mode, SI or ESC SI (1). Note that this function is not supported in DBCS. Format Decimal 27 18 18 Hex 1B 12 12 ASCII ESC DC2 DC2 Select Double-Strike Mode Double-strike printing is enabled, until Cancel Double-Strike Mode is en-

countered. Factory default disables double-strike. Text is made bolder by printing each dot twice, with the second dot slightly below the first dot. This mode is not available in NLQ, yet is not canceled by the selection of NLQ. Note that this function is not supported in DBCS. Format Decimal 27 71 Hex 1B 47 ASCII ESC G Cancel Double-Strike Mode The effect of Select Double-Strike Mode is canceled. Note that this function is not supported in DBCS. Format Decimal 27 72 Hex 1B 48 ASCII ESC H Select Double-Wide (expanded) Mode (one-line-only) Expanded print is enabled, for current line only. The mode set previously returns on subsequent lines. However, expanded print can be canceled with Cancel Expanded Print, DC4 or ESC W (0), before end of current line, or wrapping of the print buffer. This works with all three pitches

(Pica, Elite, Compressed). This mode is also terminated by the execution of a Carriage Return, Line Feed, Form Feed, Vertical Tab or wrapping of the print buffer. Note that this function is not supported in DBCS. Format Decimal 27 14 14 Hex 1B 0E 0E ASCII ESC SO SO 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 73 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Cancel Double-Wide (expanded) Print (one-line-only) Double-Wide (expanded) print mode is canceled for the current line only. Modes set previously return on subsequent lines. However, it does not cancel expanded mode set by Select Double-Wide (expanded) Mode, ESC W (1) or Master Select, ESC !. Note that this function is not supported in DBCS. Format Decimal ASCII Hex 27 20 20 1B 14 14 ESC DC4 DC4 Select Double-Wide (expanded) Mode Expanded print mode is enabled, until Cancel Expanded Print is encoun-

tered. Factory default disables double-wide mode. Note that this function is not supported in DBCS. Format Decimal ASCII Hex 27 87 1*

1B 57 01*

ESC W 1*

Cancel Double-Wide (expanded) Mode Double-wide print mode (previously set by Select Double-Wide Mode) is canceled. Note that this function is not supported in DBCS. Format Decimal ASCII Hex 27 87 0*

1B 57 00*

ESC W 0 Select Elite Pitch A character pitch of 12 cpi (characters per inch) is selected. This also can-

cels Pica Pitch (factory default = Pica). Note that this function is not sup-

ported in DBCS. Format Decimal ASCII Hex 27 77 1B 4D ESC M Select Emphasized Mode Emphasized printing is enabled, until Cancel Emphasized Mode is encoun-

tered. The text is made bolder by printing each dot twice, with the second dot slightly to the right of the first dot. Factory default disables Empha-

sized mode. Note that this function is not supported in DBCS. Format Decimal ASCII Hex 27 69 1B 4B ESC E 74 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Cancel Emphasized Mode The effect of the Select Emphasized Mode is canceled. Note that this function is not supported in DBCS. Format Decimal 27 70 Hex 1B 46 ASCII ESC F Define Intercharacter Space This function defines the amount of space to the right of each character, in addition to the space allowed in the character design. The variable n repre-

sents the number of units of space, with each unit equal to 1/120 of an inch. Range of values for n is 063 with a factory default of 0. Format Decimal 27 32 n Hex 1B 20 n ASCII ESC SP n Select Italic Mode The text (nongraphic) characters are italicized. Factory default disables Italic mode. Note that this function does not work well with DBCS or alter-

nate Single Byte Charater Sets (SBCS). Format Decimal 27 52 Hex 1B 34 ASCII ESC 4 Cancel Italic Mode The italic mode, set by the Select Italic Mode function, is canceled. Note that this function does not work well with DBCS or alternate SBCS. Format Decimal 27 53 Hex 1B 35 ASCII ESC 5 Master Select Combinations of modes are allowed with this function. The variable n is determined by combining values for the desired modes, by adding them together. Note that this function is not supported in DBCS. Format Decimal 27 33 n Hex 1B 21 n ASCII ESC ! n 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 75 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Valid combinations of the values in the following table include any com-

binations except that Pica cannot combine with Elite. An example of combining values: Pica Compressed Italic Underlined, by adding values (00h + 04h + 40h + 80h), which results in C4h for the val-

ue of n. Hex Value 00h 01h 04h 08h 10h 20h 40h 80h Mode Pica Elite Condensed (compressed) Emphasized Double-Strike Double-Width (expanded) Italic Underlined The following print conflicts occur between modes. A mode in any col-

umn takes precedence over all modes in the columns to its right. 1 Elite 2 Emphasized 3 Compressed The following print modes can be combined producing different pitches:

Pitch 5 cpi 6 cpi 8.58 cpi 10 cpi 12 cpi 17.16 cpi Mode Expanded Expanded Elite Expanded Compressed Pica Elite Compressed Select Pica Pitch A character pitch of 10 cpi (characters per inch) is selected (factory de-

fault). This also cancels Elite pitch. Note that this function is not supported in DBCS. Format Decimal 27 60 Hex 1B 50 ASCII ESC P 76 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select Superscript Mode All subsequent characters are printed approximately 2/3 the normal height in the upper part of the character space, until Cancel Subscript/Superscript is encountered. Note that this function is not supported in DBCS. Format Decimal 27 83 0*

Hex 1B 53 00*

ASCII ESC S 0*

Select Subscript Mode All subsequent characters are printed approximately 2/3 the normal height in the lower part of the character space, until Cancel Subscript/Superscript is encountered. Note that this function is not supported in DBCS. Format Decimal 27 83 1*

Hex 1B 53 01*

ASCII ESC S 1*

Cancel Subscript/Superscript Mode The effects produced by Select Superscript Mode and Select Subscript Mode are canceled. Factory default also disables both of these modes. Note that this function is not supported in DBCS. Format Decimal 27 84 Hex 1B 54 ASCII ESC I Select Underline Mode The underlining of all subsequent characters (including spaces) is enabled, until the Cancel Underline Mode function is encountered. Format Decimal 27 45 1*

Hex 1B 2D 01*

ASCII ESC 1*

Cancel Underline Mode The effect of the Select Underline Mode function is canceled. Factory de-

fault also disables the Underline mode. Format Decimal 27 45 0*

Hex 1B 2D 00*

ASCII ESC 0*

6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 77 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Tabs and Tab Setting Functions Horizontal Tabs This set of functions deals with horizontal tabs: set tabs, tab to next tab stop, clear tabs, and set tab increments. S Tab settings are not affected by subsequent changes in pitch. S Tabs may range up to maximum width for character and printer size. S All previous tab stops are cleared when new tab stops are set. Also, if the left margin is changed after the horizontal tabs are set, then all tab stops are cleared. S Tabs become absolute positions and are not affected by any subsequent change in character size. S All tabs set outside of the printable area are ignored. Perform Horizontal Tab The print position is moved to the next horizontal tab stop. The tab posi-

tions, set by ESC D, the Set Horizontal Tabs function, are not affected by any changes in character pitch. The factory default tab settings are at intervals of eight characters, in the currently selected pitch. For the default tabs, the actual distance to each tab position is affected by changes in character pitch. Format Decimal ASCII Hex 9 09 HT Set Horizontal Tabs The current horizontal tabs are reset, and new horizontal tabs are set up, based on the current character width (pitch). Format Decimal ASCII Hex 27 68 n1 n2 ... nk 0 1B 44 n1 n2 ... nk 00 ESC D n1 n2 ... nk NUL where, n1 is the first tab (range of values for tab stops: 1255), n2 is the second tab (all tabs must be in ascending order), ... are subsequent tabs

(maximum number of tabs: 32), nk is the last tab to set (any value less than the previous tab value acts as a terminating character), NUL is the terminating character. Clear Horizontal Tabs All horizontal tab stops are cleared. It is merely a variant behavior of the Set Horizontal Tabs function, where the NUL acts as an early terminating character, since the function normally clears the existing tabs before setting any new tabs. Format Decimal ASCII Hex 27 68 0 1B 44 00 ESC D NUL 78 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Vertical Tabs This set of functions deals with vertical tabs: set tabs, tab to next tab stop, clear tabs, set tab increments, set tabs in channels, and select a tab channel. S Tab positions are line numbers, counting from the Top of Form. S All tabs set beyond the page length are stored, but are not used. S Any tab set within the SOP range (Skip Over Perforation), during the time SOP is active, are stored but not used until SOP is canceled. S If a vertical tab is encountered, and the next tab stop is outside the printable page area, a form feed is executed placing the print head at the next Top of Form. S All previous tab stops are cleared when new tab stops are set. S Tab settings are not affected by subsequent changes in line spacing. Perform Vertical Tab The contents of the current print buffer are printed first, then the print position is moved to the next vertical tab stop. If no channel is selected, then channel 0 is used. The carriage position is changed to the start of the next print line. If the vertical tab is performed beyond the last tab position set or beyond the last line of a form, then a form feed is performed. If no vertical tabs are defined, then the paper advances one line, using the cur-

rently selected line spacing, without changing the carriage position. Format Decimal 11 Hex 0B ASCII VT Set Vertical Tabs The current tabs are reset, and vertical tabs are set up, based on the current line spacing. Tab settings are not affected by subsequent changes in line spacing. Format Decimal Hex ASCII 27 66 n1 n2 ... nk 0 1B 42 n1 n2 ... nk 00 ESC B n1 n2 ... nk NUL where n1 is the first tab (range of values for tab stops: 1255), n2 is the second tab (all tabs must be in ascending order), ... are subsequent tabs

(maximum number of tabs: 16), nk is the last tab to set (any value less than the previous tab value acts as a terminating character), NUL is the terminating character. All tab settings with this function are stored in channel 0. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 79 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Clear Vertical Tabs All vertical tab stops are cleared. It is merely a variant behavior of the Set Vertical Tabs function, where the NUL acts as an early terminating charac-

ter, since the function normally clears the existing tabs before setting any new tabs. Format Decimal 27 66 0 Hex 1B 42 00 ASCII ESC B NUL Set Vertical Tabs in Channel This function works the same as the Set Vertical Tabs function, except that it stores the tabs into a specified channel, as specified by the variable c. This channel is selected for use by the Select Vertical Tab Channel function. Format Decimal Hex ASCII 27 98 c n1 n2 ... nk 0 1B 62 c n1 n2 ... nk 00 ESC b c n1 n2 ... nk NUL where c is the channel number (range: 07), n1 is the first tab (range of values for tab stops: 1255), n2 is the second tab (all tabs must be in ascending order), ... are subsequent tabs (maximum number of tabs:

16), nk is the last tab to set (any value less than the previous tab value acts as a terminating character), and NUL is the terminating character. Clear Vertical Tabs in Channel All vertical tab stops in the specified channel are cleared. This is merely a variant behavior of the Set Vertical Tabs in Channel function, where the NUL acts as an early terminating character, since this function normally clears the existing tabs before setting any new tabs. Format Decimal 27 98 c 0 Hex 1B 62 c 00 ASCII ESC b c NUL Select Vertical Tab Channel A specified tab channel is selected. It sets up the current tabs from that channel. Once this function is performed, all subsequent Perform Vertical Tab commands use the tab stops from the list retrieved from the specified channel. At power on, the printer uses the tabs stored in channel 0. Format Decimal 27 47 c Hex 1B 2F c ASCII ESC / c where c is the channel number (range: 07) 80 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Character Sets and User-Defined Functions Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Different character sets may be installed in the 6820 Printer. In some cases more than one character set may be present at one time, depending on the amount of available font memory. The 6820 Printer reserves 438K of memory for installable fonts in FLASH memory. You can install these character sets using NPCP or the flash configuration utility available in the 6820 Tool Kit. They can also install in flash at the time of manufacture or service. A printer tool kit is available for installing selected font modules. Single Byte Character Sets SBCSs are supported for MS-DOS, PL/N, and Intermec application com-

patibility. NFT00000.MOD is the default character set (font) for compati-

bility with the 4820 Printer. NFT00437.MOD is the IBM/Microsoft compatible character set for codepage 437. Double-Byte Character Sets DBCSs require two bytes to send to the printer to define the character to print. The first byte of the character code sent to the printer is known as a lead-in byte. The second byte of the character code is known as the trailing byte. Different character sets have different requirements for the values of both lead-in and trailing byte. When the lead-in byte does not fall in the range listed for the character set, a character from a SBCS may print. The following double-byte character sets are supported by the 6820 Printer. DBCS Font Module NFT00936.MOD 936 NFT00950.MOD 950 NFT00932.MOD 932 NFT00949.MOD 949 Code Page DBCS Language Lead-in Byte GB 2312 Chinese

(simplified) big 5 Traditional Chinese Shift JIS Japanese A1hABh B0hF7h A1hC6h C9hF9h 81h9Fh E0hFCh KSC 5601 Korean A1hACh B0hC8h CAhFDh Trailing Byte A1hFEh 40hFEh (except 7Fh) 40hFCh (except 7Fh) A1hFEh Note: See Appendix C, Printer Font Test Jobs, for sample print jobs. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 81 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Multi-Byte Character Sets DBCS and SBCS can mix when printing a report. This mixture is referred to as a Multi-Byte Character Set (MBCS). When a DBCS is selected, the characters from the SBCS codepage currently selected are used for render-

ing character codes and control codes from 0 to 127. Codes above 127

(that fall within the range of lead-in bytes for the selected character set) treat the byte that follows as a trailing byte for that character set. Other-

wise, for character codes above 128, the character code from the selected SBCS is printed. NFT00950.MOD (BIG 5 DBCS) does not allow the MBCS mode. For this character set, only control codes from 031 are treated as single byte characters when they are not proceeded by a lead-in byte. All escape sequence character strings are treated as SBCS. Codepage Selection Multiple codepages can be present in printer font memory at one time. One SBCS and one DBCS codepage can be selected as the active code-

pages at any time for MBCS mode. The active codepage can be changed at any time by substituting the appropriate value into n1 and n2 from the International Character Sets table on the next page. Format Decimal ASCII Hex 27 82 n0 n1 n2 1B 52 n0 n1 n2 ESC R n0 n1 n2 where n0 is 255, n1 is the high byte of codepage to select, and n2 is the low byte of codepage to select. Select National Character Set By default, codepage 0 is selected by the printer at reset. The following es-

cape sequence may be used to select international character support, and is only allowed for codepage 0. All other codepages use direct character code mapping to select the appropriate font for rendering. Format Decimal ASCII Hex 27 82 n 1B 52 n ESC R n where n is 014 and is the country code, as shown in the International Character Sets table on the next page. The default value for n is zero

(USA). A full 256 character set is not provided for these sets. There are 64 interna-

tional characters stored in ROM: 32 in Roman and 32 in Italic. They are stored as codes 031 and 128255. These codes are normally not accessi-

ble. However, the ESC R command makes these codes available, but only 12 characters at a time. These 12 characters are available in these positions of the ASCII character table: 35, 36, 64, 91, 92, 93, 94, 96, 123, 124, 125, and 126, as shown in the International Character Sets table on the next page. 82 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual International Character Sets Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Country USA France Germany England (UK) Denmark 1 Sweden Italy Spain 1 Japan Norway Denmark 2 Spain 2 Latin America Hebrew Greek Country Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Hebrew Character Fonts 35

P

36

64

91

92

93

94

96 123

125

126

124

Note: Hebrew fonts are available in the supplied font files. See Hebrow Character Fonts below. Note: Greek fonts are available in the supplied font files. See the Greek Character Sets table on the next page.. 66 67 68 69 70 71 72

....... ...... ...... ...... Hebrew characters represented by decimal values 38 and 65 through 90 are represented by the following 7x7 font descriptions.

....... ...... ...... ...... 65

....... ...... ...... ...... 73

....... ...... ...... ...... 81

....... ...... ...... ...... 89

....... ...... 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 90 38 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 83 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Greek Character Sets Dec Hex Chr 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 A B E Z H Dec 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 Hex Chr 69 6a 6b 6c 6d 6e 6f 70 I K M N O Dec 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 Hex Chr 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 P T Y X Note: See Appendix C, Printer Font Test Jobs, for sample print jobs. The selected set stays in effect until the printer is reset and receives a Mas-

ter Reset command, or a new international character set is selected. Note that this function is only used with the default character set. User Defined Characters The following code deals with user defined characters and their selection into memory. Note: RAM-based definition or redefinition of standard characters is only useful when the default SBCS codepage is selected. There is no method to redefine characters in the other codepages, since unique codepages can be created and loaded into the printer font memory (flash) for use. Copy ROM to RAM The characters in ROM are copied into RAM, so a complete user-defined character set is created by editing selected characters. This ensures that all characters are defined when a user-defined character set is selected. This eliminates the need to unselect the user-defined character set when print-

ing defined characters. Note that this function is only useful with the default SBCS character set. Format Decimal 27 58 0 0 0 Hex ASCII 1B 3A 00 00 00 ESC : NUL NUL NUL 84 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Define User-Defined Characters Characters are redefined by the user in the currently selected mode. How-

ever, they can only be used in draft mode. Note that this function is only useful with the default SBCS character set. Format Decimal 27 38 0 k1 k2 s1 Hex 1B 26 00 k1 k2 s1 d1 ... d11 d1 ... d11 ASCII ESC & NUL k1 k2 s1 d1 ... d11 where k1 is the character code of the first character to redefine, k2 is the character code of the last character to redefine (any character between 0255 can be redefined), and ter is defined).

(k1 could equal k2, if only one charac-

For each character defined, 12 bytes of data must be supplied, as follows:

where s1 is the first byte that describes the character format. Bits 03 represent the end position in the grid, bits 46 represent the start posi-

tion in the grid, and bit 7 determines whether the character uses the top eight pins or the bottom eight pins of the print head. If bit 7 = 0, the top eight pins are used. If bit 7 = 1, the bottom eight pins are used. The start and end positions are ignored during character imaging, but must be accurate to redefine the character code. d1...d11 is the data that com-

prises the dot image pattern of the defined character. When printable code expansion is enabled with ESC I, the Printable Code Area Expansion function, and the user-defined character set is selected with ESC % (1), the Select User-Defined Set function, then the codes

(less than 20h and greater than 7Fh) can be defined for use and are print-

able. When printable code expansion is enabled with the Enable Printing of Codes 128-255 function, and the user-defined character set is selected with the Select User-Defined Set function, then codes (between 80h and 9Fh) can be defined for use and are printable. For a list of these characters, refer to the Printable Code Expansion Charac-

ters table on page 87. Select User-Defined Character Set A user-defined character set can be selected, after the Define User-Defined Characters function is used to define the character set. Note hhis function is only useful with the default SBCS Character Set. Format Decimal 27 37 1 Hex 1B 25 01 ASCII ESC % (1) 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 85 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select Default Character Set If the Select User-Defined Set function was previously set, this function switches back to the default character set. Note this function is only useful with the default SBCS character set. Format Decimal 27 37 0 Hex 1B 25 00 ASCII ESC % (0) Enable Printing of Codes 128-255 All codes (128255) are treated as printable characters, rather than control codes, with this function. This allows the use of these characters for user-

defined characters. A user-defined set must be selected, using the Select User-Defined Set function, before these characters can print. Factory de-

fault disables printing of these codes. Note this function is only useful with the default SBCS character set. This function is only available when the default SBCS character set is se-

lected. Format Decimal 27 54 Hex 1B 36 ASCII ESC 6 Disable Printing of Codes 128-255 This disables the printing of codes (128255), set by Enable Printing of Codes 128255. By default, these codes are disabled. Format Decimal 27 55 Hex 1B 37 ASCII ESC 7 86 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Expand Printable Code Area This function allows certain ASCII codes (00h to 1Fh) and codes (80h to 9Fh) to be printable when the variable n is set to the value of 1. This al-

lows the use of these codes for user-defined characters. If n = 0, the func-

tion returns these two ranges of characters to non-printable control codes. A user-defined character set must be selected by ESC % (1), the Enable Printing of Codes 128-255 function, before these codes can print. In both ranges, only the following codes can redefine as printable characters. Codes not listed, within the range (00h1Fh), print as standard control codes. Codes not listed, within the range (80h-9Fh), are converted to a control code in the range of (00h-1Fh), by subtraction of 80h. Note this function is only useful with the default SBCS character set. Format Decimal 27 73 n Hex 1B 49 n ASCII ESC I n Printable Code Expansion Characters Hex Hex ASCII ASCII Hex 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 10 NUL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK DLE 11 15 16 17 1C 1D 1E 1F DC1 NAK SYN ETB FS GS RS US 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 90 ASCII Hex ASCII none none none none none none none none 91 95 96 97 9C 9D 9E 9F none none none none none none none none Enable Printing of Character Graphics The printing of character graphics is enabled, until disabled with the Dis-

able Printing of Character Graphics function. Note this function is only useful with the default SBCS character set. Format Decimal 27 116 1 Hex 1B 74 01 ASCII ESC t (1) For character values from 0 to 31 (00h1Fh):

S When the default SBCS codepage is selected, the FX-86e IBM character graphics symbol set is printed. S When other SBCS codepages are selected, the codes (00h-1Fh), listed above in the Printable Code Expansion Characters table are printed. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 87 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions For character values from 32 to 126 (20h7Eh):

S When the default SBCS codepage is selected, the selected international character set is printed. S When other SBCS codepages are selected, the international character set selection is not in effect. For the character value 127 (7Fh):

S When the default SBCS codepage is selected, a space is printed S When other SBCS codepages are selected, the character associated with the codepage is printed. For character values from 128 to 255 (80hFFh), the FX-86e Epson Char-

acter Graphics set is printed. Disable Printing of Character Graphics The printing of character graphics is disabled. Factory default disables this function. Format Decimal 27 116 0 Hex 1B 74 00 ASCII ESC t (0) Print Character Graphics This function allows printing of character graphics from the currently se-

lected SBCS codepage, by sending a graphics string to the printer. The val-

ues of the graphics data bytes can range between 0255. Format Decimal Hex ASCII 27 43 n d1 ... dn 1B 2B n d1 ... dn ESC + n d1 ... dn where n is the length of the character graphic string and d1 ... dn are the character graphics data stream. The number of data bytes must be equal to the value of the variable n. The range of values (for the characters in each graphics data byte): 0255 For character values from 0 to 31 (00h1Fh):

S When the default SBCS codepage is selected, the FX-86e IBM character graphics symbol set is printed. S When other SBCS codepages are selected, currently selected single byte codepage character graphics are printed. For character values from 32 to 126 (20h7Eh):

S When the default SBCS codepage is selected, the selected international character set is printed. S When other SBCS codepages are selected, the character from the cur-

rently selected codepage are printed. 88 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Graphics Functions Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions For the character value 127 (7Fh):

S When the default SBCS codepage is selected, a space is printed S When other SBCS codepages are selected, the character graphics symbol is printed. For character values from 128 to 255 (80hFFh):

S When the default SBCS codepage is selected, the FX-86e Epson Char-

acter Graphics set is printed. S When other SBCS codepages are selected, the corresponding character is printed. Eight-Pin Graphics Modes All 8-pin graphics functions require parameters, n1 and n2, which repre-

sent the length of the graphics string that follows the Select Graphics Mode command, and are calculated as follows (assuming a temporary variable n):

n = total number of graphics dots needed for the graphic string n2 = integer of (n divided by 256) n1 = remainder of the n2 calculation The simplest calculation, is to divide n (total number of dots needed for the graphics string) by 256. Then n2 is the quotient (the whole number) and n1 is the remainder. If you require less than 256 dots (columns), then n1 indicates the number of dots and n2 is set to zero. Select Graphics Mode The graphic mode, represented by the variable m (Graphics Modes table) is enabled. The total number of dot columns to print is represented by n1 and n2 (see parameter descriptions above). Any graphic string that exceeds the length of the print line is discarded. Format Decimal 27 42 m n1 n2 Hex 1B 2A m n1 n2 ASCII ESC * m n1 n2 Reassign Graphics Mode Graphic modes (shown in table below) can be changed with this function. Format Decimal 27 63 s n Hex 1B 3F s n ASCII ESC ? s n where s is one of the K, I, Y, or Z characters and n is one of the 07 modes as shown in the Graphics Mode table on the next page. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 89 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Graphics Modes Mode m Dots per Inch / Dots per 8 Line 0 Single-density 1 Low Speed Double-density High Speed Double-density see note 2 Low-Speed Quadruple-density see note 3 CRT I 4 5 Single-Density Plotter 6 CRT II Double-Density Plotter see note 7 60 dots per inch, 480 dots per 8 inch line 120 dots per inch, 960 dots per 8 line 120 dots per inch, 920 dots per 8 line 240 dots per inch, 1920 dots per 8 line 60 dots per inch, 480 dots per 8 line 72 dots per inch, 576 dots per 8 line 90 dots per inch, 720 dots per 8 line 144 dots per inch, 1152 dots per 8 line Note: Adjacent dots, in a given row, cannot be printed in these modes. Select Single Density Graphics Mode This is a simple method of printing graphics. The resolution is 60 dots per inch. Each 8-inch line can accommodate 480 columns of graphic dots. A graphic string that exceeds the length of the print line is discarded. Calcu-

lating the parameters, n1 and n2, is described on page 89. Format Decimal 27 75 n1 n2 Hex 1B 4B n1 n2 ASCII ESC K n1 n2 Select Low-Speed Double Density Graphics Mode If Single Density graphics does not produce high enough density, try this mode. The number of dots per inch is doubled. However, the speed is re-

duced to half of what it would be with single density. Calculating the pa-

rameters, n1 and n2, is described on page 89. This is 8-pin single density graphics. The resolution is now 120 dots per inch. Each 8-inch line can accommodate 960 columns of graphic dots. A graphic string that exceeds the length of the print line is discarded. Format Decimal 27 76 n1 n2 Hex 1B 4C n1 n2 ASCII ESC L n1 n2 90 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select High-Speed Double Density Graphics Mode This 8-pin graphics mode produces the same density as the Low-Speed Double Density mode, however, the speed is doubled. Calculating the pa-

rameters, n1 and n2, is described on page 89. Format Decimal 27 89 n1 n2 Hex 1B 59 n1 n2 ASCII ESC Y n1 n2 The resolution is still 120 dots per inch. Each 8-inch line can accommo-

date 960 columns of graphic dots. A graphic string that exceeds the length of the print line is discarded. Take care that adjacent dots in a given dot row are not printed. Select Low-Speed Quadruple Density Graphics Mode With this 8-pin graphics mode, the number of dots per inch has gone up to 4x what it was in single density. Calculating the parameters, n1 and n2, is described on page 89. Format Decimal 27 90 n1 n2 Hex 1B 5A n1 n2 ASCII ESC Z n1 n2 The resolution is now 240 dots per inch. Each 8-inch line can accommo-

date 1920 columns of graphic dots. A graphic string that exceeds the length of the print line is discarded. Take care that adjacent dots in a given dot row are not printed. Nine-Pin Graphics Modes These 9-pin graphics functions also require two parameters, n1 and n2. However, they are calculated slightly different than in the 8-pin graphics modes. Since each dot column to print must be represented by two data bytes, the total length of the graphic string (following the Select ... Graphics Mode command) needs to first be divided by two. These parameters are calculated as follows (assuming a temporary variable n):

n = total number of dots needed, divided by 2 n2 = integer of (n divided by 256) n1 = remainder of the n2 calculation First, divide n (the total number of dots needed for the graphics string) by 2, then divide the result by 256. Then n2 is the quotient (the whole num-

ber) and n1 is the remainder. If you require less than 256 dots (columns), then n1 indicates the number of dots and n2 is set to zero. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 91 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select 9-Pin Single Density Graphics Mode Single density, 9-pin graphics mode is enabled. Calculating the parameters, n1 and n2, is described previously under Nine-Pin Graphics Modes. Format Decimal Hex ASCII 27 94 0 n1 n2 1B 5E 00 n1 n2 ESC ^ (0) n1 n2 The resolution is 60 dots per inch. Each 8-inch line can accommodate 480 columns of graphic dots. A graphic string that exceeds the length of the print line is discarded. Select 9-Pin Double Density Graphics Mode Double density, 9-pin graphics mode is enabled. Calculating the parame-

ters, n1 and n2, is described previously under Nine-Pin Graphics Modes. Format Decimal 27 94 1 n1 n2 Hex 1B 5E 01 n1 n2 ASCII ESC ^ (1) n1 n2 The resolution is now 120 dots per inch. Each 8-inch line can accommo-

date 960 columns of graphic dots. A graphic string that exceeds the length of the print line is discarded. 92 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Page Layout for Fanfold Paper Printable Area The following illustration shows the printable area of the lower section of a page of fanfold paper and the upper section of the next page. The Assured Print Area is the best overall area in which to use for printing:

(area 2) 0.75 inch

(or more) Paper width Assured Print Area 8 inches Max.

) g n i c a p s e n i l 6

1 t a

. x a m s e n i l 5 5 a e r A t n i r P d e r u s s A

(area 2) 0.75 inch

(or more) Paper End Detection Position Abcdef... ..Xyz 1 inch

(area 1) 1 inch

(area 1) Abcdef... Perforation 1.8333 inches (11 lines)

(area 3)

...Xyz Generally, you should leave a 1-inch margin at both the top and the bot-

tom of the page. This provides for a margin of six lines at 1/6 inch line spacing. Even though printing in area 1 (before or after the perforation) may be possible, you should keep in mind that paper feed precision is reli-

able only within the Assured Print Area. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 93 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Paper End Detection However, consider the following:

S The top and bottom margins are represented by Area 1, as shown in the previous illustration. The top margin is defined as the distance between the top edge of the paper and the first row of printed characters. The bottom margin is defined as the distance between the last row of printed characters and the bottom edge of the paper. S There is a possibility that printing can start within one line below the perforation and printing could continue beyond the Assured Print Area, however paper feed precision is only reliable with top and bottom mar-

gins of approximately one inch. Basically, you should consider there are only 55 lines available for reliable printing. S The left and right margins are represented by Area 2. For reliable print-

ing, use a margin of at least 0.75 inch at the left and right edges of the paper. The Paper End Detection line shown in the previous illustration represents the point at which the Paper Out sensor detects the bottom edge of the pa-

per. Area 3 represents the the distance between the the Paper End Detection position and the bottom edge of the page. Once the last page of the fanfold paper stack is in the printer, and the print head has advanced past this Paper End Detection line, printing is no longer reliable. Also, once the bottom end of the last page has advanced through the print-

er, past the spring plate along the front of the platen, the paper should not reverse back through the printer, because the printer could jam and cause paper feed problems. Design applications to prevent any reverse paper feed from occurring after the Paper Out sensor has detected the bottom edge of the paper. 94 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 6 Bluetooth Adapter This chapter provides general information and configuration information about the Bluetooth adapter that you may have upgraded to for your 6820 Printer. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 95 Chapter 6 Bluetooth Adapter About the Bluetooth Adapter The Bluetooth adapter connects to an internal serial port of the 6820 Printer, providing serial print data over a transparent Bluetooth link, run-

ning a Serial Port Profile (SPP). Once your 6820 Printer is upgraded to Bluetooth with this adapter, the 6820 Printer no longer supports NPCP (NorandR Portable Communica-

tions Protocol), and instead prints using the Epson DTR mode. Printing is primarily accomplished over a Bluetooth link using the SPP protocol with a 700 Series Computer. If the relevant printer configuration allows it, a 700 Series Computer in a terminal holder charges normally. The Bluetooth adapter allows for four states or modes to be available. Each state is dependent upon either the pin states on the terminal holder con-

nector or the programming connector on the adapter described later. State State/mode HHC_A/B pin HHC_DTR pin Comments 1 2 3 4 Bluetooth Printing Pass-through printing 0 0 Bluetooth Reconfiguration 1 Bluetooth programming cabled X 0 1 0 X Bluetooth printing/Bluetooth self-test Printing from 700 Series or CK60 Handheld Computers allowed to pass-through the Blue-

tooth adapter transparently. Reconfiguring Bluetooth module via 700 Se-

ries or CK60 Handheld Computer Programming Bluetooth module via program-

ming cable S State 1 In addition to allowing normal Bluetooth printing, this state also allows for a 700 Series or CK60 Handheld Computer in the termi-

nal holder to perform a Bluetooth self-test. S State 2 is a Transparent Pass Through mode available for all 700 Series and CK60 Handheld Computers. During this mode, the Bluetooth module is shut down and does not communicate. S State 3 (Bluetooth reconfiguring using a 700 Series or CK60 Handheld Computer). This state is unavailable when a 700 Monochrome Com-

puter is used, since the A/B pin is unavailable. S State 4 allows for programming the Bluetooth module via its SPI pins. This state is also used for manufacturing tests. To be in this state, the 700 Series or CK60 Handheld Computer must not have an open termi-

nal holder COM port and the specially designed programming adapter must be engaged. 96 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Bluetooth Adapter Indicators Chapter 6 Bluetooth Adapter The interfaces on the Bluetooth adapter that allow for the different modes are detailed below:

700 Series or CK60 Handheld Computer to 6820 Pass Through Note: Pass through printing requires shutting down the Bluetooth portion of the adapter. To reenable Bluetooth functionality after you finish pass through printing, press a button on the control panel to wake the printer. When DTR on the 700 Series or CK60 Handheld Computer is set, the adapter board automatically opens a path between the 700 Series or CK60 Handheld Computer and the 6820 Transition/DC Board and powers down the Bluetooth module. Testing the DSR pin to reflect DTR allows the mobile computer to differentiate between a Bluetooth-equipped termi-

nal holder and a non-Bluetooth equipped terminal holder. 700 Series or CK60 Handheld Computer to Bluetooth Module Communication Interface The Bluetooth adapter allows a 700 Series or CK60 Handheld Computer to communicate directly with the Bluetooth module under two circum-

stances. S When the configuration settings of the Bluetooth module are to print. S When the Bluetooth module requires reconfiguration. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 97 Chapter 6 Bluetooth Adapter Bluetooth Adapter Power Management Flow Bluetooth Power Management Flow Diagram Radio Power On/Off Mechanism Note: The shutdown timer configuration is addressed in Appendix A, Bluetooth Configuration Commands. As stated earlier, the Bluetooth adapter, including the Bluetooth radio shuts down after a configurable time (default is two hours). To wake the Bluetooth adapter, the 6820 Printer is powered on by any button push on the printer control panel. There are two ways to shutdown the Bluetooth module power:

S A 700 Series or CK60 Handheld Computer initiates a pass through mode, or S The Bluetooth module sends a shutdown signal after a configurable amount of time. Default is two hours. 98 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Security Persistent Storage Chapter 6 Bluetooth Adapter The adapter complies with Bluetooth 1.1 specification, including bonding for authentication and enabling encryption. These settings do not reset after a cold-boot is performed on the printer:

S Bluetooth Bonding Enablement/Disablement S Bluetooth Encryption Enablement/Disablement S Bluetooth Passkey S Bluetooth Bonding List (Link Keys) S Bluetooth Device Name S Bluetooth Class of Device S Discoverable setting S Connectable setting S Radio Shutdown Timer Timeout (default two hours) System Behavior/Software Considerations S Discoverability The default mode is Discoverable. When configured to be Discoverable, the adapter is discoverable at all times, except when an active Bluetooth connection exists. S Connectability The default mode is Connectable. When configured to be Connectable, the printer is connectable at all times, except when an active Bluetooth connection exists. S Link Loss The 6820 Bluetooth adapter is able to recover from bro-

ken Bluetooth connections, including out of range, interference, power failure, or any other condition resulting in a broken connection. It re-

turns to its previous Discoverable/Connectable state after a lost connec-

tion. S Master/Slave Printer shall participate in a Bluetooth connection as the Slave device. S The Class of Device is 0x040680 which translates to a Service Class of Rendering, a Major Device Class of Imaging, and a Minor Device Class of Printer. S The 6820 Bluetooth includes an SDP record that allows the printer to report an SPP instance with a Service Name of Wireless Printer. S The default Bluetooth Device Name is 6820-DDEEFF, where DDEEFF matches the respective portion of the Bluetooth Device Ad-

dress (AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF). If the printer the adapter is connecting to is known, the Device Name is changed to 6820-SN, where SN is re-

placed with the serial number of the 6820. S The 6820 Bluetooth adapter can save 16 link keys across cold boots. Link keys are saved in a circular list. The 17th link key replaces the first, the 18th replaces the 2nd, and so on. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 99 Chapter 6 Bluetooth Adapter Remote Configuration You can query the following items:

S Discoverable State [Get/Set]

S Connectable State [Get/Set]

S Bondable State [Get/Set] (Authentication) S Encryption State [Get/Set]

S Device Name [Get/Set]

S Device Address[Get]

S Class of Device[Get/Set]

S Service Name [Get/Set]

S Bluetooth Profile [Get]

S Bluetooth Passkey [Set] (Get the fact that it is set) S Radio Shutdown Timeout Bluetooth Performance S Range Operating range is expected to range from a minimum separa-

tion of 10cm to over 10m with a 700 Color or CK60 Handheld Com-

puter. S Link Loss can occur when going in or out of range while communicat-

ing with other Bluetooth devices. Degradation in range and data throughput is expected when in automobile cabins or when involved in intermittent loss of line-of-sight (communications across a busy road). 100 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 6 Bluetooth Adapter Diagnostics Capabilities Radio Self Test The Bluetooth radio settings are available to a user. The 6820 Bluetooth adapter sends a print out of Bluetooth information to the printer upon re-

ceiving a message from a 700 Series or CK60 Handheld Computer in a terminal holder. The self-test appears like the following. Version YYYY MMDD HHMM 6820 Bluetooth Adapter Firmware:

Bluetooth Configuration:

Device Address: 0002371A0FD3 6820-9843252 Device Name:

Discoverable:

Yes Connectable:

Yes Authentication: No Encryption:

Passkey:

No Stored Link Keys: 2 of 16 Power Management:

Shut Off Timer: 120 minutes Not Applicable (or Key present if Authentication is enabled) The Passkey entry either states Not Applicable or Key Present depend-

ing on the Authentication state. Tabs ensure items line up in columns as shown in this example. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 101 Chapter 6 Bluetooth Adapter Applications A 6820 Bluetooth Information application that prints the Bluetooth self-

test information on the 6820 Printer can be installed on your 700 Series or CK60 Handheld Computer. Do the following to use this application:

1 Insert the 700 Series or CK60 Handheld Computer in the terminal holder on the 6820 Printer. 2 From the 700 Series or CK60 Handheld Computer, tap Start > Pro-

grams > the 6820 BT Information icon. 3 On the 6820 Printer, press the SET PAGE button on the printer con-

trol panel to wake the printer. 4 From the 6820BT Self-Test screen, tap Trigger Self Test to print the information. Note: A GUI tool for Adapter configuration is not a deliverable of this product. The adapter is configurable via the Bluetooth Configuration Commands. See Appendix A, Bluetooth Configuration Commands for de-

tails. 102 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 6 Bluetooth Adapter System Qualification Operation Resilience Normal operation of the Bluetooth system is available in environments with radio backbones, including 802.11b, Spectrum 24, and OpenAir technologies. Environmental Specifications Temperature The device must operate from -20C to +60C, and must be capable of non-operating storage from -30C to +70C. Test Range Comments Operating Cold to Hot Transition 20 C to 50 C External condensation allowed, internal prohibited Operating Hot to Cold Transition 50 C to 20 C Speed shall not degrade Humidity Operating Storage 5% to 95% RH non-condensing 90% 25 60 C (no condensation) 90% 25 60 C (no condensation) Altitude 100 to 5000 meters Vibration Quasi-Random 3 axis Dynamic Induced Shock Operating Storage When packed Frequency Acceleration Sweep Duration Directions 12g RMS, for four hours 20g on 3 axis 1G 5 Hz to 80 Hz 3G 5 Hz to 80 Hz 5 to 55 Hz 2 G 10 minutes (half cycle) 1 hour x, y, and z No external or internal damage should be found after the vibration test, and the unit should operate normally. Unpackaged Drop 2 feet to concrete Terminal Inspection Minimum of 30,000 insertions for the terminal holder. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 103 Chapter 6 Bluetooth Adapter Safety/Regulatory/Agency Requirements Product Safety Vehicle Power Interfaces EMC Digital device radiated and conducted emissions EN 55024 Immunity

(Europe) AC power supply

(Europe) Radio Type Approval Additional Approvals The Bluetooth adaptor within the 6820 Printer, including all options, must meet these electrical safety requirements for Information Technology Equipment. The test configuration must include a portable computer con-

nected to the 6820 Printer, continuously printing the letter H. At least 6dB of margin below the relevant limits must be demonstrated. UL Listed per UL 1950 / UL 60950 (Printer and AC power supply) CSA C22.2, No. 950 TUV/GS License per EN 60950 (Printer, ac power supply) CB Report for EN 60950 covering all country deviations (Printer, ac power supply) UL 2089 (for cigarette lighter-style adapters) SAE J1113 or ISO 7637 FCC Class B (US); Industry Canada ICES-003 Class B (Canada) Surge CISPR 22 Class B, including telecom port conducted (Europe) AS/NZS 3548 (Australia/New Zealand); CNS 13438 (Taiwan) IEC 61000-4-2 Electrostatic Discharge IEC 61000-4-3 Radiated RF Field IEC 61000-4-4 Electrical Fast Transients IEC 61000-4-5 IEC 61000-4-6 Conducted RF IEC 61000-4-8 Magnetic Field IEC 61000-4-11 Voltage Dips and Interrupts (AC printers only). IEC 61000-3-2 (per Amendment 14) Class A if under 70 Watts loaded to 90% of rated value, Class D if over 70 Watts loaded to 90% of rated value IEC 61000-3-3 Voltage Fluctuation and Flicker. Bluetooth Radio - Modular radio approval is required. BT SIG approval is not mandatory but BT SIG GAP and SPP conformance is a prerequisite. FCC Part 15.247 (US) RSS-210 (Canada - indoor operation, unlicensed. Outdoor operation IF restricted to 2.450-2.4835GHz) RSS-139 (Canada - indoor/outdoor operation, licensed. 2.400-2.4835GHz) RSS-102 (Canada) - RF Exposure/SAR. Keep antennas more than 8 inches from operator to avoid SAR testing EN 300 328-1 & -2; EN 300 489-1 & 17 (Europe). SCT (Mexico) IEC950 2nd Edition, 4th Amendment or IEC 60950 3rd Edition, resulting in a GS Mark and a CB Report addressing all country deviations S Mark for Argentina for any device connecting directly to the AC mains CCIB Approval for China for any device connecting directly to the AC mains Mexico NOM 19 as applicable 104 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Default Configuration Chapter 6 Bluetooth Adapter Bluetooth Authentication Discoverable Connectable Class of Device Service Name Device Name Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits Parity Handshaking Radio Shutdown Timeout Off True True 0x040680 Wireless Printer 6820-DDEEFF 19,200 8 1 None Hardware 120 Minutes 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 105 Chapter 6 Bluetooth Adapter 106 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 7 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics This chapter helps you correct printing problems that may occur. If you experience a printing problem, you can perform several tests to find and possibly cure the problem. This chapter also contains troubleshooting strategies for the 6820 Printer, and a detailed listing of the Diagnostics Information table. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 107 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Checking the Power Source Press any key on the printer control panel. If there is power, the power in-

dicator (green LED) turns on and the print head moves to its starting posi-

tion. If the printer emits beeps and any of the other indicators light up or flash, observe the number of beeps and indicator flashes and refer to the Printer Failure Indicators table on page 119. If there is no reaction from the printer after you press a key on the control panel, or only the green power light blinks, verify that the power cables are properly connected between the printer mechanism and its power source

(internal battery, vehicle cable, or ac). If none of these steps wake up the printer with the problem, then you need to return the printer for service. S Internal battery: Check the battery and its cable by installing into another known-good printer. S Vehicle cable: Attach the printer in question to another vehicle power cable. S AC power: Plug the printer into another outlet. If a partial report generates and a printer error occurs during printing, refer to the table on the next page for troubleshooting help. If the printer does not generate a report:

S There may be a printer failure, refer to the troubleshooting table on the next page for possible solutions. S There may be a power failure, check the power source (internal battery, charge cable, or ac adaptor). Self-Test Failure 108 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Printer Mechanism Alignment If head jams are occurring, the alignment of the printer mechanism may need correction. Open the printer top cover, then install a ribbon cartridge (see page 16) and position the print head to the far left toward the green thumb wheel. Observe the area between the print head and the printer cavity (circled in the following illustration). If the ribbon cartridge touches the pivot frame or press nut, the printer mechanism needs realignment. Press nut Pivot frame This illustration shows the print head to the far left in the printer. 1 Loosen the four screws that hold the mechanism in place using a Phil-

lips screwdriver (see the following illustration). 2 Realign by pushing the printer mechanism to the right, away from the green thumb wheel. 3 Push on the right side of the printer mechanism to the back as far as it will go. Note: In this position, the right back edge of the printer mechanism may touch the pivot frame. The left side must NOT touch the pivot frame. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 109 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics 4 Hold the printer mechanism in this position and securely tighten the screws in the sequence shown. 3 Top Left 1 Top Right Push mechanism to the back 2 Bottom Left Push mechanism to the right. 4 Bottom Right The four position screws that hold down the printer mechanism are shown in this illustration. Be sure to do the screws in the order given. The position of the print head should NOT touch the pivot frame or press nut. If the print head does touch the pivot frame or press nut, return the printer for hardware repair. Communications or Host Computer The self-test report can verify that the communications protocol options selected for the printer match those expected by the host computer. If these options do not match, then reconfigure the printer using the control panel configuration modes. If the protocol options do match, then the data communications cable may be defective. Verify that the cable is working by substituting a new cable or host computer. Also, check the computer vehicle dock. 110 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Communications Pin-Out Configurations Below are common cable configurations between a mobile computer or a dock and the printer:

Mobile Computer Signal Name Chassis Ground Charge Input SG (Signal Ground) DSR (Data Set Ready) DTR (Data Terminal Ready) CTS (Clear To Send) RTS (Ready To Send) RXD (Receive Data) TXD (Transmit Data) Dock_A/B_SW Pin #

Pin #

Wall Mount Printer or Remote Mount Terminal Holder Signal Name shield 1 9 7 6 20 5 4 3 2 12 shell 8 9 7 2 6 3 5 4 NC NC (No Connection) HHC_CHARGE GND DTR NC RTS CTS TXD RXD Term A/B 8 1 15 9 13 1 25 14 15-Pin DSUB Male 25-Pin DSUB Male 15-Pin to 25-Pin Cable P/N: 216-605-XXX 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 111 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics PC Signal Name DTR (Data Terminal Ready)*

RC (Receive Carrier) TC (Transmit Carrier) DCD (Data Carrier Detect) SG (Signal Ground) DSR (Data Set Ready)*

CTS (Clear To Send) RTS (Ready To Send) RXD (Receive Data) TXD (Transmit Data) Pin #

Pin #

20 17 15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 20 17 15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Wall Mount Printer Signal Name NC (No Connection) NC NC NC GND DTR RTS CTS TXD RXD

* Signals are not available on the 6100 Dock 1 13 14 25 13 1 25 14 25-Pin DSUB Female 25-Pin DSUB Male 25-Pin to 25-Pin Cable P/N: 216-771-XXX 112 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics PC Printer Signal Name Pin #

Pin #

Signal Name TXD (Transmit Data) RXD (Receive Data) RTS (Ready To Send) CTS (Clear To Send) DSR (Data Set Ready) SG (Signal Ground) 3 2 7 8 6 5 4 5 3 6 7 9 RCT TXD CTS RTS DTR (Data Terminal Ready) GND Chassis Ground shield shell

. shell 8 Chassis Ground Terminal Charge out to computer 1 5 6 9 1 8 9 15 9-Pin DSUB Female 15-Pin DSUB Female 9-Pin to 15-Pin Cable P/N: 226-016-XXX 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 113 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Dock Signal Name TXD (Transmit Data) DTR (Data Terminal Ready) RTS (Ready To Send) RXD (Receive Data) CTS (Clear To Send) DSR (Data Set Ready)*

SG (Signal Ground) Pin #

Pin #

Printer w/ 6210 Terminal Holder Signal Name 2 20 4 3 5 6 7 open 4 2 3 5 6 7 9 shield RXD NC (No Connection CTS TXD RTS DTR GND shell

* Signal is not available on the 6100 Dock 13 1 25 14 8 1 15 9 25-Pin DSUB Male 15-Pin DSUB Female 25-Pin to 15-Pin Cable P/N: 226-162-XXX 114 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics PC Pin #

Pin #

Printer 6 5 3 2 1 7 5 3 2 8 9 6 5 1 1 6 9-Pin DSUB Male RJ-11 Jack Data Communications Cable P/N: 226-270-XXX 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 115 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics The printer has a 25-pin connector with the following pinout designations and signal mnemonics:

Printer Communications Connector Pin-Outs 15-Pin D-Sub 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Type Signal Name NC NC RS-232 CTS (Clear To Send) RS-232 RXD (Receive Data) RS-232 TXD (Transmit Data) RTS (Ready To Send) RS-232 DTR (Data Terminal Ready) RS-232 HHC_CHARGE GND NC IO_SENSE 25-Pin D-Sub NC 20 4 2 3 5 6 9 7 NC 11 NC 12 13 14 NC NC 12 18 25 NC NC NC DOCK_A/B_SW IOB_RESET TTL_POWER NC NC V_IN I/O IN IN OUT OUT OUT POWER OUT POWER 05 V ANALOG IN OUT TTL POWER OUT IN IN Description NC (No Connection) NC Wake up Printers RxD Printers TxD IrDA baud rate select IrDA baud rate select 7.515 V, up to 1 A per contact SG (Signal Ground) Analog input signal for I/O board type detection. Normally tied to +5 V. Bluetooth Adapter configuration signal Signal to hold I/O board in reset. Power for I/O board logic (never shuts off) Switched 5 V from computer. Unswitched input power from printer. 116 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Troubleshooting The printing system is composed of four basic components: Printer, Com-

puter, Power Source, and Communications. Any one of these components can prevent the printer from functioning properly. Verifying the Printer Components Power Source Verification Start by verifying that power is available at the printer. Visually inspect the control panel to verify that the power indicator (Green LED) is lit. If it is not, press the SET PAGE button and note if the power indicator lights up. If it does, the power system is all right. If it does not, press the printer reset button. If the power indicator still does not light, check the power cable, by connecting it to a different printer. If the power indicator works on the new printer, then the cable is all right, and the printer that was originally connected is suspect. If it does not light, then the problem is most likely the cable or the power source. Depending on the results, either replace the cable or return the printer for service. Printer Verification If the power indicator works properly and the printer still does not print, then printer errors are noted. If any indicators light when the SET PAGE button is pressed, or the printer beeps, then refer to the Printer Failure In-

dicators table to determine the problem. If none of the listed conditions are indicated by the beep codes and LEDs, yet the printer does not perform properly, then perform a printer self-test. Press and hold (for several seconds) the FORM FEED and SET PAGE buttons at the same time, until the printer beeps and all indicator lights come on. The lights change throughout the test, as it progresses. At the end of the self-test, the printer generates a report. This report veri-

fies the following: errors detected during self-test, the error history, and the communication configuration. If the printer self-test report does not print, then reset the printer. If the report does print after resetting, then the printer is all right and the reason the printer does not respond to host com-

puter print requests is probably communications or host computer related. If the report is partially completed, and a printer error occurs during the printing of self-test, refer to the Printer Failure Indicators table for the cause of the printer failure. Perform a Power On Self-Test (POST) to test for errors either by resetting the printer or powering it up. If any errors, audible error codes, along with indicator light status, are produced during POST (see the POST Error Codes table). If the POST completes without error, try the printer self-test again. If self-test prints correctly this time, but the printer does not respond to the host computer, then the problem may be communications or host com-

puter related. If errors are encountered during POST, contact Customer Support for assistance. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 117 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Error Handling Communications / Host Computer Verification Use the self-test report to verify that the communications protocol options, selected at the printer, match those expected by the host. If they do not match the expected results, reconfigure the printer using the control panel configuration modes described below in the Configuration part of this chapter. If the protocol options match, then the communications cable may be de-

fective. To determine if the cable is working, substitute a new cable. If the host computer is suspect, substitute a different host computer. A defective computer dock might be another possibility. Printer Errors are divided into several classes: POST errors, Run-Time er-

rors, and Fatal errors (consisting of flash write errors and EEPROM block errors). Run-Time Errors Run-time errors can occur during the course of printing. These errors are displayed on the LEDs, along with beep sequences. This causes the printer to stop printing and enter an error state. Then beep sequences are emitted, LED codes are displayed, the error status may be sent to the host (depend-

ing on the protocol), and the printer goes into suspend mode. The printer exits from the suspend mode when the user presses one of the keyboard keys or communications is resumed from the host. The printer also places the print head in its home position and attempts to recover from the error condition. Until the error condition is corrected, the error procedure does not end, and the error state is not removed. For PAPER OUT errors, the user must load paper and press the SET PAGE button before printing begins. The paper may be loaded to the top of form, either manually or automatically, by pressing the FORM FEED button to wake the printer from suspend mode. 118 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics For a listing of run-time errors, refer to the following table. Printer Failure Indicators 12V under voltage fault (Low Battery) Sets of Beeps 1 beep 1 set of 2 beeps 1 set of 3 beeps 1 set of 4 beeps 1 set of 13 beeps 2 sets of 2 beeps 2 sets of 3 beeps 2 sets of 4 beeps 2 sets of 5 beeps 3 sets of 2 beeps 3 sets of 4 beeps 4 sets of 2 beeps 4 sets of 4 beeps 12 sets of 12 beeps OFF LOW BATT Meaning ON 2 blinks 12V over voltage fault (Input Voltage too high) 3 blinks 24V under voltage fault (internal power supply failure) 4 blinks 24V over voltage fault (internal power supply failure) OFF HEAD JAM OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 2 blinks 2 blinks Print head over temperature OFF ON PAPER OUT OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 5 blinks 5 blinks 5 blinks Paper feed current fault (Possible paper jam or feed motor failure) 3 blinks OFF 3 blinks OFF OFF 4 blinks 4 blinks OFF Erratic Home switch failure Print head short (Print head failure) Flash write error Operating System software failure 3 blinks Print head over current (Print head failure) Paper Out Head Jam Configuration error Erratic OFF Erratic OFF OFF OFF The most common errors consist of Paper Out, Low Battery, and Head Jam. The other errors listed are of rare occurrences, but are provided for good printer diagnostics in the event failures should occur. Power-On Self-Test (POST) When the printer is reset, it performs a POST to verify other reasons the printer might be failing. Audible error codes, along with indicator light status, are produced during POST if an error is encountered, as listed in the POST Error Codes table. A printer diagnostic cable, connected between the host computer and the printer, is used during POST to: configure the printer, access printer diag-

nostics, update software, and install new fonts. To install the diagnostic cable: connect the phone plug into the phone jack on the printer, then connect the 9-pin DSub plug into the host computer. After installing the diagnostic cable, reset the printer to initiate POST. POST Errors POST errors only occur after a push button reset, or an initial application of power to the printer. After the reset button is pressed, the LEDs (on the printer control panel) indicate the progress of POST. The first LED to light should be the power indicator (Green LED). A single beep should be heard immediately after this LED lights up to indicate the printer is active. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 119 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics POST Error Codes Long Beep 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 Short Beep 1 0 0 0 0 1 2 4 4 5 5 PAPER OUT OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON During the course of POST, the other LEDs light to indicate progress throughout the tests. If a POST failure is detected, the printer emits one of the following printer LED error codes and beep sequences. HEAD JAM OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON LOW BATT OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF Power Meaning ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Operational No Power Control program Initial Program Load (IPL) successful Diagnostic mode command check Control program IPL Invalid CRC on boot block Invalid CRC on control program or program not found Lower 64K RAM failure Upper 64K RAM failure Diagnostic flash memory check failed or is not initialized Diagnostic memory write failure After completion of the tests, all LEDs are turned off and there is an at-

tempt to place the head in the home position. Until the next time the printer is reset and POST is performed, only run-time errors or fatal errors are reported. Fatal Errors Two types of fatal errors exist: Flash Write Errors and Printer Configura-

tion Block Errors. These errors are extremely rare, but measures are built into the printer diagnostics to track possible occurrences. Flash Errors Errors related to writing or erasing flash are critical errors. These critical errors cause the printer to stop all processing and output an LED code and a sequence of beeps. The LED code represents the address of the segment that the error occurred on in octal notation. The octal digit changes every four beeps until four octal digits have been output. Only four octal digits are output since blocks are 256 bytes in size and flash can be addressed with a total of 0x7ff blocks. Note that the segment address output is the runtime address of the flash block and not the offset of the block within flash. To obtain the block offset within the flash, subtract 0x800 from the address output. After the error code is processed, the printer enters suspend state. When the printer resumes, the error again is output and suspend reentered. A re-

set is required to eliminate the error condition. Flash write errors may be unrecoverable. If this is the case, the printer requires servicing by qualified technicians. 120 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics EEPROM Configuration Errors Errors related to an invalid configuration block (diagnostic block) produce 13 beeps once, and then the printer suspends. It continues to produce this symptom, until the configuration block error is corrected. No LEDs light. This error may be caused by a flash write error or merely lack of proper printer configuration. If the error cannot be corrected by a reset of the printer, then the printer needs to be serviced by a qualified technician. Self-Test Function Descriptions Self-test consists of the following functions. Boot Block Program Verification A CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is performed on the bootblock pro-

gram. The calculated CRC is compared to the CRC embedded in the pro-

gram module. Control Program Verification A CRC is performed on the control program, which is loaded into writable flash program memory. The calculated CRC is compared to the CRC em-

bedded in the program module. The results of this test are printed on the self-test report. Font Module Verification A CRC is performed on the font modules, which are loaded into writable flash font memory. The calculated CRC is compared to the CRC em-

bedded in the program module. The results of this test are printed on the self-test report. A2D Check Current reading of the A2D sources are performed, and the results are printed on the self-test report. Nonvolatile Diagnostic Memory Verification A CRC is performed on the area of the nonvolatile diagnostic memory that has a CRC over it. The results of this test are printed on the self-test report. Nonvolatile Diagnostic Memory Update The nonvolatile diagnostic memory is updated from the nonvolatile diag-

nostic memory data shadowed in memory. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 121 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Detailed Printer Self-Test Self-test is user-selectable, verifies printer functions, and provides reporting of printer diagnostics. It performs a series of internal diagnostics and prints the results. When self-test begins, the beeper sounds for half a second and all LEDs turn on for half a second. Initiating Self-Test Self-test is initiated by simultaneously pressing both the LINE FEED and SET PAGE buttons on the control panel, while the printer is idle or asleep. Terminating Self-Test Self-test can be terminated manually, during the test, by simultaneously pressing both the LINE FEED and SET PAGE buttons. Self-Test Report Note: This method is recommended for determining printer functionality. A self-test is equivalent to a warm start. Both are performed when you si-

multaneously press the FORM FEED and SET PAGE buttons on the control panel for a few seconds. Release these buttons when the printer beeps and all indicators are lit. If the buttons are held too long, the self-test will not happen and the printer will form-feed one page. As the self-test progresses, the indicator lights change. Internal tests are performed and a 2-page report is printed. This report provides helpful in-

formation in diagnosing and troubleshooting printer problems. When the self-test is performed, the following actions occur:

Note: to abort the self-test can by pressing a button while the report is printing. S All LEDs are turned on to verify the lights work S A 600 ms beep is emitted to verify the beeper works S LEDs flash individually to show progress during internal tests S Current voltage and ambient temperature are obtained S Validity of diagnostic block program is checked S Validity of BootBlock program is checked S Validity of control program is checked S Validity of loaded fonts is checked S LEDs turn off S Self-test report is printed Printer capability is diagnosed by printing the report. Device errors are dis-

played on the LEDs and emitted by the beeper. The printer then does a warm reset (soft reboot) upon error or completion of the self-test report. 122 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics First Page of Self-Test The self-test report is divided into sections. Refer to pages 124 and 125 for a sample printout. The printer model number is given on line 1 (first line). This identifies the printer type used, in this case the 6820. The 8-digit serial number of the printer is listed on line 4 under the Serial# heading on line 3. The serial number is also on the inside of the printer. In portable printers, raise the printer mechanism to look for the number on the inside back wall. Battery Voltage, on line 13, gives the input voltage sampled at the beginning of the self-test. The input range must be between 7.5 and 15 volts. The input voltage must be greater than 10.5 volts to charge the internal battery. At 7.5 volts or less, the LOW BATT LED is turned on and the printer goes to sleep immediately. Apply external power to wake the printer to print. At 10.5 volts or less, the LOW BATT light comes on but the printer still prints. The Auto Feed setting, on line 16, is a configurable item. CR Carriage Return means no auto linefeed. This is the most common setting for applications using NPCP. CR+LF means a linefeed will be added to each CR. This setting can produce double-spacing of reports. See page 32 for information on changing this configuration. The Interface Mode setting, line 17, lists the interface protocol for the printer. The typical setting is NPCP. Others include DTR with no, odd, or even parity, and IrDA. See page 32 for additional information. Bit Rate on line 18, lists the baud rate for the printer. Most application software autobauds so you do not have to select it. Bit rate is commonly set to 19200 (19.2K) or 9600 bps. See page 33 for additional information. A2D History, lines 21 through 25, is the history for voltage measurements and temperature measurements, as re-

corded by the printer. Head Jam History on lines 26 through 29, gives information on head jams. If the printer is having frequent head jams, these lines can assist in determining the problem. Under the Home header, if Err is listed, then the home position LED sensor has failed. Command tells which printer command was executed when the head jammed. Direction tells which way the head was moving, left toward home and right away from home. Home posi-

tion is at the extreme left, toward the green thumb wheel. Speed is the acceleration speed of the print head when the jam occurred. Step is the acceleration step at the jam. 0 means no steps were taken, 15 means all steps were taken. 114 means printer jammed during acceleration or deceleration. Temp is the ambient temperature at the last head jam. The temperature is listed in Celsius. Position of carriage at the jam in 1/720 inches = 12 * step position. Divide the number by 12 to get the step position. There are 512 steps across the page. If it is jammed at position 0, check the printer mechanism align-

ment. If it is jamming in the middle, it is more likely a dirty ribbon or obstruction in the print heads path. Head Dot Pattern, line 37, is printed to verify the individual dot wires. There should be nine dots. If some are miss-

ing, it could be a print head failure or a circuit board failure. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 123 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

(continued) Error Log information appears on lines 3843. This information is cleared after every self-test. This information is very helpful in determining problems.

# of paper jams while feeding paper

# of head jams while print head is moving

# 12-volt under voltage

# 12-volt over voltage

# 24-volt under voltage (Head/motor voltage)

# 24-volt over voltage

# Home detect errors (typically caused by paper scraps or circuit failures) PE HJ 12Vu 12Vo 24Vu 24Vo Home Temp Unused OverC # Head over current errors (typically caused by a bad print head) HeadS # Head driver short errors (typically caused by circuit failures) Fault ADErr # A2D conversion failures EEErr Dlink Llink

# EEPROM write failures to diagnostic block

# Software memory errors (Corruption in internal memory)

# Software memory errors

# Paper feed motor over current errors (Excess current in paper feed motor could indicate circuit failure) All other values are informational only. Remember that these values are cleared after the self-test. Sample First Page of Self-Test Note: Lines 1518 are factory-default printer settings. Take note of these lines when reading the self-test report. 00 Hardware MFG Date yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy 1 NP6820 2 Copyright 1997, 1998, Intermec Technologies Corporation. All Rights Reserved. 3 Serial#

Check Repairs Svc Date 4 12345678 yy/mm/dd ddd-ddd-ddd/dddd (TOP) yy/mm/dd GO/NG ddd-ddd-ddd/dddd (MLB) 5 ddd-ddd-ddd/dddd (PS) 6 ddd-ddd-ddd/dddd (IOB) 7 8 Revisions:..........0000000000303100 NPBB6820.MOD - Version XX.XX XXXX XXXX GO/NG 9 Bootblock:

10 Control Program:

npfl6820.mod - Version XX.XX XXXX XXXX GO/NG 11 Font Module:

nftxxxxx.mod - Version XX.XX XXXX XXXX GO/NG 12 Font Module:

nftxxxxx.mod - Version XX.XX XXXX XXXX GO/NG 13 Battery Voltage:

012.34 123456 14 Total Pages:

15 Zero Font Style:

16 Auto Feed:

CR 17 Interface mode:

NPCP 19200 18 Bit Rate:

19 Cold Starts:

00024 20 Warm Starts:

00050 Low...../....High 124 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Error 027.21 8.71 000 Page 00401 00401 00401 Count 00021 00021 00021 00186 Low 023.21 010.91

-020 High 023.91 013.51 055 Min 023.21 010.90

-021 Max 024.51 014.50 060 21 A2D History Curr 22 23 24v: 024.00 24 12v: 012.55 25 Temp:

023 26 Head Jam History 27 Total Head Jams:

28 Home Command Direction Speed Print Const 29 30 NPCP History Addr 31 Disc 12345 32 12345 33 IRDA History FramesOk 34 35 rx 1234567890 1234567890 0123456789 0000000000 36 tx 1234567890 1234567890 0123456789 0000000000 37 HEAD DOT PATTERN Left Seq Parity IFTS 12345 12345 12345 BroadCasts CRC/TMO Step Temp Position Page 010 -010 12345 Bind CRC IPLDU 12345 12345 12345 DISCARD 01440 Frame 12345 12Vu 12Vo 24Vu 24Vo Home Temp OverC HeadS Fault ADErr 38 Error Log 39 PE HJ EEErr 40 Dlink Llink 41 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 42 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 43 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 Second Page of Self-Test Page 2 contains the print pattern used to diagnose printer mechanical be-

havior. The pattern continuously prints the ASCII characters between 33 and 126 decimal inclusive for the entire page, or until you cancel the print by pressing a button on the printer. An example of that rotating pattern is shown below.

!#$%()*+,./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_abcdefghijklmn opqrstuvwxyz{|}~!#$%()*+,./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^

_abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~!#$%()*+,./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMN OPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~!#$%()*+,./0123456789:;<=>

?@ABCDEFGHIJKL Self-Test Failure If a partial report generates and a printer error occurs during printing, refer to the table on the next page for troubleshooting help. If the printer does not generate a report:

S There may be a printer failure, refer to the troubleshooting table on the next page for possible solutions. S There may be a power failure, check the power source (internal battery, charge cable, or ac adaptor). 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 125 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Tips The following table lists actual printing problems, possible causes, and ac-

tions you should take to correct a problem. Possible Printer Problems Symptom Printer does not communicate with the mobile computer. Test or Cause S Incorrect protocol selection. Check lines 17 and 18 on the self-test report for correct bit rate and protocol selection. S Bluetooth Unable to connect. Double-spacing on application reports but single-spacing on self-test. Zero prints incorrectly (with/

without slash). Does not print extended char-

acter set missing font. Printer emits 1 or 2 beeps or blinking green light is the only indicator. Check line 16 on the self-test report, if CR+LF then this is an incorrect con-

figuration for NPCP. Check line 15 on the self-test report for Zero Font Style setting. Check line 11 or 12 on the self-test re-

port to see if the NFT0000.MOD file is listed after Font Module. Printer mechanism does not have ade-

quate power for printing. The 12 V may be under or over voltage fault. (Note: Er-

ror lights do not flash if voltage is too high) Printer emits 2 sets of 3 beeps Printer out of paper Printer works but some or all LEDs do not work. Printer does not print Gray ribbon cable connecting control panel board to pivot frame assembly is loose. S No voltage S Voltage too high or low. Check line 13 on the self-test report, under the Battery Voltage header. S No data input Solution Change protocol settings through config-

uration process. S Make sure you are in range (10cm to 10m) S Make sure your device is configured to be discoverable and/or connectable (see Appendix A, Bluetooth Configuration Commands) S Make sure the Bluetooth shutdown tim-

er has not expired See page 32 for instructions. If incorrect, adjust the zero print option, see page 33 for instructions. Use the 6820 Printer Tool Kit to reload this file or send for hardware repair. Check battery or power supply. S If battery, recharge or replace (see page 15 for instructions). S If power supply, adjust supply voltage to 7.515 volts. Check the printers internal battery, if installed. Check the vehicle charge cable

(see the 6820 Printer Installation Instruc-

tions P/N: 962-018-016). Reload paper into printer mechanism. See page 18 for instructions. Call Customer Support (800-755-5505) or send printer for hardware repair. Adjust supply voltage to 7.515 volts. Tighten computer connections. 126 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Possible Printer Problems (continued) Test or Cause Symptom Test: Pull paper toward roller. No paper feed (paper jam or Cause: If paper is resistant:

head jam) S Paper tray too full S Torn paper perforation S Paper wrinkled, creased, moist, or per-

forations missing S White ribbon cables obstructing paper S Head Jams due to carriage alignment. Check line 29 on self-test report, under Position header, for value. Test: Move print head manually from side to side. Cause: If print head resistant:

No paper feed (paper jam or head jam) continued . Solution S Ensure fewer than 200 3-ply sheets in the deep paper tray and fewer than 50 3-ply sheets in the shallow paper tray. S Remove torn paper, load and center new paper, readjust pinfeed holders. S Replace the paper. S Straighten the white ribbon cables. S If 0, realign mechanism in pivot tray. See page 109 for printer mechanism alignment instructions. Test: Remove ribbon cartridge, move print head. If smooth, ribbon is jammed. Test: Remove ribbon cartridge, move Remove ribbon cartridge and turn knob. If ribbon resists, replace ribbon cartridge

(see page 16 for instructions). Replace the mask spring (see page 31). print head. If still resistant, mask spring is bent or damaged is bent or damaged. Cause: Print head gap adjuster too tight. Cause: Paper scraps found in printer mechanism or around platen. Set the head gap adjuster to the fifth notch away from the paper (see page 17). If ribbon cartridge bumps against inside of printer, check white ribbon cable, home position sensor, and four screws. Remove any paper scraps, do a cleaning. Printer mechanism unlatched (unlocked).

(portable, fixed mount printers) Latch (lock) the printer mechanism into place. Printer has a glitch not defined above. Do a self-test. Note: In paper jams or head jams, press the SET PAGE button to clear the printer before printing can resume. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 127 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Compatibility Issues Use the following information to determine some compatibility issues that come up relative to the 6820 Printer:

Compatibility Issues and Conclusions Issue Does 4820 Ribbon work with 6820 Printers?

Do 4820 Applications work with 6820 Printers?

Does the 6820 Printer work with an application that downloads some custom characters to the printer?

Can 4820 Fixed Mount Printers be replaced with 6820 Printers?

Do NC4000 Power Supplies work with the 6820 Printer?

Do off-the-shelf 25-pin cables work between the dock and the 6820 Printer?

Conclusion Yes. Yes. Applications that work on the 4820 Printer also work on the 6820 Printer. Yes. The downloadable character set feature is the same for both the 4820 and 6820 Printers. Yes. 6820 Fixed Mount Printers can be installed on exist-

ing flat and angle mounts for the 4820 Printer. In some cases, printing while charging mobile computers may not be supported. If so, order a new charger (P/N:

851-027-003). Most likely. If it does not, refer to comments in Problems and Solutions, above. Diagnostic Information Nonvolatile Flash Storage Diagnostic information is stored in flash to support the hardware configu-

ration, both at time of manufacture and in the field. This includes record-

ing the initial configuration changes to hardware and software, and various environmental statistics helpful in determining why failures are occurring in the field. The flash is provided for storage of critical data that must re-

main in the unit after power to the unit is lost. The data in the flash is used for diagnostic information for a catastrophic failure, or over the phone with a customer. Updating Diagnostic Information The FLASH diagnostic information is updated and maintained by the printer. All diagnostic information is shadowed in RAM. At the end of ev-

ery 50 forms, the FLASH information is updated from the RAM. The printer also updates the information upon the occurrence of any nonrecov-

erable error, printer reset, printer self-test and remote polling of Diagnostic information. Fields are stored with ID first, then length, then data. The details of the data and the length of the entire field, including ID and Length bytes, are shown in the table on the next page. 128 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Accessing Diagnostic Information The amount of Flash memory reserved for nonvolatile diagnostic memory is 2K bytes. Printer self-test prints most of the information contained in the Diagnostic Memory for remote and end-user diagnostic access. Diagnostic Information Field ID 01 Length Description 4 3 Serial #

Date of Manufacture. yy/mm/dd Hardware Configuration:

ddd-ddd-ddd/dddd (top level part #) ddd-ddd-ddd/dddd (control board) ddd-ddd-ddd/dddd (power supply) ddd-ddd-ddd/dddd (i/o board) CRC of preceding fields. Hardware Revisions: ECNs applied. 64 ECNs can record separately by number 1-64. Service Repairs: a two-digit field indication of number of times unit is serviced. Date of last Repair. yy/mm/dd Cold Starts since MFG or last repair. Warm Starts since last cold start. Pages printed over life. Last high & low voltage extremes on 24-volt input over last 50 reports. Extremes stored as 8-bit A2D conversions. Voltage extreme history stores max. & min. 24-volt A2D conversions over printer life. 24-volt voltage error. Voltages greater than 10% consid-

ered errors. A2D value recorded. Form number at last voltage error. 24-volt error count. Last high and low voltage extremes on 12-volt input over last 50 reports. Extremes stored as 8-bit A2D conversions. Voltage extreme history stores min. & max. 12-volt A2D conversions over printer life. 12V voltage error. Voltages less than 10.5 volts and greater than 14.5 volts considered errors. A2D value is recorded. Page number at last 12-volt error. 12-volt error count. Total Length 39 bytes Stored as 7 digit BCD set at MFG 6 digit BCD set at MFG 52 digit BCD set at MFG 2 byte binary set at MFG 8 byte bit field 11 bytes 8 bytes 11 bytes 11 bytes 2 BCD Digits 6 BCD digits binary digits binary digits binary digits 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 08 09 10 20 7 7 7 7 2 8 1 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 129 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Diagnostic Information (continued) Field ID 30 Length 2 Description Temperature, minimum and maximum over last 50 re-

ports. Set A2D value. Temperature, minimum and maximum over printer life. Set A2D value. Temperature error. Last A2D conversion below -10 or above +60 Celsius recorded. Page number at last temperature error. Total number of temperature errors. Total number of head-jams 0 = No Home detect switch error 1 = Home switch engagement error 0 = Seeking; 1 = Printing 0 = Left; 1 = Right 00 = Acceleration 01 = Constant speed 10 = Deceleration 00 = 250 PPS ( initialization) 01 = Low speed 10 = High speed reserved 0 Acceleration or deceleration step motor value when jam occurred Ambient temperature when Head Jam occurred. Set A2D value. Form number where Head Jam occurred. Carriage Position where Head Jam occurred. Total Length 11 bytes 11 bytes Stored as 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes binary bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bits 3-4 bits 5-6 bit 7 1 byte binary 1 byte 2 bytes binary 2 bytes binary in 1/720 40 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 130 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Diagnostic Information (continued) Field ID 50 Length 2 Description NPCP NDM (normal disconnect mode) error count. In-

crements when normal disconnect mode entered. NPCP address error count. Increments when invalid print-

er address received. NPCP length parity error count. Increments when parity of length field in frame incorrect. NPCP IFTS (invalid frame this state) error count. Incre-

ments when invalid session layer command received. NPCP sequence error count. Increments when LLC se-

quence numbers incorrect. NPCP CRC error count. Increments when MAC CRC error encountered. NPCP Frame error count. Increments when IFRAMES received when session is not bound. NPCP Bind error count. NPCP IPLDUR (Invalid presentation layer data unit) error count. Increments when bad presentation layer command received. IrDA rxFramesOk total frames received OK. IrDA rxFramesCrcErr total frames received with CRC error. IrDA rxTotalBytes total Bytes received OK. IrDA rxFramesDiscardBuf total frames discarded due to no buffer space. IrDA rxBroadcastFrames total broadcast frames received OK. IrDA rxFramesDiscardHwErr total received frames dis-

carded, due to hardware error. IrDA txFramesOk total frames transmitted OK. IrDA txTotalBytes total bytes transmitted OK. IrDA txBroadcastFrames total broadcast frames trans-

mitted OK. IrDA txFramesNotTxTimeout total frames not trans-

mitted due to time-out. IrDA txFramesNotTxHwErr total frames not trans-

mitted due to hardware error. Stored as 2 bytes Total Length 20 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 46 bytes 60 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 131 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics Diagnostic Information (continued) Field ID 70 Length 1 Description Zero font selection for codepage 437 0 = ; 1 = 0 Autofeed configuration 0 = CR; 1 = LF+CR Protocol Selection:

00h = NPCP 20h = DTR No Parity 21h = DTR ODD Parity 22h = DTR EVEN Parity

(all other values reserved) Bit Rate 0 = 9600;

1 = 19.2k 1 1 1 Total Length 6 bytes Stored as 1 byte 1 bit 132 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual A Bluetooth Configuration Commands Configuration of the Bluetooth radio and software is accomplished using the Bluetooth Configuration Commands listed in this appendix. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 133 Appendix A Bluetooth Configuration Commands Notation Command Numbers are in decimal except:

S Numbers with an h suffix are in hexadecimal. S Numbers with a 0x prefix are in hexadecimal. S Numbers with a b suffix are in binary. All printable characters can be entered directly via the keyboard. Any non-

printable characters are entered in binary data format. Binary data format is any non seven-bit ASCII data to transmit to the module is encoded in the Internet percent notation. Any hex byte to trans-

mit is preceded by the % sign and encoded in hex ASCII. To send the value 0xF5, the %F5 bytes are transmitted. The %character is always transmitted as %25. Thus, a Bluetooth address could transmit as

%00%E0%03%45%F4%6D. Generic format:

<command character><command type><command payload><CR>

<command character> is one character from the set: [A-Z]

<command type> is one character for the set: [0-9]

<command payload> is variable in length.

<CR> is the command terminator. The <command payload> is formed from printable ASCII characters from the code range 0x20 to 0x7E. Codes outside of this range are escaped using the percent (%) character followed by two hexadecimal digits. The percent character is always represented by the three characters: %25 The command terminator is character code 0x13 (carriage return), or char-

acter code 0x10 (line feed), or character codes 0x13, 0x10 (carriage return, line feed). An example command to set the friendly name to Lens 100% serial mod-

ule:

F0Lens 100%25 serial module<CR>

Character codes outside of the range of 0x20 to 0x7E are ignored. When using percent (%) to form hexadecimal character codes there must be exactly two hex digits using characters: [0-9, A-F, a-f]. Characters outside of this range cause the command to fail. Commands that fail return the four character sequence: NAK<CR>

Commands that are accepted return the four character sequence: ACK<CR>

134 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Operating Modes Appendix A Bluetooth Configuration Commands Commands that return payload data use the format:

<command character><command type><command payload><CR>

<command character> is one character from the set: [a-z]

<command type> is one character for the set: [0-9]

<command payload> is variable in length.

<CR> is the command terminator. The command character is the lower case version of the local host com-

mand. The module interface has two modes:

S Bluetooth Link Active State: In this case the Serial Interface looks like a raw serial port (TxD, RxD, CTS, etc. and GND). There is no intelli-

gence in the Bluetooth module from the serial interface perspective. This mode does not support the command and control modes described below. S Bluetooth Link Inactive State: This mode exists when a Bluetooth link is not existent: In this case, the serial interface looks like a serial port that supports a number of command and control modes. Upon reset, the unit comes up in Bluetooth Link Inactive State. After the first Bluetooth connection, the unit goes into Bluetooth Link Active State. It stays in this state until the link is lost because the Master shuts it down or there is an out-of-range condition. At this point, it returns to the Bluetooth Link Inactive State. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 135 Appendix A Bluetooth Configuration Commands Command and Control Modes Note that these commands are only available over the serial link, not over the air and are not available when the device is in the Bluetooth Link Ac-

tive state. Query Mode Commands Read ACK

?<CR>

Read Friendly Name

?F0<CR>

Read Security Mode

?L<CR>

?C0<CR>

Read Connectable Mode Read Page Scan Timing

?C1<CR>

Read Discoverable Mode

?D0<CR>

?D1<CR>

Read Inquiry Scan Timing Read Class of Device

?S1<CR>

Read Service Name

?S2<CR>

Read PIN Code

?S4<CR>

?T0<CR>

Read Shutdown Timeout in minutes Read Bluetooth Addresses of all the paired devices

?B0<CR>

Examples:

Command

?<CR>

?F0<CR>

?L<CR>

?C0<CR>

?C1<CR>

?D0<CR>

?D1<CR>

?S1<CR>

?S2<CR>

?S4<CR>

?T0<CR>

?B0<CR>

Reply ACK<CR>

f0MyFriendlyName<CR>

10<CR> Turn off Encryption, Authentication, and Exclusion 11<CR> Authentication 12<CR> Encryption and Authentication 13<CR> Encryption, Authentication, and Exclusive c0ON<CR>

c11024,512<CR>

d0ON<CR>

d11024,512<CR>

s1001F00<CR>

s2MyServiceName<CR>

s4MyPinCode<CR>

t0Shutdown Timer = 5 minutes<CR>

b0No Devices PairedCR>

136 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix A Bluetooth Configuration Commands Set Local Bluetooth Device Name Command Definition Default F0<Device Friendly Name><CR>

Device Name String up to 254 bytes long 6820DDEEFF where DDEEFF is from the Bluetooth device ad-

dress (AABBCCDDEEFF) F01Lens 100%25 serial module<CR>

This sets the name to Lens 100% serial module Example Set Class of Device/Service Field Command Description S1< Class of Device/Service field >

The Class of Device/Service (CoD) field is a 24-bit field defined in the Bluetooth Assigned Numbers document. See Assigned Numbers - Bluetooth Baseband for up-to-date information on how to compose this value. This field is sent in a HEX ASCII for-

mat, most significant byte first. S1001F00<CR> is a common Class of Device value for a basic serial device. Example Set Service Name Command Description Definition Default Example S2<Service Name>

Sets the service friendly name to send to the remote Bluetooth device in response to a service discovery request. The length of the service name is limited to 32 bytes. Profile Name Text name entered into the SDP record for the serial port profile Wireless Printer S3Acme Printer<CR>

Connectable On/Off: ON or OFF Command Description Example C0 <ON|OFF><CR>

Sets the device into connectable mode C0OFF<CR> Become non-connectable C0ON<CR> Become connectable 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 137 Appendix A Bluetooth Configuration Commands C1<Page_Scan_Interval>,<Page_Scan_Window><CR>

Sets the Page Scan timing parameters 4096,18 C11024,512<CR>

Specify Page Scan Timing Command Description Default Example Note: To enable scanning, the values for Interval and Window must be in the range of 18 to 4096. The Window value must be less than the Interval value. Both values must be zero to disable scanning. Note: Page scan timing is described in the Bluetooth V1.1 Core Specifications; for up-to-date information, see: The Bluetooth Specification. Note: Modification of the Page Scan Timing can improve connection times, but may adverse-

ly affect battery performance. Enable Discoverable Command Description Example D0 <ON|OFF><CR>

Sets the device into discoverable mode D0OFF<CR> Become non-discoverable D0ON<CR> Become discoverable D1<Inquiry_Scan_Interval>,< Inquiry_Scan_Window><CR>

Sets the Inquiry Scan timing parameters 4096,18 D11024,512<CR>

Specify Inquiry Scan Timing Command Description Default Example Note: To enable scanning, the values for Interval and Window must be in the range of 18 to 4096. The Window value must be less than the Interval value. Both values must be zero to disable scanning. Note: Page scan timing is described in the Bluetooth V1.1 Core Specifications; for up-to-date information, see: The Bluetooth Specification. Note: Modification of the Inquiry Scan Timing can improve device discovery response perfor-

mance, but may adversely affect battery performance. Set Encryption/Authentication: PIN CODE Command Description Default S4<PIN code>

PIN Code Pin code can be NULL and as long as 16 characters S4%00 NULL PIN code S4MyPinCode <CR>

Example 138 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix A Bluetooth Configuration Commands Manage Security Modes This command controls the security access mode and device pairing. The modes available are:

L0 Disable encryption, authentication and exclusion L1 Enable authentication L2 Enable encryption and authentication L3 Enable encryption, authentication and exclusive Mode L0 allows any remote device to connect. Mode L1 require the remote device to be authenticated by a PIN request. The PIN code for the module is set to a user-specified value with the S4 command. Currently the default PIN is the NULL string (see Note). Mode L2 adds encryption to the Bluetooth link. Mode L3 adds exclusive connection to one specific Bluetooth device. In this mode only connection requests from the initial device are al-

lowed. Connections from other devices are rejected even if they supply the correct PIN code. Device pairing and bonding are associated with this command and works as follows:

After an L command is executed the current device pairing and bonding is deleted. The next device to connect becomes paired and bonded to the module. In Modes L1 and L2, other devices are allowed to connect but only the first device to connect is paired and bonded. Other devices are always re-

quired to supply a PIN code to complete the connection. In Mode L3, only one device is allowed to connect. This device is paired and bonded and needs to supply the PIN code only on the initial connec-

tion. Example: L3<CR>

Note: Some of the Bluetooth user interfaces cannot supply a NULL string as a PIN code. Use the S4 command to specify a PIN code that is not NULL. Read Module Version V0<CR>

Command Description Displays the firmware build version currently running V0<CR>

Example Returns: v1yyyymmddHHMM<CR>

Note: This command responds with the requested data only not the ACK<CR>

6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 139 Appendix A Bluetooth Configuration Commands Read Local Device Address Command Description Returns Note: This command responds with the requested data only not the ACK<CR> Example: Sent: V1<CR>

V1<CR>

Displays the local device address v1%xx%xx%xx%xx%xx%xx<CR>

Received: v1%00%2C%C6%03%45%39 Set Shutdown Timing Command Description Range Default Example T0<Time in Minutes><CR>

Time Integer value - 0 implies never expire the timer 0270 minutes 120 T0120<CR> This sets the shutdown timer to 120 minutes. Clear Link Key Table Command Description B0<CLR><CR>

Clear Pair or Bonding command cleans up all of the link key and Bluetooth address combination PSKEYs. None B0CLR<CR> This clears all saved link keys. Default Example Web Links The following is the list of web links used in this document and their ad-

dresses as of this publish date; they are subject to change without notice by their respective authors:

S Assigned Numbers Bluetooth Baseband:

https://www.bluetooth.org/foundry/assignnumb/document/baseband S The Bluetooth Specification:

www.bluetooth.com/dev/specifications.asp 140 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Cross-Reference Tables B A set of cross-reference tables are provided to assist you in locating control codes and escape sequences. The default settings are also included. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 141 Appendix B Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences The following table contains a complete alphabetized list of control codes, including single character control codes and escape sequences, as an aid to locating the control codes defined in Chapter 5, Control Code Defini-

tions. For detailed definitions of these control codes, refer to the pages shown in the Page column of this table. Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index Description A Absolute Print Position, Set B Backspace Beeper Bottom-Up Printing, Select Byte:

Double Byte Character Sets Multi-Byte Character Sets Single Byte Character Sets C Cancel Line Carriage Return Channel:

Clear Vertical Tabs in Channel Select Vertical Tab Channel Set Vertical Tabs in Channel Character:

Define Intercharacter Space Define User-Defined Characters Disable Printing of Character Graphics Double Byte Character Sets Enable Printing of Character Graphics Multi-Byte Character Sets Print Character Graphics Select Default Character Set Select National Character Set Select User-Defined Character Set Single Byte Character Sets User Defined Characters Category General Printer Control General Printer Control General Printer Control General Printer Control Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined General Printer Control General Printer Control Tabs and Tab Setting Tabs and Tab Setting Tabs and Tab Setting Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Page 67 64 65 68 81 82 81 65 65 80 80 80 75 85 88 81 87 82 88 86 82 85 81 84 142 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix B Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Category Page Code Cancel Printing of Codes 128-255 Codepage Selection Enable Printing of Codes 128-255 Expand Printable Code Area Condensed (compressed):

Cancel Condensed Mode Select Condensed Mode Copy ROM to RAM D Default Character Set, Select Define Intercharacter Space Define User-Defined Characters Delete Double:

Cancel Double Strike Mode Cancel Double Wide Mode Cancel Double Wide Mode (one line only) Double Byte Character Sets Select Double Strike Mode Select Double Wide Mode Select Double Wide Mode (one line only) E Elite Pitch, Select Emphasized Mode, Cancel Emphasized Mode, Select Expand:

Cancel Double Wide (expanded) Mode Cancel Double Wide Mode (one line only) Expand Printable Code Area Select Double Wide (expanded) Mode Select Double Wide Mode (one line only) F Form Feed Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Sets, User Defined General Printer Control Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode General Printer Control 86 82 86 87 73 72 84 86 75 85 65 73 74 74 81 73 74 73 74 75 74 74 74 87 74 73 65 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 143 Appendix B Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description G General Printer Control Functions Graphics:

Disable Printing of Character Graphics Eight-Pin Graphics Modes Reassign Graphics Mode Select Graphics Mode Select High-Speed Double Density Mode Select Low-Speed Double Density Mode Select Low-Speed Quadruple Density Mode Select Single Density Graphics Mode Enable Printing of Character Graphics Nine-Pin Graphics Modes Select 9-Pin Double Density Graphics Mode Select 9-Pin Single Density Graphics Mode Print Character Graphics H Half Speed:

Cancel Half-speed Printing Select Half-speed Printing Horizontal:

Clear Horizontal Tabs Perform Horizontal Tab Set Horizontal Tabs I Inactivity Time for Sleep Mode, Set Intercharacter Space, Define Italic:

Cancel Italic Mode Select Italic Mode L Left Margin, Set Length:

Set Page Length (inches) Set Page Length (lines) Line, Cancel Line Feed:

Perform Line Feed Perform n/216 inch Line Feed Perform n/216 inch Reverse Line Feed Category General Printer Control Char. Sets, User Defined Graphics Functions Graphics Functions Graphics Functions Graphics Functions Graphics Functions Graphics Functions Graphics Functions Char. Sets, User Defined Graphics Functions Graphics Functions Graphics Functions Char. Sets, User Defined General Printer Control General Printer Control Tabs and Tab Setting Tabs and Tab Setting Tabs and Tab Setting General Printer Control Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Page Formatting Page Formatting Page Formatting General Printer Control General Printer Control General Printer Control General Printer Control Page 64 88 89 89 89 91 90 91 90 87 91 92 92 88 66 66 78 78 78 66 75 75 75 71 69 69 65 66 66 67 144 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix B Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Category Page Line Spacing:

Select 1/6 inch Line Spacing Select 1/8 inch Line Spacing Select 7/72 inch Line Spacing Select n/72 inch Line Spacing Select n/216 inch Line Spacing M Margin:

Set Left Margin Set Right Margin Master Select Master Reset, Perform Mode:

Cancel Condensed Mode (compressed) Cancel Double Strike Mode Cancel Double Wide (expanded) Mode Cancel Double Wide Mode (one line only) Emphasized Mode, Cancel Cancel Italic Mode Cancel Subscript/Superscript Mode Cancel Underline Mode Select Condensed Mode (compressed) Select Double Strike Mode Select Double Wide (expanded) Mode Select Double Wide Mode (one line only) Emphasized Mode, Select Select Elite Pitch Select Italic Mode Select Pica Pitch Select Subscript Mode Select Superscript Mode Select Underline Mode Set Inactivity Time for Sleep Mode Multi-Byte Character Sets N National Character Set, Select Page Formatting Page Formatting Page Formatting Page Formatting Page Formatting Page Formatting Page Formatting Char. Style & Text Mode General Printer Control Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode General Printer Control Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined 70 70 70 70 70 71 71 75 67 73 73 74 74 75 75 77 77 72 73 74 73 74 74 75 76 77 77 77 66 82 82 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 145 Appendix B Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description O One Line Only:

Category Page Cancel Double Wide Mode (one line only) Select Double Wide Mode (one line only) Select Unidirectional Printing (one-line-only) Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode General Printer Control P Page:

Set Page Length (inches) Set Page Length (lines) Perforation:

Cancel Skip Over Perforation Set Skip Over Perforation Pitch:

Select Elite Pitch Select Pica Pitch Position:

Set Print Position (absolute) Set Print Position (relative) Print:

Cancel Half-speed Printing Cancel Printing of Codes 128-255 Cancel Unidirectional Printing Enable Printing of Character Graphics Enable Printing of Codes 128-255 Expand Printable Code Area Disable Printing of Character Graphics Print Character Graphics Select Bottom-Up Printing Select Half-speed Printing Select Top-Down Printing Select Unidirectional Printing Select Unidirectional Printing (one line only) Set Print Position (absolute) Set Print Position (relative) R Reset, Perform Master Reverse n/216 inch Line Feed, Perform Right Margin, Set ROM to RAM, Copy Page Formatting Page Formatting Page Formatting Page Formatting Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode General Printer Control General Printer Control General Printer Control Char. Sets, User Defined General Printer Control Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined General Printer Control General Printer Control General Printer Control General Printer Control General Printer Control General Printer Control General Printer Control General Printer Control General Printer Control Page Formatting Char. Sets, User Defined 74 73 69 69 69 72 72 74 76 67 68 66 86 68 87 86 87 88 88 68 66 68 68 69 67 68 68 67 71 84 146 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description S Single Byte Character Sets Skip:

Cancel Skip Over Perforation Set Skip Over Perforation Sleep Mode, Set Inactivity Time for Space:

Define Intercharacter Space Select 1/6 inch Line Spacing Select 1/8 inch Line Spacing Select 7/72 inch Line Spacing Select n/72 inch Line Spacing Select n/216 inch Line Spacing Strike:

Cancel Double Strike Mode Select Double Strike Mode Subscript/Superscript:

Cancel Subscript/Superscript Mode Select Subscript Mode Select Superscript Mode T Tab:

Clear Horizontal Tabs Clear Vertical Tabs Clear Vertical Tabs in Channel Perform Horizontal Tab Perform Vertical Tab Select Vertical Tab Channel Set Horizontal Tabs Set Vertical Tabs Set Vertical Tabs in Channel Time for Sleep Mode, Set Inactivity Top-Down Printing, Select U Underline:

Cancel Underline Mode Select Underline Mode Appendix B Cross-Reference Tables Category Char. Sets, User Defined Page Formatting Page Formatting General Printer Control Char. Style & Text Mode Page Formatting Page Formatting Page Formatting Page Formatting Page Formatting Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Tabs and Tab Setting Tabs and Tab Setting Tabs and Tab Setting Tabs and Tab Setting Tabs and Tab Setting Tabs and Tab Setting Tabs and Tab Setting Tabs and Tab Setting Tabs and Tab Setting General Printer Control General Printer Control Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Page 81 72 72 66 75 70 70 70 70 70 73 73 77 77 77 78 80 80 78 79 80 78 79 80 66 68 77 77 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 147 Appendix B Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Category Page Unidirectional:

Cancel Unidirectional Printing Select Unidirectional Printing Select Unidirectional Printing (one-line-only) User Defined Characters:

Cancel Printing of Codes 128-255 Copy ROM to RAM Define User-Defined Characters Disable Printing of Character Graphics Enable Printing of Character Graphics Enable Printing of Codes 128-255 Expand Printable Code Area Select Default Character Set Select User-Defined Character Set Print Character Graphics V Vertical:

Clear Vertical Tabs Clear Vertical Tabs in Channel Perform Vertical Tab Select Vertical Tab Channel Set Vertical Tabs Set Vertical Tabs in Channel W Wide:

Cancel Double Wide (expanded) Mode Cancel Double Wide Mode (one line only) Select Double Wide (expanded) Mode Select Double Wide Mode (one line only) General Printer Control General Printer Control General Printer Control Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Tabs and Tab Setting Tabs and Tab Setting Tabs and Tab Setting Tabs and Tab Setting Tabs and Tab Setting Tabs and Tab Setting Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode Char. Style & Text Mode 68 68 69 84 86 84 85 88 87 86 87 86 85 88 80 80 79 80 79 80 74 74 74 73 148 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix B Cross-Reference Tables Single Character Control Code Definitions This table contains control codes between 00h and 7Fh, and provides defi-

nitions for the ASCII symbols as used in the table on the next page and in format definitions in Chapter 2, Control Code Definitions. Dec Hex ASCII Description Page 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 127 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 7F Backspace: moves print head one space to left. Shift In: selects Condensed (compressed) mode Line Feed: moves paper to next line. Vertical Tab: moves paper to next vertical tab stop Form Feed: advances paper to top of next page. NUL Used as a terminator for several escape sequences. SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BEL Beeper: sounds buzzer for 1/10 of a second. BS HT Horizontal Tab: moves print head to next tab stop. LF VT FF CR Carriage Return: moves print head to left margin. SO Shift Out: selects Double-wide Mode (one-line-only) SI DLE DC1 Device Control 1: sets printer online (not currently used) DC2 Device Control 2: cancels condensed mode (compressed) DC3 Device Control 3: sets printer offline (not currently used) DC4 Device Control 4: cancels double-wide mode (online only) NAK SYN ETB CAN Cancel Line: clears all characters out of print buffer. EM SUB ESC Escape: defines start of escape sequence. FS GS RS US SP DEL Delete: deletes last character in print buffer. Space Character 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 65 64 78 66 79 65 65 73 72 73 74 65 65 149 Appendix B Cross-Reference Tables Escape Sequence Quick Reference The following table is a quick reference between the escape sequences listed in ascending order, according to numeric values. For detailed defini-

tions, see Chapter 2, Control Code Definitions. Decimal Description Select Double-Wide (expanded) Mode (one line only) Select Condensed Mode (compressed) Cancel Condensed Mode Cancel Double-Wide (expanded) Mode (one line only) Select Top-Down Printing Select Bottom-Up Printing Define Inter-Character Space Master Select Set Print Position (absolute) Select Default Character Set Select User-Defined Character Set ESC SO ESC SI ESC DC2 ESC DC4 ESC US (0) ESC US (1) ESC SP n ESC ! n ESC $ n1 n2 ESC % (0) ESC % (1) ESC & NUL k1 k2 s1 d1...d11 Define User-Defined Characters ESC * m n1 n2 ESC + n d1...dn ESC - 0*

ESC - 1*

ESC / c ESC 0 ESC 1 ESC 2 ESC 3 n ESC 4 ESC 5 ESC 6 ESC 7 ESC <

ESC : NUL NUL NUL ESC ? s n ESC @

ESC A n ESC B NUL ESC B n1 n2 ... nk NUL ESC C n ESC C NUL n Select Graphics Mode Print Character Graphics Cancel Underline Mode Select Underline Mode Select Vertical Tab Channel Select 1/8 inch Line Spacing Select 7/72 inch Line Spacing Select 1/6 inch Line Spacing Select n/216 inch Line Spacing Select Italic Mode Cancel Italic Mode Enable Printing of Codes 128-255 Disable Printing of Codes 128-255 Select Unidirectional Printing (one line only) Copy ROM to RAM Reassign Graphics Mode Perform Master Reset Select n/72 inch Line Spacing Clear Vertical Tabs Set Vertical Tabs Set Page Length (lines) Set Page Length (inches) 150 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix B Cross-Reference Tables Description Clear Horizontal Tabs Set Horizontal Tabs Select Emphasized Mode Cancel Emphasized Mode Select Double-Strike Mode Cancel Double-Strike Mode Expand Printable Code Area Perform n/216 inch Line Feed Select Single-density Graphics Mode Select Low-Speed Double-Density Graphics Mode Select Elite Pitch Set Skip Over Perforation Cancel Skip Over Perforation Select Pica Pitch Set Right Margin Codepage Selection Select National Character Set Select Superscript Mode Select Subscript Mode Cancel Superscript/Subscript Mode Cancel Unidirectional Printing Select Unidirectional Printing Cancel Double-Wide (expanded) Mode Select Double-Wide (expanded) Mode Select High-Speed Double-Density Graphics Mode Select Low-Speed Quadruple-Density Graphics Mode Select 9-pin Single Density Graphics Mode Select 9-pin Double Density Graphics Mode Clear Vertical Tab Channel Set Vertical Tabs in Channel Perform n/216 inch Reverse Line Feed Set Left Margin Cancel Half-speed Printing Select Half-speed Printing Disable Printing of Character Graphics Enable Printing of Character Graphics Set Inactivity Time for Sleep mode Set Print Position (relative) Decimal (continued) ESC D NUL ESC D n1 n2 ... nk NUL ESC E ESC F ESC G ESC H ESC I n ESC J n ESC K n1 n2 ESC L n1 n2 ESC M ESC N n ESC O ESC P ESC Q n ESC R n0 n1 n2 ESC R n ESC S 0*

ESC S 1*

ESC T ESC U 0*

ESC U 1*

ESC W 0*

ESC W 1*

ESC Y n1 n2 ESC Z n1 n2 ESC ^ (0) n1 n2 ESC ^ (1) n1 n2 ESC b c NUL ESC b c n1 n2 ... nk NUL ESC j n ESC l n ESC s 0*

ESC s 1*

ESC t (0) ESC t (1) ESC z n ESC \ n1 n2 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 151 Appendix B Cross-Reference Tables Factory-Installed Printer Defaults Function Default Value At left margin Normal (not user defined) 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Not selected Disabled Zero (0) Disabled Disabled Left justification Enabled USA 1/6 inch 0 80 Disabled Disabled 11 inch (66 lines with Pica pitch) Enabled Pica (10 characters per inch) 10 seconds Carriage position Character set Codepage Codes 128-255 Condensed (compressed) Double-Strike Double-Wide Emphasized Graphics mode Half-speed printing Intercharacter space International character sets Italic Justification Keyboard, printer Language Line Spacing Margin, left Margin, right MSB control NLQ Page length Paper end sensor Pitch Power off sleep timer Printer Code Area Expansion Disabled Printing direction Redefinition of graphic modes Disabled Disabled Skip over perforation Disabled Subscript/Superscript Tabs, horizontal Set to default tabs (every 8 column) 1 line feed each tab, channel = 0 Tabs, vertical Set to current line Top of form Underline Disabled Disabled (bidirectional) Unidirectional printing User defined character set Removed Top-down, bidirectional 152 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix B Cross-Reference Tables The settings in the previous table are installed in the printer at the factory. To restore the printer to these defaults, see page 10 for instructions. The default settings listed below can be restored to the printer, as described in Chapter 4, Using the Configuration Utility. Function Default Value Zero print option Autofeed configuration Protocol Parity Bit Rate Zeros are printed with a slash CR (carriage return added at end of line without line feed) NPCP (NORAND Portable Communications Protocol) N/A (for NPCP) 19.2K 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 153 Appendix B Cross-Reference Tables 154 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Printer Font Test Jobs C For each of our 6820 Fonts, Intermec Systems test department has a spe-

cial test print job. This appendix contains a sample print job from each font available on your 6820 Printer. You can perform these tests yourselves. Load the font of choice from the Toolkit CD into flash memory. After downloading the desired font, use any of the sample print jobs to reveal the character locations within the printer memory. The sample test print jobs are formated as a memory mapped and could be referenced to select a desired character. These test print jobs originated from running a C program by a person with specific knowledge of how to generate such a report (print job). The C program demonstrates how a programmer could access the printer font modules within flash memory to select desired character. You do not need more than one font module loaded. Any ONE of:

NFT00932.MOD, NFT00936.MOD, NFT00949.MOD, or even NFT00950.MOD Asian fonts can be used. These are distributed via the NPTK6820 toolkit (including the source code). These print jobs are in this appendix:

S BIG5.C which creates BIG5950.TXT (page 156) S CHINA.C which creates GB2312.TXT (page 156) S IBM437.C which creates IBM437.TXT (page 156) S JAPAN.C which creates JIS932.TXT (page 157) S KOREA.C which creates KOREA.TXT (page 157) S NATION.C which creates NATION.TXT (page 157) 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 155 Appendix C Printer Font Test Jobs Big 5 Traditional Chinese Character Set This program generates a text file, BIG5950.TXT, to copy to a 6820 Printer. The textfile illustrates the use of the BIG 5 traditional Chinese character set. Install the BIG 5 character font, NFT00950.MOD, in the printer flash using the configuration tool to have BIG5950.TXT print cor-

rectly. 1 Use the Microsoft C version 7.00 compiler. cl big5.c /link slibce graphics 2 Run BIG5.EXE to create BIG5950.TXT 3 Copy this text file to the appropriate printer port. Simplified Chinese Character Set This program generates a text file, GB2312.TXT, that to copy to a 6820 Printer. The textfile illustrates the use of the Simplified Chinese character set. Install the Simplified Chinese character font, NFT00936.MOD, in the printer flash using the configuration tool to have GB2312.TXT print correctly. 1 Use the Microsoft C version 7.00 compiler. cl china.c /link slibce graphics 2 Run CHINA.EXE to create GB2312.TXT. 3 Copy this text file to the appropriate printer port. IBM 437 Codepage Character Set This program generates a text file, IBM437.TXT, to copy to a 6820 Print-

er. The textfile illustrates the use of the IBM 437 codepage character set. Install the IBM 437 character font, NFT00437.MOD, in the printer flash using the configuration tool to have IBM437.TXT print correctly. 1 Use the Microsoft C version 7.00 compiler. cl ibm437.c /link slibce graphics 2 Run IBM437.EXE to create IBM437.TXT. 3 Copy this text file to the appropriate printer port. 156 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Japanese (Shift JIS) Character Set Appendix C Printer Font Test Jobs This program generates a text file, JIS932.TXT, to copy to a 6820 Printer. The textfile illustrates the use of the JIS character set. Install the JIS char-

acter font, NFT00932.MOD, in the printer flash using the configuration tool to have JIS932.TXT print correctly. 1 Use the Microsoft C version 7.00 compiler. cl japan.c /link slibce graphics 2 Run JAPAN.EXE to create JIS932.TXT. 3 Copy this text file to the appropriate printer port. Korean Character Set This program generates a text file, KOREA.TXT, to copy to a 6820 Print-

er. The textfile illustrates the use of the KSC5601 character set. Install the KSC5601 character font, NFT00949.MOD, in the printer flash using the configuration tool to have KOREA.TXT print correctly. 1 Use the Microsoft C version 7.00 compiler. cl korea.c /link slibce graphics 2 Run KOREA.EXE to create KOREA.TXT. 3 Copy this text file to the appropriate printer port. International Character Set This program generates a text file, NATION.TXT, to copy to a 6820 Printer. The textfile illustrates the international character sets available for use in the default character set. Install the default character set font, NFT00000.MOD, the printer flash using the configuration tool to have NATION.TXT print correctly. 1 Use the Microsoft C version 7.00 compiler. cl nation.c /link slibce graphics 2 Run NATION.EXE to create NATION.TXT. 3 Copy this text file to the appropriate printer port. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 157 Appendix C Printer Font Test Jobs 158 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Index I The Control Codes index covers 6820 Printer control code topics. The General Index covers all topics. Those in italics are figures, those in bold are tables. The Files Index is to assist you in locating descriptions for device drivers, applica-

tions, utilities, batch files, or other files within this publication. 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 159 Index Control Codes B Backspace (BS), 64 Beeper, 65 Bottom-up printing, select bottom-up printing, 68 C Cancel line (CAN), 65 Carriage return (CR), 65 Channel clear vertical tabs in channel, 80 select vertical tab channel, 80 set vertical tabs in channel, 80 Character graphics disable printing of character graphics, 88 enable printing of character graphics, 87 print character graphics, 88 Character sets define user-defined characters, 85 select default character set, 86 select national character set, 82 select user-defined character set, 85 function names in this index Code area, expand printable code area, 87 Codepage selection, 82 Codes 128-255 disable printing of codes 128-255, 86 enable printing of codes 128-255, 86 Condensed (compressed) mode cancel condensed mode, 73 select condensed mode, 72 Control code/escape sequence table, 142 Copy ROM to RAM, 84 Character style and text mode functions. See individual D Default/national character set select default character set, 86 select national character set, 82 Define See also User-defined characters define user-defined characters, 85 inter-character space, 75 select user-defined character set, 85 Delete (DEL 7Fh), 65 Double density graphics functions select 9-pin double density graphics mode, 92 select high-speed double density graphics mode, 8-pin, select low-speed double density graphics mode, 8-pin, 91 90 Double-strike cancel double-strike mode, 73 select double-strike mode, 73 Double-wide (expanded) cancel double-wide mode, 74 cancel double-wide mode (one-line-only), 74 select double-wide mode, 74 select double-wide mode (one-line-only), 73 E Eight-pin graphics functions reassign graphics mode, 89 select graphics mode, 89 select high-speed double density graphics mode, 91 select low-speed double density graphics mode, 90 select low-speed quadruple density graphics mode, 91 select single density graphics mode, 90 Elite pitch, select elite pitch, 74 Emphasized mode cancel emphasized mode, 75 select emphasized mode, 74 Escape sequence/control code table, 142 Expand printable code area, 87 Expanded mode. See Double-wide F Form feed (FF), 65 G General printer control functions. See specific topics in this index Graphics functions, eight-pin mode reassign graphics mode, 89 select graphics mode, 89 select high-speed double density graphics mode, 91 select low- double density graphics mode, 90 select low-speed quadruple density graphics mode, 91 select single density graphics mode, 90 Graphics functions, nine-pin mode select 9-pin double density graphics mode, 92 select 9-pin single density graphics mode, 92 Graphics, character disable printing of character graphics, 88 enable printing of character graphics, 87 print character graphics, 88 High-speed graphics functions, select high-speed double H Half-speed cancel half-speed printing, 66 select half-speed printing, 66 density graphics mode, 91 Horizontal tabs clear horizontal tabs, 78 perform horizontal tab, 78 set horizontal tabs, 78 I Inactivity time, set inactivity time for sleep mode, 66 Intercharacter space, define intercharacter space, 75 International character sets. See National/default character sets Italic mode cancel italic mode, 75 select italic mode, 75 L Left margin, set left margin, 71 160 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Length of page set page length (inches), 69 set page length (lines), 69 Line feed (LF), 66 perform line feed, 66 perform n/216-inch line feed, 66 perform n/216-inch reverse line feed, 67 Line spacing select 1/6-inch line spacing, 70 select 1/8-inch line spacing, 70 select 7/72-inch line spacing, 70 select n/216-inch line spacing, 70 Low-speed graphics functions, select low-speed double den-

sity graphics, 90 M Margins Master Modes set left margin, 71 set right margin, 71 master select, 75 perform master reset, 67 bottom-up printing, 68 condensed mode, 72 double-strike mode, 73 double-wide mode, 73 elite pitch, 74 emphasized mode, 74 expanded mode. See Double-wide mode graphic modes. See Graphics functions, eight-pin modes;

Graphics functions, nine-pin modes half-speed printing, 66 inactivity time for sleep mode, 66 italic mode, 75 pica pitch, 76 subscript mode, 77 superscript mode, 77 top-down printing, 68 underline, 77 N National/default character set select default character set, 86 select national character set, 82 Nine-pin graphics functions select 9-pin double density graphics mode, 92 select 9-pin single density graphics mode, 92 O One line printing, select unidirectional (one line) printing, 69 P Page formatting functions. See Line feed, Line spacing, Mar-

gins, Page length, Perforation Page length set page length (inches), 69 Index set page length (lines), 69 Perforation cancel skip over perforation, 72 set skip over perforation, 72 Pitch select elite pitch, 74 select pica pitch, 76 Print position set print position (absolute), 67 set print position (relative), 68 Printable, expand printable code area, 87 Printing cancel half-speed printing, 66 cancel unidirectional printing, 68 disable printing of character graphics, 88 disable printing of codes 128-255, 86 enable printing of character graphics, 87 enable printing of codes 128-255, 86 print character graphics, 88 select bottom-up printing, 68 select half-speed printing, 66 select top-down printing, 68 select unidirectional (one line) printing, 69 select unidirectional printing, 68 Q Quadruple density graphics functions, select low-speed quadruple density graphics mode, 91 R Relative, set print position (relative), 68 Reset, perform master reset, 67 Reverse, perform n/216-inch reverse line feed, 67 Right margin, set right margin, 71 ROM to RAM, copy ROM to RAM, 84 S Single density graphics functions select 9-pin single density graphics mode, 92 select single density graphics mode, 8-pin, 90 Skip over perforation cancel skip over perforation, 72 set skip over perforation, 72 Sleep mode, set inactivity time for sleep mode, 66 Space, intercharacter, define intercharacter space, 75 Spacing, line select 1/6-inch line spacing, 70 select 1/8-inch line spacing, 70 select 7/72-inch line spacing, 70 select n/216-inch line spacing, 70 Subscript Superscript cancel subscript/superscript mode, 77 select subscript mode, 77 cancel subscript/superscript mode, 77 select superscript mode, 77 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 161 Index T Tabs and tab setting functions horizontal tabs clear horizontal tabs, 78 perform horizontal tab, 78 set horizontal tabs, 78 vertical tabs clear vertical tabs, 80 clear vertical tabs in channel, 80 perform vertical tab, 79 select vertical tab channel, 80 set vertical tabs, 79 set vertical tabs in channel, 80 Time, set inactivity time for sleep mode, 66 Top-down printing, select top-down printing, 68 U Underline mode cancel underline mode, 77 select underline mode, 77 Unidirectional printing cancel unidirectional printing, 68 select unidirectional (one line) printing, 69 select unidirectional printing, 68 User-defined characters copy ROM to RAM, 84 define user-defined characters, 85 disable printing of character graphics, 88 disable printing of codes 128-255, 86 enable printing of character graphics, 87 enable printing of codes 128-255, 86 expand printable code area, 87 print character graphics, 88 select default character set, 86 select national character set, 82 select user-defined character set, 85 V Vertical tabs clear vertical tabs, 80 clear vertical tabs in channel, 80 perform vertical tabs, 79 select vertical tab channel, 80 set vertical tabs, 79 set vertical tabs in channel, 80 162 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual General Index Numbers 4000 series computer, inserting in terminal holder, 23 4000 Series Terminal Holder, 2 600 series computer, inserting in terminal holder, 24 61XX computer, inserting in terminal holder, 24 61XX Terminal Holder, 2 62XX computer, inserting in terminal holder, 23 62XX Terminal Holder, 2 pin-out configuration, 114 700 series computer Bluetooth adapter to 6820 passthrough, 97 to module communication interface, 97 inserting in terminal holder, 24, 24 A A2D check, self-test functions, 121 A2D history - self-test, 123 Absolute, set print position (absolute), 67 Actions performed during self-test, 122 Adapter. See Bluetooth, adapter Alpha keyboard, Windows 95/98, 41, 48 Arabic font file, NFT00000.MOD, 36 ASCII, 64 Autofeed (setting), 32 Big 5 traditional Chinese character set, 81 sample test page, 156 Big 5 Traditional Chinese font file, NFT00950.MOD, 36 self-test, 123 Automatic line feed, 65 B Battery internal, 3, 15 vehicle, 3 voltage, self-test, 123 sample test page, 156 Bit rate (selecting), 33 self-test, 123 Bluetooth 700 series computers, 97 adapter, 95, 96 700 series computers, 97 applications, 102 class of device, 99 configuration utility, 56, 62 connectability, 99 default configuration, 105 default device name, 99 discoverability, 99 environment specifications, 103 indicators, 97 link keys, 99 link loss, 99, 100 master/slave, 99 Index modes, 96 operation, 103 performance range, 100 pin states, 96 power management flow, 98 power on/off mechanism, 98 query items, 100 safety/regulatory/agency requirements, 104 SDP record, 99 security, 99 self-test, 101 settings to reset after cold boot, 99 states, 96 Configuration Commands, 133 Bluetooth Configuration Commands clear link key table, 140 command, 134 connectable on/off, 137 enable discoverable, 138 manage security modes, 139 modes command, 136 control, 136 operating, 135 notation, 134 query mode commands, 136 read local device address, 140 read module version, 139 set class of device/service field, 137 set encryption/authentication, 138 set local Bluetooth device name, 137 set service name, 137 set shutdown timing, 140 specify inquiry scan timing, 138 specify page scan timing, 138 web links, 140 Bluetooth Link Active State, 135 Bluetooth Link Inactive State, 135 Boot block, self-test functions, 121 Buffers I/O buffer, 64 print (image) buffer, 64 Buttons, erase (fonts), Windows 95/98, 45 C Cables 15-pin to 25-pin, 111 25-pin to 15-pin, 114 25-pin to 25-pin, 112 9-pin to 15-pin, 113 part numbers, 12 Y power cable connections, part number, 12 Change configuration parameters error messages, 61 Windows 95/98, 46 Changing the printer settings configuration mode, 32 protocol selection mode, 32 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 163 Index Character sets Chinese Big 5 traditional, 81, 156 GB 2312, 81, 156 double-byte, 81 Greek, 84 Hebrew, 83 international, 82, 83 sample test page, 157 Japanese, shift JIS, 81 sample test page, 157 Korean, KSC-5601, 81 sample test page, 157 multi-byte, 82 select national, 82 single byte, 81 Character style functions, 72 CK60 handheld, inserting in terminal holder, 24 Class of device, Bluetooth adapter, 99 Cleaning inside, 28 mask spring, 30 outside, 27 Cleaning solutions part numbers, 12 use of, 27 Clear link key table, 140 Code page file NFT00932.MOD, 932 file, 81 NFT00936.MOD, 936 file, 81 NFT00949.MOD, 949 file, 81 NFT00950.MOD, 950 file, 81 Command modes, Bluetooth Configuration Commands, 136 Commands Bluetooth Configuration Commands, 134 clear link key table, 140 connectable on/off, 137 enable discoverable, 138 manage security modes, 139 query mode, 136 read local device address, 140 read module version, 139 set class of device/service field, 137 set encryption/authentication, 138 set local Bluetooth device name, 137 set service name, 137 set shutdown timing, 140 specify inquiry scan timing, 138 specify page scan timing, 138 Communications connector, 4 Communications connector pin-outs, 116 Configuration Bluetooth adapter, 56, 62 get 6820 settings, Windows 2000/XP, 58 installation Windows 2000/XP, 53 Windows 95/98, 38 overview of operation, Windows 2000/XP, 56 setting 6820 printer configuration, Windows 2000/XP, 58 starting up the program, RGPCONF.EXE, Windows 95/98, 39 working memory Windows 2000/XP, 56 Windows 95/98, 38 Configuration mode, 32 autofeed, 32 bit rate, 33 self-test, 123 zero print option, 33 Connectability, Bluetooth adapter, 99 Connectable on/off, 137 Connectors, 4 Control codes character sets and user-defined functions, 81 character style and text mode functions, 72 cross-reference tables, control codes & escape sequences index, 142 general printer control functions, 64 graphics functions, 89 page formatting functions, 69 tabs and tab setting functions, 78 Control modes, Bluetooth Configuration Commands, 136 Control panel, 5 include control program, Windows 95/98, 44 include control program update, Windows 2000/XP, 61 self-test function, control program verification, 121 Cross-reference tables, control codes & escape sequences buttons, 5 indicators, 5 Control program filename, NPFL6820.MOD Windows 2000/XP, 61 Windows 95/98, 44 Copy fonts Windows 2000/XP, 60 Windows 95/98, 44 index, 142 D DC power connector jack, 4 Default 38, 50, 51 printer settings Windows 2000/XP, 61 Windows 95/98, 52 configuration file, DEFAULT.PCF, Windows 95/98, save default settings to printer, Windows 95/98, 50 Delete fonts, Windows 95/98, 45 Detection, paper end, page layout specifications, 94 Device name, Bluetooth adapter, 99 Diagnostic information, 129 accessing, 129 updating, 128 164 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Dimensions fixed mount, 9 portable, 9 wall mount, 9 Discoverability, Bluetooth adapter, 99 Double byte character sets, 81 Double-spacing, 123 DTR, protocol configuration, Windows 95/98, 47 E Enable discoverable, 138 End paper detection, paper layout specifications, 94 Environment specifications, Bluetooth adapter, 103 Erase fonts, function, Windows 95/98, 45 Error handling, 118 EEPROM configuration errors, 121 fatal errors, 120 flash errors, 120 POST errors, 119 run-time errors, 118 Error log - self-test, 124 Error messages, printer settings, Windows 2000/XP, 61 Escape sequences, cross-reference (to definitions), 142 Exit from the configuration utility program, Windows 95/98, 40 F Factory defaults Windows 2000/XP, 61 Windows 95/98, 52 Fatal errors, 120 Fixed mount printer, 2 connectors, 4 description, 2 dimensions, 9 internal battery, 3 loading paper tray, 18 Flash accessing diagnostic information, 129 errors, 120 space available Windows 2000/XP, 60 Windows 95/98, 45 updates. See Using the Configuration Tool updating diagnostic information, 128 Font files Arabic, NFT00000.MOD, 36 Big 5 Traditional Chinese, NFT00950.MOD, 36, 156 GB2312 Chinese Simplified, NFT00936.MOD, 36, 156 IBM/Microsoft compatible Code Page 437, NFT00437.MOD, 36, 156 International, NFT00000.MOD, 36, 157 JIS Japanese, NFT00932.MOD, 36, 157 KSC5601 Korean, NFT00949.MOD, 36, 157 Turkish, NFT00000.MOD, 36 Font module verification, self-test function, 121 Fonts copy Windows 2000/XP, 60 Windows 95/98, 44 Index erase, Windows 95/98, 45 sample print jobs, 155 save, Windows 95/98, 45 FORM FEED button, 5 Four position screws, printer mechanism, 110 GB2312 Chinese Simplified font file, NFT00936.MOD, G GB 2312, Chinese character set, 81 sample test page, 156 36 sample test page, 156 General printer control functions, 64 Get 6820 configuration, 58 Graphics functions, 89 Greek character sets, 84 GUIDE SHAFT CLEANER, 27 Guide shaft cleaner, part number, 12 H Head dot pattern - self-test, 123 HEAD JAM indicator, 5 self-test history, 123 Hebrew character sets, 83 Hinges on printer cover, 6 Horizontal tabs, 78 clear, 78 perform, 78 set, 78 I I/O buffer, 64 IBM/Microsoft compatible Code Page 437 font file, NFT00437.MOD, 36 sample test page, 156 Image buffer, 64 Include control program (configuration tool) Windows 2000/XP, 61 Windows 95/98, 44 Indicators, Bluetooth adapter, 97 Inside Sales, 12 Installation (configuration utility) Windows 2000/XP, 53 Windows 95/98, 38 Installing internal battery, 15 ribbon cartridge, 16 Interface mode, self-test, 123 Internal battery, 3 installing, 15 Internal power module, 6 International character set, 82, 83 sample test page, 157 International font file, NFT00000.MOD, 36 sample test page, 157 J Japanese character set (Shift JIS), 81 sample test page, 157 JIS Japanese font file, NFT00932.MOD, 36 sample test page, 157 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 165 Index K Korean character set (KSC-5601), 81 sample test page, 157 KSC-5601, Korean character set, 81 sample test page, 157 KSC5601 Korean font file, NFT00949.MOD, 36 sample test page, 157 L Lights (indicator), 5 Line Feed, auto configuration, 65 LINE FEED button, 5 setting paper for printing, 22 Link keys, Bluetooth adapter, 99 Link loss, Bluetooth adapter, 99, 100 Loading compact paper tray, 19 wall mount printer, 19 Loading paper tray fixed mount printer, 18 portable printer, 18 LOW BATT indicator, 5 self-test, 123 M Maintenance, ribbon cartridge, removing, 29 Manage security modes, 139 Mask spring, 30 cleaning, 30 exposing, 31 Master/slave, Bluetooth adapter, 99 Memory test nonvolatile diagnostic memory update, 121 nonvolatile diagnostic memory verification, 121 MICRO-CLEAN II, 27 MICRO-CLEAN II, part number, 12 Model number, self-test, 123 Modify Printer Configuration options, include control pro-

gram Windows 2000/XP, 61 Windows 95/98, 44 Multi-byte character sets, 82 Multiple-sheet forms, 17 N National character set, 82 Notation, Bluetooth Configuration Commands, 134 NUL, 64 O Operating modes, Bluetooth Configuration Commands, 135 Operation check list, 14 inserting the computer 4000 Series, 23 600 series, 24 61XX Computer, 24 62XX Computer, 23 700 series, 24 CK60, 24 internal battery, 15 loading paper into printer, 20 loading paper tray, 18 pinfeed holders, 20, 21 ribbon cartridge, 16 P Page formatting control codes, 69 Page layout fanfold paper, 93 Paper, 7 part numbers, 12 Paper (head) jams, 17 Paper adjustments pinfeed holders, 21 print head gap, 17 Paper end detection page layout, 94 PAPER OUT indicator, 5 Parameters, Windows 95/98, 46 Persistent storage, Bluetooth adapter, 99 Pin states, Bluetooth adapter, 96 Portable printer, 2 connectors, 4 description, 2 dimensions, 9 internal battery, 3 loading paper tray, 18 Power indicator, 5 Power management flow, Bluetooth adapter, 98 Power on/off mechanism, Bluetooth adapter, 98 Power supply, internal battery, 15 Power-on self-test (POS) errors, description, 119 Print (image) buffer, 64 Print head, printer alignment, 109 Print head gap multiple-sheet forms, 17 set to third notch, 17 single-sheet forms, 17 Print jobs, 155 Printer control codes See also Section 5, Cross-Reference Tables character sets and user-defined functions, 81 character style and text mode functions, 72 general printer control functions, 64 graphics functions, 89 page formatting functions, 69 tabs and tab setting functions, 78 Printer default settings Windows 2000/XP, 61 Windows 95/98, 52 Printer descriptions fixed mount, 2 portable, 2 wall mount, 2 Printer mechanism alignment, 109 four position screws, 110 Printer problems, 126 Printer self-test detailed description, 122 function descriptions, 121 Printer test pages, 155 Printer, get from (load configuration), Windows 95/98, 42 166 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Printer, save configuration to, Windows 95/98, 49 Programs, self-test A2D check, 121 boot block, 121 control program verification, 121 Windows 2000/XP, 56, 61 Windows 95/98, 38, 44 font module verification, 121 nonvolatile diagnostic memory update, 121 nonvolatile diagnostic memory verification, 121 Protocol binary sequence, 33 Protocol selection mode, 32 interface mode - self-test, 123 Q Query items, Bluetooth adapter, 100 Query mode commands, 136 R Range, Bluetooth adapter, 100 Read local device address, 140 Read module version, 139 Reflash printer, configuring. See the Using the Configura-

tion Tool section Remote connections, 9 Removing ribbon cartridge, 29 Reset button portable, 10 wall mount, 10 Restore defaults to printer Windows 2000/XP, 61 Windows 95/98, 52 Ribbon cartridge install, 16 part number black ribbon, 12 purple ribbon, 12 removing, 29 replacement frequency, 28 Ribbon cartridges, part numbers, 12 Run-time errors, description, 118 S Safety/Regulatory/Agency requirements, Bluetooth adapter, 104 Save (update working configuration), Windows 95/98, 47 Save defaults to printer, Windows 95/98, 50 Save fonts, Windows 95/98, 45 Save to printer, Windows 95/98, 49 SDP record, Bluetooth adapter, 99 Security, Bluetooth adapter, 99 Selecting the protocol, 32 Self-test A2D history, 123 actions performed, 122 autofeed setting, 123 battery voltage, 123 bit rate, 123 Bluetooth adapter, 101 error log, 124 Index explanation of functions A2D check, 121 boot block, 121 control program, 121 font module, 121 nonvolatile diagnost memory verification, 121 nonvolatile diagnostic memory update, 121 head dot pattern, 123 head jam history, 123 initiating, 122 interface mode, 123 overview, 122 printer model, 123 serial number, 123 Serial number, self-test, 123 Set class of device/service field, 137 Set encryption/authentication, 138 Set local Bluetooth device name, 137 SET PAGE button, 5 setting paper for printing, 22 Set service name, 137 Set shutdown timing, 140 Setting 6820 printer configuration, 58 Settings, default Windows 2000/XP, 61 Windows 95/98, 52 Shift JIS, Japanese character set, 81 sample test page, 157 Single byte character sets, 81 Single-sheet forms, 17 Sleep mode, set activity time for, 66 Space remaining in flash Windows 2000/XP, 60 Windows 95/98, 45 Specifications, 11 Specify inquiry scan timing, 138 Specify page scan timing, 138 T Tabs and tab setting control codes, 78 Terminal holder inserting 4000 Series or 62XX Computer, 23 inserting 700 series computer, 24 inserting in, 23 Text mode control codes, 72 Tool kit, self-extracting archive file, Windows 95/98, 38 Traditional, Bit 5, Chinese character set, 81 sample test page, 156 Troubleshooting Bluetooth adapter, 101 communications protocol, 110 diagnostics, 128 error handling, 118 possible printer problems, 126 power source, 108 POST error codes, 120 self-test, 101, 121 tips, 126 verifications, 117 Turkish font file, NFT00000.MOD, 36 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 167 Index U URLs, Bluetooth Configuration Commands, 140 User-defined control code functions, 81 Utility, configuration installation Windows 2000/XP, 53 Windows 95/98, 38 operation Windows 2000/XP, 56 Windows 95/98, 38 V Vehicle battery, 3 Verifications communications/host computer, 118 printer components, 117 Vertical tabs, 79 clear, 80 clear in channel, 80 line spacing, 70 perform, 79 select channel, 80 select double-wide mode, 73 set, 79 set in channel, 80 Visible moving parts in mechanism, 28 W Wall mount printer, 2 connectors, 4 description, 2 dimensions, 9 loading compact paper tray, 19 Working configuration Windows 2000/XP, 56 Windows 95/98, 38 X XON/XOFF protocol configuration, Windows 95/98, 47 Z Zero print option, 153 print character graphics, 88 select default character set, 86 select national character set, 82 select user-defined character set, 85 Zero print option (adjusting), 33 Zero printer option Windows 2000/XP, 61 Windows 95/98, 52 168 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Files Index B BIG5.EXE, 156 BIG5950.TXT, 156 C CHINA.EXE, 156 D DEFAULT.PCF, default configuration, Windows 95/98, 38, 50 G GB2312.TXT, 156 I IBM437.EXE, 156 IBM473.TXT, 156 J JAPAN.EXE, 157 JIS932.TXT, 157 K KOREA.EXE, 157 KOREA.TXT, 157 N NATION.EXE, 157 NATION.TXT, 157 NFT00000.MOD Arabic, 36 default character set, 81 default international, 36 sample test page, 157 Index Turkish, 36 NFT00437.MOD IBM/Microsoft compatible, 81 IBM/Microsoft compatible Code Page 437, 36 sample test page, 156 NFT00932.MOD, 155 code page 932, 81 JIS Japanese, 36 sample test page, 157 NFT00936.MOD, 155 code page 936, 81 GB2312 Chinese simplified, 36 sample test page, 156 NFT00949.MOD, 155 code page 949, 81 KSC5601 Korean, 36 sample test page, 157 NFT00950.MOD, 155 Big 5 Traditional Chinese, 36 sample test page, 156 code page 950, 81 NPFL6820.MOD, control program Windows 2000/XP, 61 Windows 95/98, 44 NPTK6820.EXE, toolkit self-extracting, Windows 95/98, 38 P PCONFIGAPP.EXE, configuration utility, application, Windows 2000/XP, 53 R RPGCONF.EXE, configuration utility, application, Win-

dows 95/98, 38 RPGCONF.INI, installation file, Windows 95/98, 38 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 169 Index 170 6820 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Corporate Headquarters 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, Washington 98203 U.S.A. tel 425.348.2600 fax 425.355.9551 www.intermec.com 6820 Series 80-Column Printer User's Manual

*961-019-013J*

P/N 961-019-013 REV J